manualshive.com logo in svg

Piper Navajo Chieftain PA-31-350, Service Manual

The Piper Navajo Chieftain PA-31-350 Maintenance Manual is the ultimate guide for maintaining and repairing this exceptional aircraft. This comprehensive manual is available for free download at manualshive.com, providing aviation enthusiasts with a valuable resource to ensure the optimal performance and safety of their aircraft.

Share
Download
background image

Courtesy of Bomar Flying Service

               www.bomar.biz

Summary of Contents for Navajo Chieftain PA-31-350

Page 1: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL CARD 1 OF4 PA 31 350 PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORATION PART NUMBER 761488 1A1 Courtesy of Bomar Flying Service www bomar biz ...

Page 2: ...ical locationof materialor completepageadditionsarenotidentifiedby revisionlines Revisions to Service Manual 761 488 issued November 11 1972 are as follows Revisions Publication Date Aerofiche Card Effectivity ORG721111 CR800923 PR810311 PR810824 PR820208 PR821015 PR831005 PR840305 PR840503 IR860429 IR860925 IR870505 IR871009 IR900313 PR940331 IR941230 IR960716 November 11 1972 September 23 1980 M...

Page 3: ...E18 V SURFACE CONTROLS 1H16 AEROFICHE CARD NO 2 VI HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 2A8 VII LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM 2D14 VIII POWER PLANT 2H3 IX FUEL SYSTEM 2K1 AEROFICHE CARD NO 3 X INSTRUMENTS 3A7 XI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3C8 AEROFICHE CARD NO 4 XII ELECTRONICS 4A9 XIII HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM 4B6 XIV ACCESSORIES AND UTILITIES 4D24 1A3 ...

Page 4: ...1A4 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 5: ...1A5 INTENTIONALLY LEFTBLANK ...

Page 6: ...on of Aircraft Fluid Lines Wing Flap Transmission Inspection Wing Flap Actuator Cable 100 Hour Inspection Wing Flap Actuator Cable 500 Hour Inspection Friction Reduction in Wing Flap System Wing Flap Motor Inspection of Aileron Sprocket and Chain Fuel Selector and Crossfeed Valve Control Cables Landing Light Installation Aileron and Flap Installation Methods of Blocking Trim Cables Fuselage Cradle...

Page 7: ... ElevatorTravelStops 1115 5 8a SafetyWiringControlSurfaceStops 1115 5 9 Deleted 5 10 Methodsof BlockingTrimCables 11 18 5 11 Cable Routingon ElevatorTim Servo 1120 5 12 RudderPedalInsta llation 1123 5 13 RudderandRudderTrimControls 2 5 14 ClampingRudderPedalsinNeutralPosition 4 5 15 Installationof RudderRiggingTool 1 5 16 TrimScrewAssembly J6 5 17 ControlPed estal 8 5 18 FlapControls DukesSystem 1...

Page 8: ...6 16 Safetying Control Arm Wiebel Tool C4 6 17 Indexing of Selector Spool Wiebel Tool 2C5 6 18 Handle Release Adjustment Wiebel Tool C7 6 19 Landing Gear Selector Mechanism 2C10 6 20 Hand Pump Ozone 2C 6 21 Hand Pump Wiebel Tool 2C 16 6 22 Hydraulic System Installation 2C 1 6 23 Gear Actuating Cylinder Ozone C19 6 24 Gear Actuating Cylinder Wiebel Tool 2C21 6 25 Gear Door Actuating Cylinder Ozone ...

Page 9: ... Pressure and Back Plates Brake Disc Visual Check for Serviceable Limits Fabncated Rivet Tool Goodyear Only Fabricated Tool Checking Nose Wheel Alignment Fabricated Tool Checking Nose Gear Link Travel Fabricated Tool Checking Main Gear Side Brace Link Travel Fabricated Tool Checking Main Gear Toe in Adjustment Nose Gear Wear Limits Main Gear Wear Limits Engine Cowling Cowl Flap Transmission and Se...

Page 10: ... 2a FuelCell Installation NacelleOptional 2K7 9 3 Fuel Cell Installation Auxiliary Outboard 2K10 9 4 Installation of Fuel Valve Drain Plate 2K12 9 5 Fuel Gauge Adjustment Wires 2K12 9 6 Fuel Selector Valve Scott 2K16 9 7 Crossfeed Valve 2K17 9 8 Fire WallShutoff Valve 2K17 9 9 Fuel System Installation 2K19 9 10 Adjustment of Crossfeed Valve 2K24 9 11 Fuel Filter 2K24 9 12 Electric Fuel Pump 2L2 9 ...

Page 11: ...ulator Lamar 0D9 11 21 Application of Overvoltage Control 3D1O 1 22 Testing Overvoltage Control DI0 11 23 Exploded View Starting Motor 3D12 2 TurnExploded Starting Motor Commutator 11 24 Turning Motor Commutator D1J 11 25 Testing Motor Armature for Shorts D 14 11 26 Testing Motor Fields for Grounds 3D15 11 2 Testing Motor Fields for Grounds 5 11 27 No Load Test Hookup D15 I 28 Stall Torque Hookup ...

Page 12: ...eater Operation Test 4C18 14 1 Oxygen System Installation Forward 6 Outlets 4E7 14 2 Oxygen System Installation Forward 8 9 and 10Outlets 4E7 14 3 Oxygen SystemInstallation Aft 6 Outlets 4E8 11 4 Oxygen System Installation Aft 8 9 and 10 Outlets 4E8 14 5 Oxygen System Installation S N 31 7752001 and up 4E9 14 5a Oxygen Tubing Installation 4E10 14 6 Electric Propeller Deicer Installation 4E17 14 7 ...

Page 13: ...Hookup 4G24 14 36 Evacuation Hookup 4H2 14 37 Charging Stand 4H4 14 38 Charging Hookup 4H8 14 39 Compressor and Fabricated Oil Dipstick 4H 10 14 40 Magnetic Clutch Installation 4H12 14 41 Expansion Valve Typical 4H14 14 42 Service Points Air Conditioning System 4H16 14 43 Air Conditioning Outlets 4H17 14 44 Positioning of Airflow Probe 4H18 14 45 Sealing of Ducts 4H19 14 46 Installation of VOI SHA...

Page 14: ... Pack Ozone 2A17 VI II Leading Particulars Hydraulic Power Pack WiebelTool 2A18 VI Ill Inspectionand Repair Hydraulic Pump 2D7 VI IV Troubleshooting Chart Hydraulic System 2DII VII I Inspection Limits 2G1 VII II Troubleshooting Chart Landing Gear System 2G10 VIII I Propeller Specifications 2H13 VIII II Turbocharger Installation Torque Values in Inch Pounds 2H24 VIII III CouplingTorques 2J7 VIII IV...

Page 15: ...lacementGuide 3E19 ComponentValuestoObtainBalanceLightOutputIntensity 3E20 ElectricalWireCoding 3E21 ElectricalSymbols 3E22 Index ElectricalSystemSchematics 3E23 Troubleshooting Chart HeatingSystem 4C23 OxygenSystemComponentLimits 4E6 Troubleshooting Chart OxygenSystem 4E14 RequiredMaterialsfor Repairof PropellerDeicer 4F2 ElectricalResistance 4F8 Troubleshooting Chart PropellerDeicerSystem 4F12 O...

Page 16: ...lage 1 5 Wing 1 6 Empennage 1 7 Flight Controls 1 8 Hydraulic System 1 9 Landing Gear 1 10 Engines and Propellers 1 11 Fuel System 1 12 Instruments 1A17 1A17 1A17 1A17 1A17 1A17 1A17 1A17 1A17 1A18 1A18 1A18 1A18 1 13 Electronic Equipment 1 14 Heating and Ventilating System gSystem 1Al8 Revised 3 11 81 1A16 ...

Page 17: ...omponentsandsystems 1 4 FUSELAGE The fuselage is a semi monocoquestructure that consists of three basic units the nose section the cabinsectionandthetailconesection 1 5 WING The laminarflow wingis of all metalstressed skin fullcantileverdesign consistingof twowing panels boltedtogetherat the centerof the fuselage The wingtips are removable The aileronare cable and pushrod controlledandarestaticall...

Page 18: ...iary fuel pumps boost pumps enginedriven pumps and a crossfeedsystem 1 12 INSTRUMENTS Provisions for the instrument installation includes panels for engine instruments and advance flight instruments as well as space for an optional second set of flight instruments for the copilot The panel is shock mounted to minimizevibration to the instruments 1 13 ELECTRONICEQUIPMENT Provision for electronic eq...

Page 19: ...1A19 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 20: ...1A20 INTENTIONALY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 21: ...ower Receptacle 2 21 Servicing 2 22 General 2 23 Fuel System 2 24 Servicing Fuel System 2 25 Filling Fuel Cells 2 26 Draining Moisture from Fuel System 2 27 Draining Fuel System 2 28 Landing Gear 1B20 IA23 1A23 IA23 IA23 IA23 IA23 IA23 1B8 1B9 I B14 1B14 1B14 1B15 IB 17 IB17 1B19 1B19 1B19 1B19 IB19 1B19 1B19 1B19 1B19 1B19 IB20 IB20 1B20 1B20 1B21 2 29 2 30 Oleo 2 31 2 32 2 33 2 34 2 35 Tires 2 3...

Page 22: ...6 Oil Screens Suction 1C3 2 57 Lubrication Airframe 1C3 2 58 Lubrication Procedures 1C3 2 59 Application of Grease IC4 2 60 Application of Oil IC4 2 61 Lubrication of Threads 1C4 2 62 Lubrication of Gaskets and Seals 1C4 2 63 Lubrication Chart 1C5 2 64 Cleaning IC5 2 65 Cleaning Engine Compartment 1C5 2 66 Cleaning Landing Gear IC21 2 67 Cleaning Exterior Surfaces IC21 2 68 Cleaning Windshield and...

Page 23: ...eferencepoints measured by inches in the vertical or horizontal direction from a givenreference line which indicates station locations of structural members of the airplane Station 0 of the fuselageis 18 inchesaft of the nose Station 0 BL of the wing horizontal stabilizer and elevator is the center line of the airplane and station 0 WL of the vertical stabilizer and rudder is 15 82 inches above th...

Page 24: ...NAVAJO CHEIFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 1125 Figure2 1 Three Viewof PA 31 350 Reissued 9 23 80 1A24 HANDLING AND SERVICING ...

Page 25: ...Champion Spark Plug Gap Setting Firing Order Starter Presolite 24 Volt Alternator Presolite 24 Volt 70 Amp Voltage Regulator Lamar Over Voltage Relay Lamar Fuel Pump Lear Siegler 350 2575 13 000 ft 260 2400 20 000 ft 210 2200 Refer to Pilot s Operating Manual See Lubrication Chart 12 qts THO8A6Q 100 130 RSA 10ED1 D6LN 2230 D6RN 2230 20 BTC 016 002 016 004 016 004 11 HSR 87L1 RHB 36W Refer to lates...

Page 26: ...se Wheel Travel Main Wheel Toe In Turning Radius Min Nose Wheel Turning Radius Min Wing Tip Wheel Nose Wheel Main Brake Type Tire Nose Tire Main Tire Pressure Nose Tire Pressure Main Hydraulically retractable Combination air and oil MIL H 5606 3 25 in 20 1 Right 20 1 Left 5 degrees 25 ft 3 in 44 0 ft Cleveland 40 76B or 40 140 Cleveland 40 102 40 130 or 40 141 Cleveland 30 68A 30 68B 30 95 6 00 x ...

Page 27: ...1124 BAGGAGE FLOOR W L 13 00 FRONT SPARATTACH FACE Figure 2 2 Station Reference Lines Revised 10 15 82 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL REAR SPARATTACH FACE HANDLING AND SERVICING 1B3 ...

Page 28: ...217 75 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 1126 296 00 REAR SPARATTACH FACE Figure 2 2 Station Reference Lines cont I Revised 10 15 82 HANDLING AND SERVICING 1B4 ...

Page 29: ...1002 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 104 50 137 0 17359 FLAP SPAR Figure 2 2 Station Reference Lines cont HANDLING AND SERVICING I Revised 10 15 82 1B5 ...

Page 30: ...ut very important procedures that should be followed to assure that the correct torque is applied 1 Calibrate the torque wrench periodically to assure accuracy and recheck frequently 2 Unless otherwise specified torque all nuts to the applicable torque in the Recommended Nut Chart Ifthe nut or the bolt is listed but not its mating fastener use the lower torque specified for the listed nut or bolt ...

Page 31: ... 320 AN 364 NAS 1022 MS 17826 MS 20364 Steel Tension AN 310 AN 315 AN 363 AN 365 MS 17825 MS 20365 MS 21045 NAS 1021 NAS 679 NAS 1291 Steel Shear AN 320 AN 364 NAS 1022 MS 17826 MS 20364 Alum Tension AN 3650 AN 3100 NAS 1021D Alum Shear AN 320D AN 364D NAS 1022D Nut bolt size Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits in lbs in lbs in lbs Torque Limits in lbs Torque Limits Torque Limits in lbs in l...

Page 32: ...ommended for all airframe installation procedures where torquing is required unless otherwise noted in sections where other values are stipulated Engine torque valuesare found in the latest revision of Avco Lycoming ServiceBulletin No 268 and propeller torque values are found in Section VIII of this manual Table II III list the torque values for flared fittings of various sizes and material NOTE W...

Page 33: ...que reading Following is the formula to be used Refer to Figure 2 3 T Torque desired at the part A Basic lever length from center of wrench shank to center of handle or stamped on wrench or listed for that model wrench B Length of adapter extension center of bolt to center of shank C Scale reading needed to obtain desired torque T The formula C A xT A B EXAMPLE A bolt requires 30 foot pounds and a...

Page 34: ...ER PLATE 14 EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE ATTACHMENTS IS OXYGEN CYLINDER HEAD 16 CONTROL CABLES PULLEYS AND TURNBUCKLES 17 CONTROL CABLES PULLEYS AND TURNBUCKLES ENGINE CONTROL LINES WIRES AND CABLES 18 HYDRAULIC HAND PUMP 19 CONTROL CABLES AND PULLEYS 20 TRIM WARNING SYSTEM IF INSTALLED 21 AUTOPILOT UNITS ROLL PITCH AND PITCH TRIM SERVOS VOLTAGE DIVIDER AND GYRO AMPLIFIER CONTROL CABLES WING FLAP MOT...

Page 35: ...SYSTEM RELIEF VALVE 14 CONDENSER AIR OUTLET PRESSURE SYSTEM AIR FILTER STROBE SENSOR IF PROP SYNCHROPHASER IS INSTALLED 15 WING TIP 16 FREON CONDENSER IF INSTALLED 17 COWL FLAP TRANSMISSION PRESSURE SYSTEM RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE SYSTEM INLINE FILTER FREON CONDENSER IF AIR CONDITIONING IS INSTALLED NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 18 AILERON CABLE PULLEYS 19 AILERON BELLCRANK 20 FUEL CELL CHECK VALVE...

Page 36: ...NAL POWER RECEPTABLE 14 NOSE LANDING GEAR 15 HYDRAULIC LINES ELECTRICAL LEADS 16 ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS LINE CONNECTORS FRONT SPAR ATTACHMENT 17 ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS LINES 18 FUEL PUMP FUEL FILTER SELECTOR VALVE CROSSFEED VALVE EMERGENCY SHUTOFF VALVE 19 FUEL FILTER BOWL 20 SPAR SPLICE DEICER PRESSURE SWITCH 21 MAIN SPAR ATTACHMENT 22 REAR SPAR ATTACHMENT 23 CABIN EXHAUST 24 SPAR SPLICE 25 BRAKE R...

Page 37: ...ction drag torque for all self locking fasteners specified in the friction drag torque table For non self locking fasteners assume the friction drag torque to be zero d For other bolt sizes determine the friction drag torque by turning the nut to near contact with the bearing surface Attach a scale type torque wrench to the nut and determine the torque required to turn the nut on the bolt before t...

Page 38: ...fter the final torque has been applied the nut or bolts or screw if no nut is used should be permanently marked red and should not be further tightened or disturbed 2 10 GROUND HANDLING 2 11 INTRODUCTION TO GROUND HANDLING Ground handling covers all essential information governing the handling of the airplane while on the ground This includesjacking weighing leveling mooring parking towing and tax...

Page 39: ...agraph 2 14 2 14 LEVELING All configurations of the airplane are provided with a means for longitudinal and lateral leveling The airplane may be leveled while on jacks during the weighing procedure while the wheels are on scales or while the wheels are on the ground To level the airplane for purposes of weighing or rigging the following procedures may be used a To longitudinally level the airplane...

Page 40: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL I WHEELBASE 10 FT 8 IN NOSEWHEELTRAVEL 20 LEFTAND20 RIGHT Figure 2 8 Tow Turn Limits and Indicator Revised 2 8 82 HANDLINGAND SERVICING 1B16 ...

Page 41: ...is recommended that it be moored per instructions in paragraph 2 15 a To park the airplane head it into the wind if possible b Set the parking brake by applying toe pressure against the top of the rudder pedals and at the same time pull out on the brake handle To release the parking brake apply toe pressure on the pedals and push in on the parking brake handle NOTE Care should be taken when settin...

Page 42: ...O SHOCK STRUT L AND R IS FILTER PRESSURE LINE LEFT 16 FUEL DRAIN LEFT OUTBOARD 17 FILLER INBOARD FUEL CELL LEFT 18 FILLER OUTBOARD FUEL CELL LEFT 19 AIR VALVE RIGHT PROPELLER 20 BATTERY 21 HEATER 22 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY 23 POWER PACK FILL FITTINGS 24 RESERVOIR BRAKE SYSTEM 25 TIRE NOSE 26 FILLER OXYGEN 27 FILLER OLEO SHOCK STRUT NOSE 28 RESERVOIR POWER PACK 29 GAUGE OXYGEN PRESSURE 30 AIR VALVE L...

Page 43: ...to observe e When taxiingon unevenground avoid any holesand ruts f Do not operate the enginesat high RPMwhen running up or taxiingover ground containing loose stones gravelor anyloose materialthat may causedamageto the propeller blades 2 19 EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE 2 20 OPERATION OF EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE The external power receptacleis located on the underside of the nose section belowthe for...

Page 44: ...nough fuel to flow each time to clear the fuel line as well as the fuel filter bowl The same procedure will apply to the cellsof the opposite side b To flush the crossfeedline open the crossfeedvalve and push up on the armsof the drain valve for a few seconds The drain valveis located on the left panel of the filter bowl accessdoor c To flush the fuel cells push up on the arms of each cell drain a...

Page 45: ...requires filling oil Referto paragraph 2 33 For repairsto the gear oleos refer to Section VII of this manual WARNING Do not release air by removing the strut valve core or filler plug Depressthe valve core pin until strut pressurehas diminished NOTE Struts may be servicedand adjusted per placard on strut 2 32 ADDING FLUID TO STRUTS To add fluid to an oleo strut whichis partly full proceedas follow...

Page 46: ... without having any shimmy or flat spots and an inexpensive balancer can be made that will balance almost any tire for light aircraft Refer to Paragraph 2 38 for fabrication instructions Balancethe tire as follows a Mount the tire and tube if one is used on the wheel but do not install the securingbolts Install the wheel bearingsin the wheel then using the 7 bushings 6 spacers and 5 nuts install t...

Page 47: ... If tee extrusion is unavailable heavy angleextrusion couldbe used 3 sidesmust be paralledand vertical b The 4 axlemust slidethrough the 8 pipe The 5 nuts weremade by reamingthe existingthreads in the AN365 624nuts with an R drill then tapping with a 1 8 27pipe tap c The 6 spacersweremade from 1 2 inch aluminumtubing The two lengths of spacersare suitable for balancingmost any aircraft wheel d The...

Page 48: ...cylinderreservoir should be filledto the levelmarked on the dip stick withthe fluidspecifiedin Table II I The reservoir located in the upper nose section above the power pack shown in Figure 2 9 should be checked at every 50 hour inspection and replenished as necessary No adjustment of the brakes is necessary though they should be checked periodically per instructions givenin Section VII The reser...

Page 49: ...power pack reservoir d When fillingis completed be sure to close the suction fill and drain valveby placingthe leverin the down position before disconnectingthe supply line from the servicevalvefitting e Reinstallthe protective cap on the fitting and installthe accesspanel 2 46 PROPELLER 2 47 SERVICINGPROPELLER The blades should be checked periodicallyfor damage Minor nicks in the leading edge of ...

Page 50: ...gradeof oil may be found in Table II IV the lubrication chart or on each engine oil filler access door To servicethe enginewith oil open the quick releaseaccessdoor on top of the cowland remove the oil fillercap NOTE Oil dipsticks are marked for right and left engines Usethe correct sideof stick when checkingoil level TABLEII IV RECOMMENDED LUBRICATINGOILS SINGLE VISCOSITY SAE50 SAE40 SAE30 SAE20 ...

Page 51: ... remove and checkthe oil sectionscreenfor metal particles Clean and reinstall in accordance with paragraph 2 56 Anyone using Spectrometric oil analysisshould read the latest revision of Lycoming s Service Letter No L171 on this subject 2 56 OIL SCREENS SUCTION The oil suction screen is located on the bottom aft end of the engine sump installed horizontally To remove cut the safety wire and remove ...

Page 52: ...y nevermore than enoughto coat the bearingsurfaces b Since the cables are sufficiently coated by the manufacturer additional protection for the prevention of corrosionis unnecessary c Squeeze the magnetocam followerfelts at regularinspectionperiods If oil appears on fingers do not add oil If the felt is dry moisten with light oil CAUTION Be careful not to add too much oil because the excess will b...

Page 53: ... by a number which references the component type of lubrication and frequency of lubrication in hours Specialinstructions are listed at the beginning of the lubrication charts and referencedon the particular chart 2 64 CLEANING 2 65 CLEANINGENGINE COMPARTMENT Before cleaning the engine compartment place a plastic cover or similar material around the pressure pump inlet filter and a strip of tape o...

Page 54: ...ISTON GRADE AS SPECIFIED SAE 50 ABOVE 60 F AIR TEMP SAE 40 30 TO 90F AIR TEMP SAE 30 0 TO 70 F AIR TEMP SAE 20 BELOW 10 F AIR TEMP HYDRAULIC FLUID PETROLEUM BASE GREASE AIRCRAFT AND INSTRUMENT GEAR AND ACTUATOR SCREW GREASE AIRCRAFT HIGH TEMPERATURE ALL PURPOSESLIP SPRAY DUPONT NO 6611 GREASE AIRCRAFT WIDE TEMPERATURE RANGE MOBIL BEARING GREASE MIL G 4343 MIL C 16173D O RING LUBRICATION FUEL SYSTE...

Page 55: ...HETWOGREASEFITTINGSFOREACH BLADE APPLY GREASE THROUGH FITTING UNTIL FRESH GREASE APPEARSAT HOLEOF REMOVED FITTING 6 LUBRICATIONPOINTS WIPE ALL LUBRICATION POINTS CLEAN OF OLD GREASE OIL DIRT ETC BEFORERELUBRICATING 7 LUBRICATING OIL INTERVALS BETWEENOIL CHANGES CAN BE INCREASEDAS MUCH AS 100 ON ENGINES EQUIPPEDWITH FULL FLOW CARTRIDGETYPE OIL FILTERS PROVIDEDTHE ELEMENTIS REPLACEDEACH 50 HOURS OF ...

Page 56: ...VOIR SEE SPECIAL INSTRUCTION4 AND CAUTION 1 10 GEAR UPLOCK ROD ASSEMBLY AND DOWN LOCK ROD ASSEMBLY SEE SPECIAL INSTRUCTION 8 SEENOTES 2 AND 31 11 UPLOCK BUSHING LUBRICANT MIL L7870 MIL H 5606 MIL L 7870 SEE SPECIAL INSTRUCTION3 MIL G 23827 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 MIL H 5606 MIL G 3545 MIL L 7870 FREQUENCY 100 HRS AS REQUIRED 100 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS AS REQUIRED 100 ...

Page 57: ...AM FOLLOWER 12 UPLOCK BUSHING NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL LUBRICANT MIL H 5606 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 MIL G 23827 MOBILGREASE 77 OR MOBILUX EP2 MIL G 23827 MIL L 7870 MIL G 23827 FREQUENCY 11a AS REQUIRED 100 HRS 100 HRS SOHRS 100 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS 50 HRS UPON INSTL 100 HRS MIL G 3545 MIL G 23827 MIL L 7870 I REFER TO FIGURE 7 2 NOTES 1 WIPE EXPOS...

Page 58: ...ND SCREW RIGHT AND LEFT SEE SPECIAL INSTRUCTION 3 9 FLAP TRACK RIGHTAND LEFT 10 FLAP TRACK ROLLERS RIGHTAND LEFT 11 AILERON BELLCRANK CABLE ENDS PIVOT SEARING AND CONTROL ROD ENDS RIGHTAND LEFT 12 TRIM SCREWS LUBRICANT MIL G 23827 MIL L 7870 MIL G 23827 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 ALL PURPOSESLP SPRAY DUPONTNO 6511 MIL L 7870 FREQUENCY 500 HRS 100 HRS 500 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS 100 HR...

Page 59: ...AND PULLEYS 5 ELEVATOR BELLCRANK PIVOTBOLTS AND CABLE ENDS 6 RUDDER HORN CABLE ENDS 7 ELEVATORTRIM SCREW SEE SPECIAL INSTRUCTION 31 8 ELEVATOR TRIM TAB CONTROLROD ENDS 9 ELEVATOR CONTROLROD MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 500 HAS 500 HAS 500 HRS MIL L 7870 100 HRS MIL L 770 100 HRS MIL L 7870 MIL L 787D 100 HRS 100 HRS MIL G 23827 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 500 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS I 261 260D SKETCHA 1015 1016 SK...

Page 60: ...ARINGS RIGHT ANDLEFT 10 COWLFLAPCONTROL RODENDS RIGHTANDLEFT 11 COWLFLAPHINGE 12 FUELFILLER CAPS SEESPECIAL INSTRUCTION 9 13 RUDDER TENSION SPRING SEESPECIAL INSTRUCTION 10 14 RUDDER SLACKCONTROL SPRING SEESPECIAL INSTRUCTION 10 15 RUDDER SLACKTAKE UP SPRING SEESPECIAL INSTRUCTION 10 NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICE MANUAL LUBRICANT MIL G 23827 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 MIL L 6062 MIL L 770 100HRS 100HRS 50 HRS...

Page 61: ... 3 PILOT DOOR LATCH AND HINGES 4 NACELLE LOCKER LATCHAND HINGES 5 SEAT TRACKS ALL SEE NOTE 1 6 CARGO DOOR OPTIONAL LUBRICANT FREQUENCY MIL L 770 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 MIL L 7870 100 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS 100 HRS 260 F Figure 2 17 Lubrication Chart Doors and Seats HANDLINGAND SERVICING Reissued 9 23 80 1C13 ...

Page 62: ...Corporation 150 E 42nd St New York N Y 10017 212 883 4242 Royal Lubricants Co Inc River Road East Hanover N J 07936 201 887 3100 Sinclair Refining Co 600 Fifth Avenue New York N Y 10020 0 Hydraulic Fluid MIL H 5606 QPL 5606 12 Aircraft Hydraulic Oil AA Texaco Inc 2000 Westchester AVe White Plains N Y 10650 914 253 4000 RPM Aviation Oil No 2 Code PED 2585 PED 3337 Aeroshell Fluid 4 Aeroshell Fluid ...

Page 63: ...ell Grease 6 RoYco 11 Shell Oil Co One Shell Plaza Houston TX 77002 713 241 6161 Royal Lubricants Co Inc River Road East Hanover N J 07936 201 887 3100 Texaco Inc 2000 Westchester Ave White Plains N Y 10650 914 253 4000 Lubricating Oil General Purpose Low Temperature MIL L 7870 QPL 7870 9 1692 Low Temp Oil Aviation Instrument Oil Royco 363 Sinclair Aircraft Orbit lub Caltex Low Temp Oil Standard O...

Page 64: ...ancisco CA 94104 415 894 7700 Shell Oil Co One Shell Plaza Houston TX 77002 713 241 6161 Mobil Oil Corporation 150E 42nd St New York N Y 10017 212 883 4242 Royal Lubricants Co Inc River Road East Hanover N J 07936 201 887 3100 Castrol Oils Inc Newark N J Supermil Grease No A72832 BP Aero Grease 31B American Oil Company 239 Wilson Ave Newark N J 07105 201 589 0250 BP Trading Limited Moore Lane Brit...

Page 65: ...rease Aircraft and Instruments High and Low Temperature MIL G 3278 QPL 3278 24 RPM Avn Grease 5 Supermil Grease No 8723 Aeroshell Grease 7A Mobil Grease 22 Royco 78 L 1212 1916 Uni Temp Grease Standard Oil of California 225 Bush St San Francisco CA 94104 415 894 7700 Shell Oil Co One Shell Plaza Houston TX 77002 713 241 6161 Mobil Oil Corporation 150 E 42nd St New York N Y 10017 212 883 4242 Royal...

Page 66: ... 2 Formula TG 10293 Texaco Inc 2000 Westchester Ave White Plains N Y 10650 914 253 4000 Andok B Exxon Company U S A Box 2180 Rm 491 Houston TX 77001 713 656 3636 Code 1 20481 Darina Grease I XSG 6213 Code 71 501 Darina Grease 2 XSG 6152 Code 71 502 Alvania Grease 2 XSG 6151 Code 71 012 Cyprina Grease 3 XSG 6280 Code 71 003 Shell Oil Co One Shell Plaza Houston TX 77002 713 241 6161 Lubricating Grea...

Page 67: ...um MIL T 5544 TT S 1732 TT A 580 DC 4 DC 6 Compound G 624 Y2900 Dow Coming Corp Dept A0021 P O Box 1767 Midland Mich 48640 Mich 800 292 2323 All others 800 248 2345 General Electric Co Silicone Products Div Section TR75 Waterford N Y 12188 518 237 3330 Union Carbide 270 Park Ave New York N Y 10017 212 551 3763 MS 122 607S Waterproof Grease High and Low Temperature Aero Lubriplate Fiske Brothers Re...

Page 68: ...MANUFACTURER Corrosion Retardant Compound MIL C 16173D Piper P N 197508 LPS 3 Holt Lloyd Corp 4647 Hugh Howell Rd Tucker Georgia 330084 404 934 7800 Piper P N 197509 Protecto Flex Chemi Cap Chemical Packaging Corp 1100 N W 70th Street Ft Lauderdale Fla 33309 305 665 9059 Added 5 3 84 HANDLING AND SERVICING 1C20 ...

Page 69: ...water Harsh abrasive or alkaline soaps or detergents used on painted or plasticsurfacescould make scratches or cause corrosion of metal surfaces Cover areas where cleaning solution could cause damage To wash the airplane the followingprocedure may be used a Flush awayloosedirt with water b Apply cleaningsolution with a rag sponge or soft bristle brush c To removestubborn oil and grease use a cloth...

Page 70: ...ufacturer s instructionscarefully Avoidsoaking or harsh rubbing CAUTION Solventcleanersrequire adequate ventilation b Clean sidepanelsand seatswith a stiff bristle brush and vacuum wherenecessary c Leather materialshould be cleanedwith saddlesoap or a mild soap and water 2 70 CLEANINGWOODSURFACES Woodsurfacesmay be cleanedwith any good householdliquid or spray cleanerand polishmanufactured for thi...

Page 71: ...the hydrogen and the tin oxide combine the tin oxide film is reduced to pure tin and when wiped away will leave a permanent dark stain If metal brightners are to be used insure adequate protection for the windshieldby using paper and pasteboard prior to painting 2 74 OXYGEN SYSTEM 2 75 SERVICING OXYGENSYSTEM Theoxygenforthebreathingsystemisfurnished froma stationary cylinderlocated in thesideof th...

Page 72: ...has becomeequal closethe valveof the storage cylinder then go to the storage cylinderwith the next higherpressure and repeat the procedure 3 If after usingthe last storage cylinderthe aircraft s oxygensystemis still not fully charged a full storage cylinder should be put in place of a cylinder with the lowest pressure and used in the same manner 4 A good deal of oxygen will remain in the large cyl...

Page 73: ... VII INDICATED OXYGEN PRESSURES FOR GIVEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURES Temperature F 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 Indicated CylinderPressure psig 1980 1935 1890 1845 1800 1755 1710 1665 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Reissued 9 23 80 HANDLINGANDSERVICING lDl ...

Page 74: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL TABLE II VIII DECIMAL CONVERSION CHART Reissued 9 23 80 HANDLING ANDSERVICING 1D2 ...

Page 75: ...L CHANNEL 2REQ NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 110 ALL WELDED CONSTRUCTION 1 625 X 4 0 X 180 X 30 0 STL CHANNEL 1 REQ Figure 2 18 Fabricated Jack Stand for Piper Jack Part No 18338 00 Reissued 9 23 80 HANDLING ANDSERVICING 1D3 ...

Page 76: ... 375HOLE 75 R TYP 5 00 COWLING CLIP PIPE1 25O D X 57 50 4 REQ WHEELS OPTIONAL 24 00 TYP ALL WELDEDCONSTRUCTION ANGLE 2 00X 2 00X 187X 24 00 4 REQ TYP ANGLE CORNERDETAIL Figure 2 19 Fabricated Tail Stand HANDLINGANDSERVICING Reissued 9 23 80 1D4 ...

Page 77: ...38 63 0 037 23 64 0 3593 T 0358 S 0346 11 32 0 3437 R 0339 9 1262 9 1281 8 7884 8 7300 8 6106 13 64 0 2031 7 0201 8 0199 9 0196 10 01935 5 1594 51054 5 0546 4 9784 49149 35 0110 7 64 01093 36 0 1065 37 0104 38 01015 2 794 2 7781 2 7051 26416 2 5781 64 0 036 65 0 035 66 0033 1 32 00312 67 0032 09144 0 899 0 8382 0 7937 0 8128 Q 0332 21 64 0 3281 P 0323 0 0316 5 16 03125 8 4328 8 3337 8 2042 8 0264 ...

Page 78: ...system 3 Procedure for Converting Inches to Millimeters A Example Convert 1 5 inches to millimeters 1 Read down inches column to 1 inches 2 Read across top inch column to 0 5 3 Read down and across to find millimeters 1 5 inches is 38 10 millimeters 4 Procedure for Converting Fahrenheit F and Celsius C Centigrade Temperature A Read number in middle column if in degrees Celsius C read Fahrenheit eq...

Page 79: ...36 0 17 8 0 32 0 143 33 290 554 0 12 22 10 50 0 148 89 300 572 0 6 67 20 68 0 154 44 310 590 0 1 11 30 86 0 160 00 320 608 0 4 44 40 104 0 165 56 330 626 0 10 00 50 122 0 171 11 340 644 0 15 56 60 140 0 176 67 350 662 0 21 11 70 158 0 182 22 360 680 0 26 67 80 176 0 187 78 370 698 0 32 22 90 194 0 193 33 380 716 0 27 78 100 212 0 198 89 390 734 0 43 33 110 230 0 204 44 400 752 0 38 89 120 248 0 21...

Page 80: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL TABLE II X CONVERSION CHARTS cont INCHES TO MILLIMETER Revised 2 8 82 HANDLING AND SERVICING 1D8 ...

Page 81: ...LS MM YARDS M KG BTU KW HR DRAM CU CM CU IN U S GAL LITERS CU IN CU FT U S GAL LIQ LITERS CU IN CU FT LITERS IMPERIAL GAL FLUID OZ CM FT BTU FT LB KILOGRAMS LITERS METERS METER KILOGRAM OUNCES AVDP OUNCES FLUID LB AVDP 2 205 35 27 1000 1000 61 03 0 03532 0 2642 0 22 1 057 39 37 3 281 1000 7 233 9 807 0 0625 28 35 437 5 29 57 1 805 453 6 7000 16 0 6 4516 0 0703 1 609 0 8684 1 151 9463 1000 0 001 0 ...

Page 82: ...ISTANCEBETWEENSUPPORTSFOR FLUIDTUBING TUBEOD DISTANCE BETWEEN SUPPORTS IN IN 1 8 3 16 1 4 5 l6 3 8 1 2 5 8 3 4 1 ALUMINUMALLOY 9 1 2 12 13 1 2 15 16 1 2 19 STEEL 11 1 2 14 16 18 20 24 26 1 2 25 1 2 27 1 2 30 Revised 2 8 82 HANDLING AND SERVICING lD10 ...

Page 83: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 1 DRIFT PIN SMALL CENTER DRILL 4 3 6 Figure 2 20 Removal of Cherrylock Rivets Reissued 9 23 80 1D11 HANDLING AND SERVICING ...

Page 84: ...ES OF HOSE B NONSELF SEALINGAROMATIC AND HEAT RESISTANT HOSE RED NUMERALSAND LETTERS C FLAME AROMATIC ANDOIL RESISTANT HOSE RED NUMERALS LETTERSAND STRIPE E SELF SEALINGAROMATIC RESISTANTHOSE HOSE IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS BROWN OR NGE ORANGE ORANGE GRAYBUEYELLOW GRAY ELECTRICAL COMPRESSED INSTRUMENT HYDRAULIC DE ICING CONDUIT GAS AIR ORANGE BLUE YELLOW BROWN GRAY PNEUMATIC LUBRICATION AIR FLUID LIN...

Page 85: ...1D13 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 86: ...ion Dukes Inspection of Wing Flap Transmission Calco Inspection of Wing Flap Transmission Actuator Cable 500 Hour Inspection of Wing Flap Transmission Actuator Reduction of Friction in Wing Flap System Wing Flap Motor No Load RPM Check Inspection of Aileron Sprocket and Chain Inspection of Roll Pins on Wieble Powerpaks ID15 ID15 ID15 ID15 ID16 ID16 ID16 ID17 ID1 7 ID17 ID19 ID23 IE2 IE4 IE4 IE5 3 ...

Page 87: ...ours and 1000hours Each inspection or operation is required at each of the inspection intervalsas indicated by a circle 0 and at each required inspection interval thereafter Both the annual and 100 hour inspections are complete inspections of the airplane identical in scope If an item is not entirely accessibleor must be removed refer to the applicablesection of this manual for instructions on how...

Page 88: ... would be required to insure further safe flight b Inspection of airframe or components on a calendar basis This type of inspection could often be accomplished during the nearest scheduled inspection c Specific definitive inspection on engines based strictly upon engine operating time 3 7 PROGRAMMED INSPECTION This programmed inspection was designed to permit better utilization of the aircraft Thi...

Page 89: ...tervals 3 8a INSPECTION OF WING FLAP TRANSMISSION CALCO Refer to Figure 3 1 The flap transmissions are inspected at the first 500 hour inspection cycle of the aircraft and at each 100 hours thereafter This is accomplished without removal of the transmission by the following procedures a Position the flaps in the extended position Down b Remove the access covers on the lower wing surface to gain ac...

Page 90: ...not over 1 16turn from finger tight When installed by this method the dimension between the nut and transmission will be as noted in Step c thus ensuring that the end of shaft housing is firmly seated against transmission Safety nut with 040 wire e If flexible shaft assembly is disconnected from transmission or from flap motor it will be necessary to check the flexible shaft rigging as follows 1 A...

Page 91: ...nsmission at this time f Visually inspect the flexible shaft splined drive coupling and retaining pin for evidence of looseness on the cable swage fitting Refer to Figure 3 2 View A If any looseness is apparent replace the flexible shaft assembly g Inspect the swaged fittings at both ends of the flexible shaft as follows 1 Expose the swaged portion of the inner cable at the motor end by twisting t...

Page 92: ...ERVICE MANUAL C709 MEASURESWAGEDIMENSIONSHERE 247 INCHESMAX INNER CABLE CHECK HEREFORSIGNSOF SPLINEFITTING LOOSENESS WASHER VIEW A FORWARD SEEVIEWA BEAM FLEXIBLE SHAFTTO RIGHT FLAPTRANSMISSION SKETCH 1 Figure 3 2a Wing Flap Actuator Cable 500 Hour Inspection Added 10 15 82 1D20 INSPECTION ...

Page 93: ...7 INCHES MAX 6 27 MM EIGHTFLAT CABLE 235 INCHES MAX 5 97 MM SIX FLAT CABLE Wing Sta 8750 SEEVIEW B NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL C708 VIEW B SKETCH2 LEFT WING SHOWN RIGHTWINGOPPOSITE Figure 3 2a Wing Flap Actuator Cable 500 Hour Inspection cont Added 10 15 82 1D21 INSPECTION 1D21 ...

Page 94: ...RED INTHEADAPTER HOUSING MOUNTING NUTS VIEW C IF DISTANCEBETWEEN REFERENCE MARK AND POINTEREXCEEDS 5 32 OF AN INCH 4MM REPLACE FLEXIBLESHAFT ASSEMBLY NOTE USE CAUTION NOT TO DAMAGE MOTOR SHAFT FIGURE5 SKETCH 3 Figure 3 2a Wing Flap Actuator Cable 500 Hour Inspection cont Added 10 15 82 1D22 INSPECTION ...

Page 95: ...827 grease n Check flap rigging and adjustments as described in Section V Surface Control o Reinstall floorboards and access panels 3 10 REDUCTION OF FRICTION IN WING FLAP SYSTEM Dukes System Only Refer to Figure 3 3 To insure proper flap system operation and reduce friction on the flap motor the following inspection and repairs are only required should operational problems exist in the flap syste...

Page 96: ...w end horn assembly with finger pressure only Refer to Figure 3 3 m Install the transmission bolt washer and nut only finger tight and install cotter pin n If not previously accomplished at the regular 100 hour inspection the flap transmission should be checked in accordance with Paragraph 3 8 o Ascertain that the flap transmission cables are installed properly Refer to Paragraph 3 9 p Inspect the...

Page 97: ... washers should face the rollers NOTE FLAP TRAVEL STOPS AREON CENTER TRACK ONLY ON AIRCRAFTMODELS VIEW A A WITH S N 31 5001 TO 31 7852171 Thesemounting holes may be slotted 125 on either sideof center Bolt shouldfit with finger pressure only Figure 3 3 Friction Reduction in Wing Flap System INSPECTION Revised 10 5 83 lEl ...

Page 98: ... of an inch of the painted rotating spline shaft and observe the RPM reading on the meter RPM in excess of 11 000 will indicate a demagnetized motor which should be replaced e In the event that the above meter cannot be obtained another method can be used to make the check This would require the removal of the motor from the aircraft and using a hand held tachometer and 24 volt D C power source Re...

Page 99: ...AD 2 SHIM 032 3 SHIM 012 4 AILERON CONTROL CHAIN AND SPROCKET 5 CHAIN TO COPILOT CONTROL WHEEL REF 6 SPROCKET HOUSING 7 PILOT CONTROL WHEEL TUBE 7 Add new 012 shim asreq to attain proper vertical alignment of sprocket and aileron control chain Figure3 5 Inspection of AileronSprocketandChain INSPECTION Reissued 9 23 80 1E3 ...

Page 100: ...is detected it could be due to lack of lubrication on the chain if so clean and lubricate bent teeth on the sprocket if so sprocket must bereplaced or sprocket control chain misalignmentthat must be corrected as follows 1 Inspect at outboard end of sprocket housing to determine if the 032 shim is installed between the offset in the housing and the bulkhead Install shim if it is not present Thisshi...

Page 101: ...headof the mainsparandtheaccesspanelbetweenthe fuselageandtheundersideof the wing b Removeconsolecover c Visuallycheckcontrolcable wires at swivelfittingsfor indicationsof binding kinks or bends havesomeonein cockpitoperatefuelcontrolswhilemechanicinspectswiresat swivelfittings d Replacecable s exhibitinganyof the aboveconditions e Check adjustments of selectorvalveandcrossfeedvalvesperSectionIX f...

Page 102: ...a month 10 Checkconditionof propellerdeicersystem RefertosectionXIV 11 If installed inspectconditionof synchronizeror synchrophaser 12 Removepropellers removesludgefrompropellerandcrankshaft SeeNote 45 13 Overhaulpropeller SeeNote8 Inspectiontime hrs L R 50100500 B ENGINE GROUP WARNING Ground magneto primary circuit before working on engine NOTE Read notes5 6 and 7 prior to completingthisinspectio...

Page 103: ...inch 22 Inspectmagnetosfor oil leakageandpressuretest Referto latestrevisionof TextronLycomingServiceLetterNo 1308 23 Inspectbreakerfeltsfor properlubrication 24 Inspectdistributorblocksfor cracks burnedareasor corrosion andheightof contactsprings SeeNote13 25 Check magnetostoenginetiming 20 degreesBTC 26 InspectD3200pressurized blue magnetogears Referto latestrevisionof TextronLycomingServiceBull...

Page 104: ...nof alternatorandstarter 52 Inspectconditionof flexiblepneumaticlines replaceas necessary SeeNote 18 53 Lubricateall controls DonotlubricateTeflonlinersof controlcables 54 Inspectsecurityof airconditioning compressormounting 55 Checkairconditioningcompressorfor leaks SeeNote19 56 Inspectcompressordrivebeltconditionandtension RefertoSectionXIV 57 Inspectcompressorclutchsecurityandwiring SeeNote20 5...

Page 105: ...ditionofcontrolwheels column pulleys andcable SeeNote26 11 InspectaileronsprocketandchainperSectionIII 12 Checkoperationof landing navigation cabinandinstrumentlights 13 Inspectcondition securityandoperationof instruments linesandattachments 14 Inspectgyro operatedinstrumentsandelectricturnandbank Overhaulor replaceas required 15 Inspectpitot tube s lines andstaticventsforcondition securityandstop...

Page 106: ...ngandoperation 10 Inspect bulkheads and stringers for damage Refer to latest revision of Piper ServiceBulletinNo 636 11 Inspectantennamountsandelectricwiringfor damagedinsulationandsecurity 12 Checkhydraulicpowerpackfluidlevel Fill asrequired 13 Inspecthydraulicpowerpackandlinesfordamageandleaks 14 Inspectattachmentpin in hydraulicpowerpack Referto latestrevisionof Piper ServiceBulletinNo 488 andt...

Page 107: ...on SeeNote30 39 Inspectconditionof pneumaticdeicers if installed 40 Inspectsecurityof Autopilotservobridlecableclamps SeeNote26 41 Inspectemergencylocatortransmitterbatteryfor replacementdate or time Refer to ServiceManual SectionXIIandlatestrevisionof PiperServiceLetterNo 820 42 Inspect emergency locator transmitter to ensure contact separator is properly installed Refertolatestrevisionof PiperSe...

Page 108: ...onandknotsof nylonsupportcords 23 Inspect security of bafflesand free operationof flapper valvein each main fuel cell 24 Inspectconditionof fuelcellmaterial SeeNotes33 and34 25 Checkthat fuelcells aremarkedfor capacityandminimumoctanerating 26 Inspectfuelcellvents SeeNote35 27 Inspectpneumaticand flexiblelines andcomponentsfor conditionand operation SeeNote 30 28 Replacepneumaticinletfilter 29 Rep...

Page 109: ...VII 17 Inspectdownlockfor operationandadjustment 18 Inspecttorquelinkboltsandbushings Replaceasrequired 19 Inspect dragandsidebraceassembly andlinkbolts Replace asrequired SeeNote39 20 Inspect securityof gear doors and attachments Referto latestrevisionof Piper ServiceBulletin682 21 Inspectwarninghornandlightfor operation 22 Retract gear check operation 23 Retractgear inspectdoorsforclearanceandop...

Page 110: ...tsideairtemperaturegaugeforproperreading 7 Check allcircuitbreakers 8 Check flightcontrolsfor freedomof movement propertravelandproperresponse o 9 Checkcowlflapoperationandindication 10 Checkwingflapoperationandindication 11 Checkheateroperation 12 Checkair conditioneroperat ion 13 Checkpropellerdeiceroperation 14 Engine RunUp a Propellerandmixturelevers full forward b Throttle 1500RPM c Propeller...

Page 111: ... examination of the airplane and overhaul or replacement of some major components Inspectionsmustbeaccomplishedby personsauthorizedby theFAA 3 PiperServicebulletinsare of specialimportanceandPiperconsiderscompliancemandatory 4 Piper servicelettersare productimprovementsandservicehints pertainingto servicingthe airplaneand shouldbegivencarefulattention 5 Inspectionsgivenfor power plant arebased on ...

Page 112: ...e performanceandoperation If it can be proventhat leakageexceedsthese conditions thecylindershouldbereplaced 13 Referto VSP69 14 Replace or overhaul as required or at engine overhaul Refer to latestrevision of LycomingService LetterL201forengineT B O 15 Forreplacement or inspectionof gearsinD 3200seriespressurized blue magnetos referto latestrevision of LycomingServiceBulletin459 16 Replaceflexibl...

Page 113: ...Bulletin629 39 lnitial inspectionrequiredafterfirst 1 000hourstime in service repetitiveinspectionrequiredeach 100 hourstime in service Inspectionalsorequiredwhenever landinggearis operatedat speedsabovemaximum landinggearoperatingspeed VLO Referto PiperServiceBulletinNo 845 40 Replacelandinggearselectorcableat4 000 hourstime in service or 10years whichevercomesfirst 41 Referto flightmanualsupplem...

Page 114: ...4 4 18 Removal of Aileron Trim Tab IE24 4 19 Installation of Aileron Trim Tab IE24 4 20 Flap E24 4 21 Removal of Flap E24 4 22 Installation of Flap E24 4 23 Wing IE24 4 24 Removal of Wing IE24 4 25 Installation of Wing 1 4 26 Empennage Group IF8 4 27 Elevator F8 4 28 Removal of Elevator IF8 4 29 Installation of Elevator FI12 4 30 Elevator Trim Tab F 12 4 31 Removal of Elevator Trim Tab F12 4 32 In...

Page 115: ... 1F23 4 61b Removal of Pilot Door Storm Window 1F23 4 61c Installation of Pilot Door Storm Window 1F23 4 61d Replacement of Pilot Door Storm Window Seal 1F23 4 62 Cabin Entrance Door IF23 4 63 Removal of Cabin Entrance Door Upper IF23 4 64 Installation of Cabin Entrance Door Upper 1 4 65 Removal of Cabin Entrance Door Lower 1F23 4 66 Installation of Cabin Entrance Door Lower IGI 4 67 Adjustment of...

Page 116: ...alancing Procedure 1G14 4 98 Structural Repairs 1G22 4 99 Fiberglass Repairs G22 4 100 Fiberglass Touch up and Surface Repairs G22 4 101 Fiberglass Fracture and Patch Repairs G24 4 102 Thermoplastic Repairs H 1 4 103 Safety Walk Repair H9 4 104 Surfaces Preparation H9 4 105 Product Listing for Liquid Safety Walk Compond H9 4 106 Application of Liquid Safety Walk Compound H9 4 107 Surface Preparati...

Page 117: ...l metal full cantileversemi monocoquetype construction with a removable fiberglass tip Installed in each wing ahead of the main spar are two bladder type fuel cells The main landing gear is enclosed in wheel wells built into the lower surface of each wing and is enclosed by doors when retracted Attached to each wingis the power plant aileronand flap The right aileronincorporates a trim tab which i...

Page 118: ...GATIONLIGHT 4 9 REMOVALOF WINGNAVIGATIONLIGHT a To remove bulb remove the screwssecuringthe clearwindow b Removescrewssecuringthe lensretainer c Removelensand bulb NOTE To remove the complete lamp assembly the wing tip must be removed 4 10 INSTALLATIONOF WINGNAVIGATIONLIGHT a Install bulb lensgasket and secureretainer b Put light windowin position and secure 4 11 LANDINGLIGHT 4 12 REMOVALOF LANDIN...

Page 119: ...gitudinally and secure with clamps The light beam angle may be adjusted by the adjustment screwsat the sidesof the bracket and tilting as desired 4 14 AILERON 4 15 REMOVALOF AILERON Refer to Figure4 2 a Removethe wingtip in accordance with paragraph4 5 b Remove the wingtip aft attachment rib c Disconnectthe aileroncontrol rod d At the rightaileron disconnectthe trim tab control rod e Removethe hin...

Page 120: ... the flap in position and install the lower roller assemblieson the flap brackets and torque bolts b Install the upper roller assembliesand torque bolts c Connect the control tube d If the left flap wasremoved connect the position senderrod e Check flap for proper operation Riggingand adjustment procedure may be found in Section V 4 23 WING 4 24 REMOVALOF WING Refer to Figure4 5 a Close the fuel v...

Page 121: ...CK ONLY ON AIR CRAFT MODELS WITH SN 31 5001 TO 31 7852171 SEE NOTE 16 BUSHING 414134 BUSHHING 41413 4 REQ OUTBD ONLY 12 REQ BUSHING 141137 4 REQ CTR ONLY SECTIONAA BUSHING 414134 WASHER 3S1220434511 4 REQ INBD ONLY 16 REQ OMIT ON CTR TRACK ASSY I SKETCH A SEE NOTE Figure4 2 Aileronand Flap Installation Revised 3 5 84 STRUCTURES 1F1 ...

Page 122: ...H C TORQUE BOLTTO38 INCHPOUNDS THISINCLUDES 18 INCHPOUNDS AVERAGE FRICTION DRAGTORQUE BOLTAN3 6A BUSHING 41413 51 WASHER81342 9 BOLT AN3 7A 2 REQ BOLTAN4 15 WASHERNA960 4161 NUT AN 310 4 COTTER PINMS24665 134 2 REQ SKETCH E SKETCHD BOLTAN4 14A WASHER AN960 416L NUT MS20365 428C REFER TOSKETCH B SKETCH C FOR NOTEONALLOWABLE CLEARANCE SKETCH F SKETCH G Figure 4 2 Aileron and Flap Installation cont R...

Page 123: ...y control cables at the turnbuckles located at stations 76 and 86 50 between the left forward side trim panel and control pedestal Draw the cables back through the spar Removethe elevator cableguardpin at station 110 to allowthe cableends to pass through 2 Removethe left aileron cableguard pin at station 164 3 The balance cable to the left wing may be disconnected at the aileron bellcrank drawn th...

Page 124: ...e aileron trim cable at the side fuselageand within the wing to prevent the trim drum from unwrapping Disconnect the trim cable turnbuckles at wing station 90 and draw the cables inboard through the wing Remove cable guard at butt end of wing and tape cables out of the way at the fuselage 5 Disconnect the hydraulic lines which are routed through the spar at stations 90 and 137 and slide the lines ...

Page 125: ...1137 1024 NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 1025 BOLT AN4 16A WASHER AN960 416 NUT MS20365428C 2 REQ BOLT AN34A NUT MS20365 1032C 12 REQ Figure4 5 WingInstallation STRUCTURES Revised 10 5 83 1F5 ...

Page 126: ...1 REQ R BOLTAN5 12A OR ANS 13A WASHERAN960 516 BOLT AN 12A WASHER AN960 516 NUT MS20365 524C 1 REQ L 1 REQ R BOLTAN5 26A BUSHING41413 36 NUTMS20365 524C 1 REQ L 1 REQ R SKETCHD SKETCHE Figure 4 5 Wing Installation cont Revised 10 5 83 1F6 STRUCTURES ...

Page 127: ...nd wingbutt so as to funnel the wingbetween the upper and lowerfairings and butt the spar ends Maximumdistanceof 1 32 of an inch is permissiblebetween spar caps e Install the bolt that attaches the rear spar and fuselagefittings f Install the bolt that attaches the front spar and fuselagefittings g Install and bolt the fore and aft verticalspar splicechannels h Install and bolt the upper and lower...

Page 128: ...able tension Refer to Riggingand Adjustment of Aileron Elevatorand Rudder Section V and safety turnbuckles t Install engine Refer to Installation of Engine Section VIII u Check hydraulic fluid level Refer to Section II or VI and with the airplane setting on jacks operate the gear through several retraction and extension cycles to ascertain that there are no hydraulic fluid leaks v Check brake flui...

Page 129: ... WASHER AN960 416 2 REQ UNDER NUT AN3104 COTTER PIN MS24665 132 BOLT AN3 5A NUT WASHER AN960 10L 4 REQ BOLT AN174 22A WASHER AN960 416 2 REQ NUT MS20365 428C 4 REQ 2REGQ SKETCHB 125 SKETCHC SKETCHA Figure4 6 EmpennageInstallation Revised 2 8 82 STRUCTURES 1F9 ...

Page 130: ... REQ SKETCHE 133 134 BOLT AN3 10 NUT AN310 3 COTTER PIN MS24665 132 BUSHING 41413 511 BOLT AN3 6A WASHER 81342 9 TORQUETO 38 IN LBS INCLUDES 18 IN LBS AVERAGEFRICTION DRAG TORQUE SKETCH F BOLT AN3 5A WASHER AN960 10 WASHER AN960 10L REQ SKETCHG 262 136 SKETCHH Figure 4 6 Empennage Installation cont Reissued 9 23 80 STRUCTURES 1F10 ...

Page 131: ... WASHER AN960 416 2 REQ NUT AN3104 COTTER PIN MS24665 134 2 REQ SCREW NAS221 11 WASHER AN960 10L UNDER NUT MS20365 1032C NUT 2 REQ SKETC BOLT ANS 7A WASHER AN960 516 NUT MS20365 524C 6 REQ BOLT AN24 19 NUT AN320 4 COTTER PIN MS24665 132 SAFETY WIRE BOLT AN4 6A WASHER AN960 416 NUT MS20365 428C 4 REQ SKETCHM THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFTBLANK Figure 4 6 Empennage Installation cont STRUCTURES Revise...

Page 132: ...geunder the horizontal stabilizersand the panel located on top of the fuselageaft of the vertical fin c Removethe accesspanel to the aft inside section of the fuselage d To remove the right stabilizer locate the elevator trim cableturnbuckles in the aft section of the fuselage mark the ends of one turnbuckle to facilitate reinstallation and block the cables at one of the fuselagebulkheads and in t...

Page 133: ...ion V for the riggingand adjustment of elevator and elevatortrim controls n Install all accessplates and panels 4 36 RUDDER 4 37 REMOVALOF RUDDER Refer to Figure4 6 a Relieve cable tension from the control system by removing the floor panel to the left of the control pedestal and loosenone of the rudder cable turnbuckles b Removethe accesspanel located on top of the fuselage aft of the verticalfin...

Page 134: ...ilizer and fuselageskin is 187 of an inch Trim to obtain this gap b Ascertain that the sealerextrusion is attached to the lowersideof the vertical stabilizer c Install the rear spar mounting bolts and nuts temporarily d Install the front spar mounting bolts washer and nuts Tighten but do not torque at this time e Check to determine if a gap exists between the web area of the rear spar and aft bulk...

Page 135: ...ding around the inside of the windshield g Torque the retainer screwsaround the outside of the windshieldand center trim strip h Apply PRC 383 or PR 1425along the bottom edge of windshield before installation of collar i Install collar molding and tighten until washers begin to compress snug against strip i After installation of collar apply masking tape around the windshield and along the edge of...

Page 136: ...PR1425 PRESSTITE SEALER TAPE 163 PRESSTITE TAPE 163 SECTION C C SECTION D D 140A R T V SIUCONE SEALER UNDER SCREW HEADS PRC 383 PRESSTITE ORPR1425 TAPE 163 SEALER SECTION E E 140B PRC 383 OR PR1425 SEALER WINDSHIELD COLLAR PRC 383 PRESSTITE OR PR1425 TAPE 163 SEALER SECTIONF F NOTE APPLY R T V SILICONE SEALER UNDER HEADS OF SCREWSAROUND WINDSHIELD OUTERPERIMETER Figure4 7 WindshieldInstallation St...

Page 137: ...ICE MANUAL 1032 NOTE DO NOT ALLOW VINYLTAPE TO CON TACT ACRYLICWINDSHIELD I TERMINAL I 145 SEMKIT SEALER PR 1221 OR PR1425 VINYL SPONGE TAPE SECTION A A SECTON B 146 VINYL SPONGE TAPE SECTION C Figure 4 8 indshield Installation Heated Figure 4 8 Windshield Installation Heated Revised 10 5 83 STRUCTURES 1F17 ...

Page 138: ...side edge and the channel Do not build up the sealer above the inside contour of the collar molding thus causing a poor fit of molding against the windshield i Install the collar molding around the bottom of the windshield and tighten the retainer screws until washers begin to compress snug against strip j Apply SEMKIT SEALER PR 1221 B2or PR 1425to any areas around windshield that may allow water ...

Page 139: ...SION ADJUSTMENT NUT 15 POUNDS 5 LOCK WIRE 6 ADJUSTMENT SLEEVE 7 CONVERTER 8 MOTOR 9 MOTOR SHAFT 10 NIPPLE 11 COUPLING 12 CONVERTERSHAFT 13 BRACKET 14 BRACKET 149 4 NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICEMANUAL Figure 4 9 Windshield Wiper Reissued 9 23 80 STRUCTURES 1F19 ...

Page 140: ...the airplane The timing can be accomplishedas follows 1 Rotate the drive shaft 12 in the converter 7 until the end of travel corresponding to the park position is obtained at the serrated convertershaft 2 Temporarily connect the electricalconnector to the wipermotor 8 and operate the motor ending with the switch in the PARK position Disconnect the electrical connector b Assemblethe wipermotor and ...

Page 141: ...not locate the arm in the desiredposition d Install the bolt through the wiper arm into the converter shaft Tighten and safety with MS20995 C41lockwire 5 4 56 WIPER BLADE AND ARM ADJUSTMENT Refer to Figure 4 9 a Adjust the wiper blade height on the windshieldby unlocking the blade height adjustment cam 2 b Adjust the blade height on the windshieldso the bottom of the blade clearsthe windshieldcoll...

Page 142: ...ack VinylPlastic tape betweeninside windowand retainer strip f Install inner windowand bolt inner retainer moldingin position g Apply Sil GlydeLubricant between edge of windowmoldingand extrusion h Install trim moldingaround insideof window 4 60 EMERGENCY EXITWINDOW Removaland installationof the emergencyexit windowglassisthe same as that given for sidewindows paragraphs 4 58 and 4 59 4 61 EMERGEN...

Page 143: ...ch Grip Industrial Adhesive EC 4475 3M 911 109 to outboard surface of the lip on the storm window and to the inboard surface of the seal Allow the surfaces to dry 15 30seconds and then assemble them 4 62 CABINENTRANCEDOOR 4 63 REMOVALOF CABINENTRANCEDOOR UPPER a Remove the upper door support assembly from door b Disconnect electrical wire if installed at the top of door frame being careful not to ...

Page 144: ...ATCHMECHANISM 13 LATCHSPRING 14 PIN 15 ACTUATOR SPRING 16 ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY 17 SPRING 18 ADJUSTING SCREW CABINENTRANCE 19 HOOK DOORINSTALLATION 20 ROLLPIN 21 SHIM WASHERS 22 BOLTS 25 23 HANDLE INNER 24 DOORSNUBBER 25 LOWER DOOR 26 UPPER DOOR SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 27 1033 DOORLATCHASSEMBLY Figure 4 12 Cabin Entrance Door Installation Revised 10 15 82 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 1F24 STRUCTURES ...

Page 145: ... four bolts washers and locknuts holding the latch mechanismsin place two on each side h The outer handle 9 can be removedby disconnectingthe spring 15 between both halvesof the actuator assembly 16 and removing the cotter pin and pin 14 The handle and half of the actuator can now be removed and further disassembledby removingtwo screws shimwashersand plate from actuator Note the amount andthickne...

Page 146: ... looking between the door and frame Ascertain that there is at least 1 16 clearance between the shoulder on the latch pawl and the latch plate and that the pawl is completely engaged to the top of the latch plate notch The latch plate clearancecan be changed by changing the number of washers between the latch plate and the door frame The pawlengagementcan be adjusted by loosening the latch plate s...

Page 147: ...ing between the link and tube assembly Also remo ve two other springs located on either side of the tube assembly to the baggage door assembly 3 Remove the roll pin located between the tube assembly and door handle Also remove the spring link at this time 4 Remove six machine screws three on each end holding the arm assemblies to the door assembly and remove the tube with both arm assemblies from ...

Page 148: ...d to hold the arm assembliesto the door 3 Withall holesin both projection and the springlink aligned insert the roll pin 4 Connect the three springsat this time One between the spring link and the tube and two between the tube assemblyand the door assembly 5 Adjustment should be made at this time beforereplacingcover Referto paragraph 4 78 Use the six machine screwsto secure the cover on the door ...

Page 149: ...EMANUAL 1034 1 NACELLE LOCKER 2 CATCH ASSEMBLY 3 BUCKLE ASSEMBLY 4 BAGGAGE STRAP 5 DOOR SUPPORT 6 LOCKER DOOR 7 DOOR LATCH 8 LOCK ASSEMBLY 8 7 6 Figure 4 13 NacelleWing Locker Latch Assembly Reissued 9 23 80 STRUCTURES 1G5 ...

Page 150: ...he clevisat end of the rod assembly 8 is 13 88 inches Securelytighten the locknuts to maintain thisdimension b Position the door latch 4 in its recess in the door frame and secure with bolt bushing and washer c Insert the latch pins on rod assembly 8 and link 5 through their respectiveguidesin the side andbottom door frame d Place the free end of the rod assembly over the end of the handle Placeth...

Page 151: ...ABIN DOOR LATCH PLATE 4 CARGO DOOR LATCH 54 LINK 6 LATCH PIN GUIDE 7 LATCH PIN 8 ROD ASSEMBLY 9 SPACER 0 122 3 AS REQ TO INSURE PROPER LATCHING 10 SPRING RETAINER PLATE 11 SPRING Figure 4 14 Cargo Door Latch Assembly STRUCTURES Revised 10 5 83 1G7 ...

Page 152: ... of clear plastic tubing 1 8 in OD 5in long covered witha film of seal glyde or Dow Corning lubricant f Insert tube approximately 3 in into the sealing bead of the striker prior to the sealing operation g Remove all sharp edges from striker joints h Fill in all irregular surfaces contacting the door seal with sealant i Check to see that the latch plate on aft side of door frame extends only to cen...

Page 153: ... OF PILOT DOOR Refer to Figure 4 15 a Remove trim panel from pilot s door to gain access to the latching mechanism Open the door and engage the support assembly b The outside door handle must be parallel with the airplane axis when the handle is in the fully bolted position The following steps will accomplish this I Disconnect the rod end 6 connected to the latch 7 2 Loosen the locknut on the latc...

Page 154: ...th inertia mechanismend up and pry off plasticcap overmechanism and set reel aside h Install nut in plasticcap so that stud in cap is flushwith nut surface thenreposition cap overreelend and orientate properly snap in place Extend harness a few times to make sure action is correct 4 91 CONTROLSURFACEBALANCING The movable control surfaceshavebeen statically balanced at the time of installation at t...

Page 155: ... END 5 STOP ASSY 6 LATCH ROD END 7 LATCH 8 THEFT LOCK 9 MAIN LATCH 10 TO OUTSIDE HANDLE 11 MAIN LATCH ROD 12 BELLCRANK ASSY 13 INNER HANDLE ROD END 14 INNER HANDLE 15 OUTSIDE SKIN 16 CABLE FROM SKETCH A 17 CABLE FROM SKETCH B 18 BOTTOM LATCH 19 CLEVIS ROD END 20 HINGE PIN 21 BUSHING 22 SPRING 1036 Figure 4 15 Pilot s Door Latch Assembly Reissued 9 23 80 STRUCTURES 1G11 ...

Page 156: ...the basic master test weightinstalled g Trim Weight Small weight or weightsadded to the surface balance weight to bring the surface within tolerances Sometimesrequired depending on variationsin surfaceconstruction 4 94 AILERON BALANCING PROCEDURE Refer to Figure 4 16 PPS 50022 1 a Remove the aileron from the airplane Refer to Paragraphs 4 16 4 91 and 4 92 b Placethe aileronon abalancingjigas illus...

Page 157: ...ved to produce a balanced condition with the master test weight in place Remove trim weights part number 43332 first if installed then remove material from the main balance weight Remove material or trim weights evenly from both sides g If the elevator is trailing edge heavy with just the specified master test weight installed then it must be determined that elevator does not exceed the maximum st...

Page 158: ...weightuntil the rudder balances If the number of 0 1 pound test weights added does not exceed the maximum allowable per Table IV I the rudder is within the static limits h If the number of 0 1 pound test weights added to the master test weight to balance the rudder exceeds the maximum allowable per Table IV I the rudder balance exceeds the static limits and trim weights must be added to the rudder...

Page 159: ...MASTER TEST WEIGHT ARM B MASTER TEST WEIGHT ARM A I Figure 4 16 Aileron Balancing C610 157 ELEVATOR BALANCE JIG KNIFE EDGES AT CENTER AND TWO OUTBOARD HINGE LOCATIONS MASTER TEST WEIGHT ATTACHMENT POINTON ELEVATORRIB TOOL HOLE 0 I 04 OZ MASTER TEST WEIGHT SEETABLE IV I SEE TABLE IV I Figure 4 17 Elevator Balancing Revised 2 8 82 1G15 STRUCTURES ...

Page 160: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 161 TRAILING EDGE INBOARDEDGE LEFTELEVATOR AN3 38BOLT FULLY INSERTED SPRING SCALE A Figure 4 18 Friction Measurement Reissued 9 23 80 STRUCTURES 1G16 ...

Page 161: ...or Nut 11 Surface Allowable Balance 5 2 1 60 7 95 7 95 7 95 Weights plus Trim BalanceLimits 0 0 90 0 44 0 44 0 44 0 Inch Pounds 3 10 5 5 5 Trailing Edge Heavy NOTES 1 On Aircraft with Serial Numbers 7405250to 7405257inclusive aileron balance weight P N 53107 02and 03are used alongwithtrim weightP N 53107 02 witha maximumof four trim weights per surface equally distributed on either side of the mai...

Page 162: ...1G18 INTENTIONALLYLEFT BLANK ...

Page 163: ...IN SERVICE MANUAL 264 TAPETRIMTAB LEVEL MASTER TESTWEIGHT ATTACHMENT POINTON RUDDER TIPSUPPORT TOOLHOLE LEVEL RUDDER BALANCE JIG MASTER TESTWEIGHT ARM SEE TABLEIV I Figure 4 19 Rudder Balancing 265 BALANCEWEIGHT P N 43332 REFER TO TABLE IV 1 Revised 2 8 82 STRUCTURES 1G19 ...

Page 164: ...ANUAL MATERIAL THICKNESS NOTE LEFT WING SHOWN RIGHT OPPOSITE AND NOTED MATERIAL OUTLINED IN DOTS USED ON RIGHT WING ONLY HEAT TREAT TO 2024 T4 AFTER FORMING Figure 4 21 Skin Thickness and Material Reissued 9 23 80 STRUCTURES 1G20 ...

Page 165: ...A B Figure4 21 Skin Thicknessand Material cont NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICEMANUAL 1141 STRUCTURES 1G21 ...

Page 166: ... follow resin and catalyst mixing instructions furnishedwith repair kit 4 100 FIBERGLASS TOUCH UP AND SURFACE REPAIRS a Remove wax oil and dirt from around the damagedarea with acetone Methylethylketone or equivalentand remove paint to gel coat b The damaged area may be scrapedwith a fine blade knife or a power drill with a burr attachment to roughen the bottom and sides of the damaged area Feathe...

Page 167: ...TAINSERVICEMANUAL 165 17318 ACCESSHOLE COVER PLATE 20372 ACCESSHOLE REINFORCEMENT PLATE 12 REQ 17317 ACCESSHOLE HOLE IN BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT WING SKIN PLATE DIAMETER 4 Figure 4 22 Typical AccessPlates and Panels Reissued 9 23 80 STRUCTURES 1G23 ...

Page 168: ... an area two incheslargerthan the hole g Mix a small amount of resin and catalyst enough to be used for one step at a time accordingto kit instructions h Thoroughly wet mat and cloth with catalyzed resin Daub resin on mat first and then on cloth Mat should be applied against structures surface with cloth on top Both pieces may be wet out on cellophane and applied as a sandwich Enough fiberglassclo...

Page 169: ...ray a coat of catalyzed resin to seal patch Sand patch finish by priming again sandingand applying color coat NOTE Brush and hands may be cleaned in solvents such as acetone or methylethylketone If solvents are not available a strong solution of detergent and water may be used 4 102 THERMOPLASTIC REPAIRS Thefollowingprocedurewillassistin making fieldrepairs to items made of thermoplastic which are...

Page 170: ...n N J 07036 ObtainFromLocalSuppliers Solvents MethylethylKetone MethyleneChloride Acetone Epoxy Patching Compound Hot MeltAdhesives PolyamidsandHotMelt Gun Solarite 400 StickForm 1 2in dia 3 in long SolarCompoundsCorp Linden N J 07036 SearsRoebuck Co or Most HardwareStores Hot AirGun Temp Range300 to 400 F LocalSuppliers a SurfacePreparation 1 Surfacedirt and paint if appliedmust be removed fromth...

Page 171: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 871 Hot Air Gun Figure 4 23 Surface Scratches Abrasions or Ground in Dirt 871 Figure 4 24 Deep Scratches Shallow Nicks and Small Holes Reissued 9 23 80 STRUCTURE 1H3 ...

Page 172: ...870 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 825 Figure 4 25 Mixing of Epoxy Patching Compound Figure 4 26 Welding Repair Method Reissued 9 23 80 STRUCTURE 1H4 ...

Page 173: ...akea satisfactory cement by dissolving thermoplastic material of the sametype being repaired in solvent until the desired paste like consistency is achieved 2 Thismixture is then appliedto the damaged area Upon solvent evaporation the harddurable solids remaining can easily be shaped to the desired contour by filing or sanding 3 Solvent adhesives are not recommended for highly stressed areas or th...

Page 174: ...by cutting out the damaged area and replacing it with a piece of similar material 3 When cutting away the damaged area under cut the perimeter and maintain a smooth edge The patch and or plug should also have a smooth edge to insure a good fit 4 Coat the patch with solvent adhesive and firmly attach it over the damaged area 5 Let the patch dry for approximately one hour before any additional work ...

Page 175: ... 31 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL PATCHING 828 Figure 4 28 Various Repairs Reissued 9 23 80 STRUCTURE 1H7 ...

Page 176: ... 27 829 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL STRESS LINES Figure 4 29 Repair of Stress Lines 832 PROFILE VIEW INDICATING DAMAGED AREA Figure 4 30 Repair of Impacted Damage Reissued 9 23 80 STRUCTURE 1H8 ...

Page 177: ...hinner No 207 b Safety Walk Material Walkway Compound and Matting Nonslip included in Piper Part No 179872 4 106 APPLICATION OF LIQUID SAFETY WALK COMPOUND Liquid safety walk compound shall be applied in an area free of moisture for a period of 24 hours minimum after application Do not apply when surface to be coated is below 50 F Apply liquid safety walk compound as follows a Mix and thin the liq...

Page 178: ...oisture remainson surface Do not apply when surfacetemperatureis below 50 F Apply pressuresensitivesafety walk as follows a Peelback the full width of the protectiveliner approximately 2 inchesfrom the leadingedgeof the safety walk b Apply the safety walk to the wing area begin at the leading edge insure proper alignment and position from wing lap c Removethe remaining protective liner as the safe...

Page 179: ... this step the boot will be right side in f After proper alignment has been made squeeze out wetting solution starting at the top center and working out and down Care should be taken to avoid blisters under the boot g If after application of the boot there appears to be blisters beneath the surface piercing them with an ordinary safety pin will relieve the entrapped air or wetting solution so that...

Page 180: ...PARATION AND INSTALLATION OF RADOME EROSION SHIELD a All paint must be removed by using appropriate paint remover or by sanding Epoxy based paint need only beroughened Any holes or dents in the structure must befilled with the appropriate repair material and sanded Clean the area to be covered using MEK or equivalent b Dry fit the erosion shield to the cleaned structure Position identified top sur...

Page 181: ...ce lines coincide Hold the shoe at its central area Do not move or change its referenced position as you prepare to activate the cement h Fold back the trailing edge and use a clean lint free cloth moistened not dripping with Toluol to activate ate the cement on the nose or leading edge of the shield Activate mating areas not to exceed one square foot at a time Avoid excessive e rubbing which coul...

Page 182: ...ACTIVATE AT CENTER NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL VIEW 3 VIEW 2 VIEW 1 VIEW 5 VIEW 4 POINTED SCISSORS VIEW 6 VIEW7 Figure 4 31 Installation of Radome Erosion Shield Added 10 5 83 STRUCTURES 1H14 ...

Page 183: ...aterial overlapping the tape using scissors held at an angle Usinga V knife or pair of scissors with blades opened to form a V neatly trim off excess shield material overlapping edge of I masking tape applying light uniform tension to trim material Refer to Figure 4 31 View 6 m If an air pocket or blister is formed release air by inserting a hypodermic needle at 45 angle or less pointed toward cen...

Page 184: ...ation of Aileron Trim Sender Assembly 119 5 21 Rigging and Adjustment of Aileron Trim 119 5 22 Rigging and Adjustment of Aileron Trim Sender and Indicator 1110 5 23 Elevator Controls 1110 5 24 Removal of Elevator Control Cables 1110 5 25 Installation of Elevator Control Cables 1111 5 26 Removal of Elevator Bellcrank Assembly 1111 5 27 Installation of Elevator Bellcrank Assembly 1114 5 28 Rigging a...

Page 185: ...ssion Assembly Installation of Flap Transmission Assembly Removal of Flap Position Sender Installation of Flap Position Sender Rigging and Adjustment of Flap Rigging and Adjustment of Flap Position Sender Inspection of Time Delay Switch Operation Flap Controls Calco System Description and Operation Removal of Flap Actuator Motor Disassemblyof Flap Actuator Motor Service of Flap Actuator Motor Asse...

Page 186: ...of a flap selector switch located on the instrument panel a reversible electric motor withbraking provided mounted under the cabin floor panel a flap transmissionin the trailing edgeof each wing and interconnectingflexibleshafts Sender unitslocated inthe wingsand attached to the flapswilltransmit a signalto anindicator locatedon the instrumentpanel abovethe flapselectorswitch indicating the positi...

Page 187: ...LE V I CABLE RIGGING TENSION VS TEMPERATURE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 30 F 40 F 50 F 60 F 70 F 80 F 90 F 100 F AILERON CABLE TENSION 21 LBS 23 LBS 25 LBS 28 LBS 31 LBS 35 LBS 39 LBS 45 LBS RUDDER CABLE TENSION 18 LBS 19LBS 20 LBS 22 LBS 23 LBS 25 LBS 27 LBS 31 LBS ELEVATOR CABLE TENSION 14LBS 15 LBS 16 LBS 17 LBS 18 LBS 20 LBS 22 LBS 25 LBS NOTES 1 TOLERANCE 2 LBS 2 AIRCRAFT SHOULD BE ALLOWED TO STABILI...

Page 188: ...E Trim Tab Travel with Rudder in Neutral Position Control Wheel 173 3 62 NEUTRAL 8 75 25 NOTE Measured from face of Instrument Panel Chord Line Level Neutral Position Rudder Pedal 21 15 each way Neutral to Fwd 3 87 inches 7 50 Total Neutral to Aft 3 63 inches Aircraft Serial Nos 31 5001 through 31 7852171 refer to latest Revision Piper S B 739 Revised 10 5 83 1H20 1H20 SURFACE CONTROLS ...

Page 189: ...of the two turnbuckles 41 that connect the horizontal roller chains 40 and 42 Remove the outboard chain guard 56 from the insideof the sprocket housing 37 or 61 that is to be removed Unwrap the chain from the sprocket that is to be removed 2 If the left sprocket assembly 61 is to be removed first remove the floor panel located between the control pedestal and left side of the fuselage Loosen one o...

Page 190: ...om stop to stop 4 Attach the sprocket assemblyto the bulkhead and torque 5 Position the horizontal roller chain 40 and 42 around the right and left sprocket and temporarily connect turnbuckles Check chain tension and correct position after both control wheelsare installed 6 If the left sprocket assembly was removed wrap the vertical chain around the sprocket and connect the chain to the control ca...

Page 191: ... fuselageat station76 00 2 Loosentheturnbuckle separatingthe endsat the forwardendof the aileronbellcrank 3 Removethe cable guardpins at wing stations29 00 and 150 00andwithinthe fuselageat station 164 50 4 Drawthe cablebackthroughthe fuselage throughthe wingand outthroughthe accesshole at theaileronbellcrank e Removalof therightbalancecable 16 maybe accomplished by the followingprocedure WARNING ...

Page 192: ... BOLT ASSEMBLY 36 FLEXIBLE JOINT 37 HOUSING SPROCKET 38 SCREW 39 CAP BOLT SKETCH A 40 CHAIN RIGHT SKETCH A 41 TURNBUCKLE 42 CHAIN LEFT 43 CONTROL WHEEL 44 CONTROL TUBE LEFT 45 SCREW ADJUSTMENT 46 BLOCK 47 HOUSING GUIDE ASSEMBLY 48 SCREW ADJUSTMENT 49 COVER 50 SPROCKET 51 LINK ASSEMBLY 52 CONTROL CABLE ELEVATOR 53 CONTROL CABLE AILERON 54 CHAIN AILERON 55 PLATE CABLE ATTACH 56 GUARD CHAIN 57 BUSHIN...

Page 193: ...SKETCHC SKETCHD Figure 5 1 Control Column Installation cont Reissued 9 23 80 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 1I1 ...

Page 194: ...VICEMANUAL DAMAGE HERE IMPROPERTOOL RESULTINGIN LOCKEDBALL A SPECIAL WRENCH MAY BE REQUI RED WITH A LONG THROAT ONLYCORRECT METHOD Figure 5 2 Correct Method of Installing Rod End Bearings Reissued 9 23 80 SURFACECONTROLS 112 ...

Page 195: ...nds atthe turnbuckles 26 at station285 00 3 Installcableguardpins at fuselagestations244 00and274 00 4 Drawthe balancecable fromthe fuselagethroughthe wing and attachthe turnbuckleat aft end ofthe aileronbellcrank 24 5 Installthe fairlead 19 at fuselagestation 171 25 between wherethe interconnectingcable attachesto thebalancecable 6 Installcableguardpins at fuselagestation171 00andwing stations29 ...

Page 196: ...TINTERCONNECTING CABLE 36 ARM 21 LEFTINTERCONNECTING CABLE 37 SENDER 22 LEFTCONTROL CABLE 38 BRACKET 23 LEFTBALANCE CABLE 39 GUARD BOLT 24 LEFTBELLCRANK 40 DRUM 25 CONTROL ROD 41 HOUSING 26 TURNBUCKLE 42 CAPBOLT 27 SPRING 43 SCREW STOP 28 SPRING 44 SCREW 29 SPRING 45 BOLTASSY 30 CABLE 46 JAMNUT 31 CONNECTOR 47 CLEVIS 32 BOLTASSEMBLY 48 BOLTASSY Figure 5 3 Aileron and Aileron Trim Controls 49 BRACK...

Page 197: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL SKETCHB C SKETCHE SKETCH D Figure 5 3 Aileron and Aileron Trim Controls cont Revised 3 31 94 SURFACE CONTROLS 115 ...

Page 198: ...cable end is paintedred to help facilitate proper hook up Do not tighten turnbuckle fork ends on bellcrank so tight that the ends cannot rotate e Install stop block 61 and torque bolts f Check aileron controls riggingand adjustment as per paragraph 5 13 g Install accessplate and secure 5 13 RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF AILERON CONTROLS Refer to Figure 5 3 PPS 50046 a To rigthe aileroncontrols set the...

Page 199: ... V I without autopilot bridlecables connected Safety turnbuckles d To adjust the interconnecting cables between the aileron and rudder cables Tirst ascertain that cable tension has been set for both the aileron and rudder cables Ascertain that the aileron and rudder controls and surfaces are neutral then remove the access panel to the aft interior section of the fuselage and adjust the interconnec...

Page 200: ...bracket and secure d Draw the cables from the pedestal through the fuselage and into the wing e Install the cable pulleys in the fuselage at station 102 00 and secure f Install the aileron and aileron trim pulleys in the wing at station 29 00 g Set the aileron cable tension per Table V II and check rigging and adjustment per paragraph 5 13 h If the trim cables 9 from the screw assembly 4 within th...

Page 201: ... 90 00 per Table V II and check rigging and adjustment per paragraphs 5 21and 5 22 j Install accessplates 5 19 REMOVAL OF AILERON TRIM SENDER ASSEMBLY Refer to Figure 5 3 a Remove the two accessplates located on the underside of the wingat station 171 00 b Disconnect the electrical leadsto the sender 37 c Disconnect the sender arm 36 from the sender shaft 33 and turn the arm to allow it to separat...

Page 202: ...n the pedestalreadsneutral Tighten the arm 36 on the sender shaft g Turn trim to both extremes and observetrim indicator reading Indicator pointer should travelto both extreme positionson the indicator dial h Install the accessplates 5 23 ELEVATOR CONTROLS 5 24 REMOVAL OF ELEVATOR CONTROL CABLES Refer to Figure 5 5 a To remove the control cables 1 and 2 that connect between the elevator control se...

Page 203: ...ingprocedure 1 Connect the cables to the elevator bellcrank 14 and draw the cables forward through the fuselage 2 Connect the cablesto the forward cablesat station 86 50 3 Install the cable guard pins for the cable 10 that connects to the upper end of the elevator bellcrank right cable at stations 111 00 151 00 191 70 244 00 and 274 00 4 Install the cable guard pins for the cable II that connects ...

Page 204: ...SSY 13 TRIM CABLE 21 JAM NUT 14 BELLCRANK 29 TRIM SCREW ASSY 15 ROD CONTROL 30 HOUSING NOTE 2 APPLY CORROSION RETARDANT COMPOUND WITH SPRING IN THE EXTENDED POSITION REFER TO LUBRICATION CHART SEENOTE 2 31 TRIM DRUM 32 SCREW 33 FWD STOP SCREW 34 ARM SENDER 35 SENDER 36 SHAFT SENDER 37 BOLT ASSEMBLY 38 BRACKET SENDER 39 ROD END CLEVIS 40 JAM NUT 41 AFT STOP SCREW 42 NUT SENDER 43 WASHER SENDER 44 R...

Page 205: ...1046 SKETCHB NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL SKETCHD Figure5 6 ElevatorandElevatorTrimControls cont Revised 5 3 84 Interim Revision 7 16 96 SURFACE CONTROLS 1113 ...

Page 206: ...eightinchesas measuredperpendicularbackfromthebulkheadat station317 75 Obtainthissettingbyturning the controlrod end 26 tothe desiredlength andsecurewithjam nut 28 d Withthe elevatorbellcrankneutral adjustthe turnbuckles 3 at fuselagestation 110 50to obtain cabletensionas giveninTableV IIandcorrecttensionto ambienttemperatureperTableV I Allowthecontrol wheelto neutralizeforeand aft The neutralposi...

Page 207: ...Y C24 SEENOTE 1 SEE NOTE 1 2 S N 31 8152083 AND UP NOTES AFTER STARTING WIRE THRU HEAD OF SCREW MAKE ONE COMPLETE WRAP AROUND SHANK OF SCREW NEXTTO JAM NUT FINISH WIRING THRU HOLES PRO VIDED IN FORGING INSTALL SAFETY WIRE THRU HEAD OF SCREW WITH WET ZINC CHROMATE THE LOCK WIRE SHOULD ALWAYS BE INSTALLED AND TWISTED SO THAT THE LOOP AROUND THE HEAD STAYS DOWN AND DOES NOT TEND TO COME UP OVER THEBO...

Page 208: ...k one setof cableends at station291 00to facilitateinstallationanddisconnectthe cables at the tumbuckles 12 h Remove the cable guard pins at fuselage station 78 00 99 00 and 244 00 i Remove one screw from each set of rub blocks at stations 162 50 174 00 and 215 00 and open them far enough to allowthe cable ends to pass through j Remove the screw that secures the elevator trim control wheel on the ...

Page 209: ... them from unwrapping b Allow the sender arm 34 to rotate freely on the sender shaft 36 until trim rigging and adjustment is made c Position the screw assembly with sender unit attached in the horizontal stabilizer install the attachment cap bolts 37 and secure Do not connect the fork of the trim screw 32 to the control rod and arm assemblyuntil trim riggingand adjustment is made d Draw the trim c...

Page 210: ... to the sender f Rig the senderunit per paragraph 5 38 g Install accessplate 5 37 RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF ELEVATOR TRIM Refer to Figure 5 6 PPS 50046 a To adjust the elevator trim it must be ascertained that the followinghas been accomplished either duringinstallationor as a preadjustment check 1 Trim cables are evenly wrapped centered on the drum in the control pedestal and both turnbuckles 12 ...

Page 211: ...rtab inneutral position d Calibrate the trim indicator located in the control pedestalby first rotating the sendershaft 36 as viewedfrom the shaft end in a clockwisedirection to its stop position e Turn on the master switch A minimum of 24 volts must be supplied to the electrical system when makingthis adjustment f Rotate the sender shaft slowly counterclockwise when viewedfrom the shaft end until...

Page 212: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 1143 FWD Figure 5 11 Cable Routing on Elevator Trim Servo Reissued 9 23 80 SURFACECONTROLS 1120 ...

Page 213: ...81102 35 020 P N 81102 36and 032 P N 81102 37 d Lubricate and slide the torque tube 6 through the sideof the fuselageand right bearing 21 far enough to slide the rightretainer collar 18 on the tube e Slide the tube 6 through the outer torque tube 14 assemblyinstallingthe left pedals 28 and 33 and left retainer collar 5 f Insert the bolts 4 and 19 through bolt retainer collars 5 and 18 and tube 6 d...

Page 214: ...rn 17 h Removethecableguardpins at fuselagestations215 00 244 00 274 00and 317 75 In addition whenremovingtheleftcable 7 removepinsat stations140 00and162 60 i Drawthecablesaft throughthefuselageandremove 5 44 INSTALLATION OFRUDDERCONTROLCABLES Referto Figure5 13 a Connectthecables 7 and8 totherudderhorn 17 b Drawthe cables 7 and8 forwardthroughthe fuselageand connectto the forwardcables 2 and 3 a...

Page 215: ...TAINER 19 BOLT ASSEMBLY 20 BOLT CAP 21 BLOCK BEARING 22 BRACKET MOUNTING 23 PLATE 24 ROD 25 CONTROL CABLE 26 BRAKE CYLINDER 27 PEDAL RIGHT OUTER 28 PEDAL RIGHT INNER 29 ROD STEERING 30 NUT JAM 31 BOLT ASSEMBLY 32 PEDAL LEFT INNER 33 PEDAL LEFT OUTER 34 BRAKE LINE SUPPORT CHANNEL 35 TORQUE TUBE GUARD 36 MACHINE SCREWS AND NUTS 37 SCREWS NUTS AND CLAMPS NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 1049 SKETCHA Figu...

Page 216: ...dder pedals to align in a lateral position as shown in Figure 5 14 2 Adjustthe turnbuckles 4 at fuselagestation 76 00to obtain proper cabletension perTable V II and to align the rudder at neutral position Neutral position of the ruddermay beestablishedby aligning verticallythe forward overhang at the upper portion of the rudder with thevertical finor withthe use of the fabricated rudder riggingjig...

Page 217: ...joint to the control shaft of the trim screw assembly j Remove the bolts that attach the screw assembly to its mounting bracket Draw the assembly with cablesfrom the control pedestal 5 50 INSTALLATION OF RUDDER TRIM ASSEMBLY Control Pedestal Refer to Figure 5 13 a Ascertain that the cable is evenlywrapped on the trim drum centered and blocked to present unwrapping Refer to Wrapping Trim Drum Parag...

Page 218: ... 24 ARM BOLT ASSEMBLY 15 SEENOTE A Revised 3 31 94 NAVAJO CHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL NOTEA LY CORROSION COMPOUND WITH NGINTHEEXTENDED ITION REFER TO LUBRICATION CHART IN CEMANIALSECTIONIL 25 MOUNTING BRACKET 26 SENDER 27 SENDER SHAFT 28 SENDER ARM 29 TRIM SCREW STOP 30 TRIM SCREW 31 HOUSING BRACKET 32 TRIM DRUM 33 BOLT GUARD 34 ANT ROTATION GUIDE 35 JAM NUT 36 ROD END 37 BOLT ASSEMBLY 38 TRIM TAB ARM ...

Page 219: ...SKETCH E NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 194 192 NEUTRAL SKETCHC SKETCHD 1045C SKETCHF Figure 5 13 Rudder and Rudder Trim Controls cont SURFACE CONTROLS Reissued 9 23 80 1J3 ...

Page 220: ... Ascertain that the trim cable assembly is evenly wrapped centered on the drum the drum centered between stops on the trim screwand the cables blocked to prevent them from unwrapping b Positionthe screwassemblyin the vertical fin installthe attachment bolts and secure c Draw the cables 16 through the fin into fuselageand connect them at the turnbuckles 18 at station 287 50 If the cables from the c...

Page 221: ...nstall accessplate 5 55 RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF RUDDER TRIM Refer to Figure 5 13 a To adjust the rudder trim it must be ascertained that the followinghas been accomplishedeither during installation or as a preadjustment check I Trim cables are evenly wrapped centered on their drums both in the control pedestal and in the fin and both cableturnbuckles are located approximately at fuselagestation ...

Page 222: ... Shouldthe indicatorpointernot reach eitherextremepositionon the dial return the tab to neutral loosenthe senderin its bracketand slide it closerto the trim screw Tightenthe senderand check neutralindication If neutralindicationhaschanged repeatstepsf andg i Installthe accessplate 5 57 TRIM DRUM 5 58 WRAPPINGTRIMDRUM RefertoFigure5 16 Alltrim drumsarewrappedbasicallyin thesame mannerexceptasnotedi...

Page 223: ...ionthe drum and route the cables fromthe assemblyas showninFigure 5 16 Install thescrew andscrew stoponthedrumshaftandsecure withtherollpin screws i To install and wrap the trim cable on the elevator trim drum Refer to Figure 5 6 1 Layout cableandmeasure25 3 16inch 64centimeters differencebetweencableends Holding cableinthatpositiongoto otherendof cableandfindcenterof cableloop Installationhint Wh...

Page 224: ...otationpin on the motorfits in the pinhole in the mountingbracket Securethe holding clamp 9 c Connectthe flexibledriveshaftends 4 and6 to the motor perParagraph5 63 and securenut 10 with 040safetywire 12 d Connectthe electricalleads e Checkflapriggingandadjustmentperparagraphs5 68and5 69 f Install accessplatesandpanelsandseats 1 TRIMSCREW ASSY ELEVATOR 2 TRIMSCREW ASSY AILERON 3 FLEXIBLE JOINT 4 C...

Page 225: ...edfrom the motor or transmission d Check the flap riggingand adjustments per Paragraphs 5 68 and 5 69 e Install the accessplates panels clamps grommets and seats 5 64 REMOVAL OF FLAP TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY Refer to Figure 5 18 a Lower the flap and remove the accessplate on the aft undersideof the wingand at the falsespar area both of whichare at wingstation 92 50 b Disconnectthe transmissiontube 19...

Page 226: ...TRANSMISSION ASSY LEFT 8 FLAP POSITION SENDER ASSY 9 STRAP MOTOR SUPPORT 10 NUT 11 SHAFT ASSEMBLY 12 WIRE SAFETY 040 13 MOUNTING BRACKET MOTOR 14 SPREADER ASSEMBLY 15 ROD LINKAGE 16 BUSHING AND SCREW ASSY 17 FLAP HORN 25 SWITCH UP LIMIT 26 ADJUSTMENT BOLT UP LIMIT 27 ADJUSTMENT BOLT DOWN LIMIT 28 ATTACHMENT BOLT ASSY 29 GROMMET 30 BOLT ASSY SENDER ARM 31 TIME DELAY SWITCH 1020 See Instructions Par...

Page 227: ...nect the tube and loosen the bolts securing the horn to the flap enough to allow the horn to be moved by tapping with a soft hammer Connect the tube to the horn and tap the horn to achieve a satisfactory alignment Lower the flap to the near extended position disconnect the tube from the horn and torque the horn attachment bolts 6 With the actuator tube 19 and flap horn 17 aligned connect the tube ...

Page 228: ...L NOTE REFER TO ELECTRICAL SECTION FOR SCHEMATIC WING FLAP LIMIT SWITCH TO STARTER AND FLAP CIRCUIT BREAKER ELECTRONIC TIME DELAY Figure 5 19 Flap Circuit Diagram Dukes System Revised 2 8 82 Effectivity DUKES 1J12 SURFACE CONTROLS ...

Page 229: ...Flaps must stop prior to making contact with the flap travel stops installed per Kit 764 396 7 Adjustment of the up limit switch 25 is accomplishedin the samemanner except that the flaps should be stopped in the retracted position just as the flap rollers approach the end of track slots Approximately 1 16 of an inch on the closestroller both flaps d Checkadjustment of the flap position indicator e...

Page 230: ...tch is installed in the flap electrical system so that when the flap switch is actuated flaps completely extended or retracted and if after one second the left flap does not moveoff the limit switches the time delay switchshuts off the flap motor The right flap willtravelapproximately 9 I degrees a Lowerthe flaps and remove the access plates to the limit switchesin the left wing false spar at wing...

Page 231: ...ate position as well as ball lock detents at 0 15 and 40 of flap extension Flaps are deployed mechanically by a single motor driven thru two flexible shafts connected to individual ball screw actuators Selection of the desired flap position moves the control rheostat wiper relative to the left wing flap rheostat wiper with a resultant amplifier output which will operate the flap motor through cont...

Page 232: ...bearing 15 from armature shaft Remove brushes 6 and brush springs 7 from brush holders Remove four screws 9 and insulator assembly 8 from front end bell 5 Remove nuts 11 lockwashers 12 contact studs 10 and nylon shoulderwashers 13 from front 5 75 SERVICE OF FLAP ACTUATOR MOTOR a Wash all disassembled parts except brushes bearings and armature with a suitable dry cleaning solvent b Examine all part...

Page 233: ...AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENT ANDTEST POINTS NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL LEFT CONTROL RHEOSTAT RL 0 Figure 5 21 Flap System Diagram Calco Revised 10 5 83 Effectivity CALCO SURFACE CONTROLS 1J17 ...

Page 234: ...HIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL TORQUETO 30 35 IN LBS TORQUETO 30 35 IN LBS 16 15 18 2 1 19 SEE SKETCH A EARLIER MOTOR ONLY 9 SCREW 10 STUD CONTACT 11 NUT HEX 12 WASHER LOCK 13 SHOULDER WASHER 14 END BELL 15 BEARING BALL 16 WASHER SPRING 17 ARMATURE ASSY 18 SLEEVE AND MAGNET ASSY 19 PLATE IDENTIFICATION Figure 5 22 Motor Assembly Exploded View Revised 10 5 83 Effectivity CALCO SURFACE CONTROLS 1J18 ...

Page 235: ...h pin insleeveand lockwirehole to the left of the pin j Insert screws 4 throughfront end bell 5 and rearendbell 1 Securewithlockwashers 3 andhex nuts 2 Torque nuts 2 30 40inch pounds 5 77 INSTALLATION OF FLAP ACTUATOR MOTOR Refer to Figure 5 23 a Install the shock grommets in the bulkhead at station 174 b Install the flap actuator motor 5 and bracket 13 on the forward sideof the bulkhead Ascertain...

Page 236: ...e Removethe transmissionfromits mountingbracketsanddraw theunitthroughthe accessopening in the wingfalsespar 5 81 DELETED 5 82 DELETED 5 83 DELETED 5 84 DELETED 5 85 INSTALLATION OFFLAPTRANSMISSION RefertoFigure5 23 Ascertainthatthe correctflap transmissionassembliesarebeinginstalledby checkingthepartnumberson the assemblieswithinformation in the latestPA 31 350PartsCatalog a Lubricatethe flaptran...

Page 237: ...TOR SUPPORT 10 NUT 11 SHAFT ASSEMBLY 12 WIRE SAFETY 040 13 MOUNTING BRACKET MOTOR 14 ROD LINKAGE 15 BUSHING AND SCREW ASSY 16 FLAP HORN 17 BOLT ASSEMBLY 18 TUBE TRANSMISSION 19 SWITCH DOWN LIMIT 20 SHAFT SENDER 21 ARM SENDER 22 SENDER FLAP POSITION 23 SWITCH UP LIMIT 24 ADJUSMENT BOLT UP LIMIT 25 ADJUSTMENT BOLT DOWN LIMIT 26 ATTACHMENT BOLT ASSY 27 GROMMET 28 BOLT ASSY SENDER ARM S I SKETCH B Fig...

Page 238: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICEMANUAL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1J22 ...

Page 239: ...ntor readatthe centertapswillbe referredto as VC VL andVRrespectively a Properoperationrequiresthat the rheostat RL on the left flap respondto any changesin the flap positionselectorrheostat RC in the formVL andVC Itfollowsthatthe amountof the stroketravel as well as howit is centeredwithrespectto the ends will bedeterminedby how RLis adjustedrelativeto RC Since VC is fixedandcannotbechanged a tri...

Page 240: ...ure5 28 SketchB 6 By manuallymovingthe flap adjusttheDOWN limitswitchactuatingboltso thatthe switch is actuatedwitha0 03of aninch maximumgapbetweentherollersandthe endof the flaptrackslot 7 Withtheflaprestingon a0 06of aninchdiameterrod betweenthe rollersandendof theflap track slots turn the transmissionsleeveout fromthe forwardstop recordingthe numberof turns until the attachmentholesin thesleeve...

Page 241: ...lts Supportingmeansfor the flapsshould now be removed since flaps willbe heldinplacebythe sleeveattachingbolts 10A Installcastellatednuts on sleeve attachingboltsand tightenthe nuts so as to allow0 030of aninchthrustplayforthe bolts Safetywithcotterpins 11 Connectthe flexibledriveshafts to the transmissions Be sure that the splinesare properly engagedandrunthe shaftattachingnuton fingertight Safet...

Page 242: ...stvoltagesatRR andRLasper step17andbeginagain d If VL is within0 04 volts of VC the systemhas shut down becausethe amplifier sees that the position selected VC and the positionsensed VL have been satisfied In this event select flaps to full DOWN andreadjustvoltagesat RLandRRper step 17 using greaterspreadbetweenVL VRandVC thanin theinitialadjustment e If the systemhas completeda fullstroke UP limi...

Page 243: ...theVL andVR are withinlimitsof VCas specifiedinstep 17 g Check the position indicator readings against the flap selector and flap deflection using the followingprocedure 1 When measuringflap deflectionangles lift the trailingedge of the flap to eliminateplay betweenthe rollersandthetrack slots If the indicatordoes notcorrespondtothe flapposition placethe flaps in the APPROACHposition 2 Adjustthe f...

Page 244: ...red d Checkthat VL and VR are still withinthe limitsof VCas specifiedin step 17 andthat the positionindicatoragreeswith theflapspositionin theUP APPROACHandDOWN positions h Afterthe systemis properlyriggedfor strokeand positionindication placethe positiveprobeof the digitalvoltmeterinRR at theamplifierandthe negativeprobeinthe RL Selectthe flapsfullDOWN and monitorthevoltage ARL throughoutthe exte...

Page 245: ...OX a Remove the knob from the control box b Remove the electrical connector from the rear side of the control box c Remove the two screwsthat secure the control box to the instrument panel d Remove the control box from the instrument panel NOTE It is recommended that the flap control box selector besent back to manufacturer for servicing Environ Divisionof Calco Mfg Co 506 Highway 27 North Haines ...

Page 246: ...TAIN SERVICE MANUAL ACTUATOR ARM FLAPTRACK Figure 28a Flap Rigging Adjudtments NOTE REFERTO PIPERPARTSCATALOGFORFLAP RIGGING TOOL P N71505 02 AND71505 03 I Figure 28b Flap Rigging Tool Revised 3 31 94 SURFACE CONTROLS 1K6 ...

Page 247: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICE MANUAL LEFT CONTROL RHEOSTAT Figure 29a CalcoFlapSystemInterconnect CONTROL FAULTLIGHT INDICATOR RR Figure29b CalcoFlapSystemSchematic Revised 3 31 94 SURFACE CONTROLS 1K7 ...

Page 248: ...essplug connector E368 Groundrelay K I at pin 6 or relay K2 at pin 4 of theconnector then fabricatea jumperlead to extend frompin I A of the connectorto eitherwirelead F4Eof relay K I or wire leadF4Dof relay K2 to actuate eithertheup or downrelayandrun themotor k Check the 27 5 volt powerat the drive motorswhile anotherpersonis energizingrelaysK I and K2 If 27 5 voltsis notpresentat the drive moto...

Page 249: ...NOTE SWITCHESSHOWN AT 15 ORMID FLAPRANGE Figure 5 30 Amplifier Electrical Schematic Calco P N 8482 SN PA 31 7952001to 31 252021 inclusive Revised 10 5 83 Effectivity C ALCO SURFACE CONTROLS 1K9 ...

Page 250: ...NOTE CALCO AMPLIFIERP N 8502M1 CAN REPLACE AMPLIFIERP N 8482 BUTAMPLIFIERP N 8482 CANNOT REPLACEAMPLIFIERP N 8502M1 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL DOWN RELAY ...

Page 251: ...8 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM MOTOR CB 275TV NOTE SWITCHES SHOWN AT 15 OR MID FLAP RANGE Figure 5 30a Amplilier Electrical Schematic Calco P N 8502MI S N PA 1 8252022 and up Added 10 5 83 Effectivity CALCO SURFACE CONTROLS 1Kll ...

Page 252: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL NOTE CALCO AMPLIFIER P N 8502M1 CAN REPLACE AMPLIFIER P N 8482 BUT AMPLIFIER P N 8482 CANNOT REPLACE AMPLIFIER P N 8502M1 KI UP RELAY K2 DOWNRELAY ...

Page 253: ...nect the voltmeter betweentest RL and GND on the amplifier Voltage should equal RC voltage within 0 3 volts s If oltage readings in either step q or r exceeds0 3 volts shut down is due to flap asymmetry Correct causeof asymmetry and rerig flap system t If the problem is not locatedat this point the amplifier is defective and must be replaced u Turn batters masterswitch OFF or removeexternal power ...

Page 254: ...kcableguards Resistanceto con trol wheel rotation Systemnot lubricated properly Lubricatesystem Cabletension too high Control column hori zontal chain improp erlyadjusted Pulleysbindingor rubbing Cablesnot in placeon pulleys Bent aileronand or hinge Cablescrossedor routed incorrectly Adjust cabletension Adjust chain tension Replacebinding pulleys and or provideclear ance between pulleys and bracke...

Page 255: ...sted properly Adjust stops Correct aileron travelcannot be obtained by ad justing bellcrank stops Control wheel stops before control sur facesreach full travel Incorrect riggingof aileroncables con trol wheeland control rod Incorrect riggingbe tween control wheel and control cables Rig aileron cables control wheel and control rod Rig control wheel and control cables AILERONTRIM CONTROLSYSTEM Lost ...

Page 256: ...sedor routed incorrectly Adjust cable tension Replacebindingpulleys Provideclearancebe tween pulleysand brackets Install cables Lubricate hinge It necessary replace Checkrouting of con trol cables Trim tab failsto reach full travel Systemincorrectly rigged Check and or adjust rigging Either or both trim drums incorrectly wrapped Check and or adjust rigging Trim indicator fails to indicate correct ...

Page 257: ...unit fective Trim indicator unit Replaceindicator defective Defectivewiringin Check wiring system indicator Trim senderunit Checksender unit movesto ground open ground right position ELEVATORCONTROLSYSTEM otion between Cable tension too low Adjust cable tension aker witch re nit runit t Trim indicator pointer extreme Lost motion between inn control wheeland elevator Linkagelooseor worn Brokenpulle...

Page 258: ... Cablescrossedor routed incorrectly Adjust cable tension Adjust and lubricate Replacebinding pulleys and or provideclear ance between pulleys and brackets Install cables correctly Repairor replace ele vator or hinge Checkrouting of control cables Incorrect elevator travel Elevatorarm stops incorrectly adjusted Adjust stop screws Elevatorcontrol rod incorrectly adjusted Adjust control rod Correct e...

Page 259: ...on pulleys Brokenpulley Linkagelooseor worn Systemnot lubricated properly Cabletension too high Pulleysbinding or rub bing Cablesnot in place on pulleys Trim tab hingebinding Cablescrossedor routed incorrectly Install cables Replacepulley Checklinkageand tight en or replace Lubricatesystem Adjust cables Replacebindingpulleys Provideclearancebe tween pulleysand brackets Install cables Lubricate hin...

Page 260: ...djusted properly position Low voltagein system Checkpower s indicator fails Circuit breaker open Reset circuit b adjust adjust Trim to in trim supply breaker Trim to indicate any move ment Masterswitch not on Trim indicator defec tive Trim indicator ground open Trim sender unit de fective Defectivewiringin sys tem Trim senderunit ground open Turn on master switch Replaceindicator unit Checkground ...

Page 261: ...udder pedal torque tube bearingin need of lubrication Cable tension too high Pulleysbindingor rubbing Cablesnot in placeon pulleys Cablescrossedor routed incorrectly Rudder cablesincor rectly rigged Rudderbellcrank stop incorrectly adjusted Lubricate torque tube bearings Adjust cable tension Replacebindingpulleys and or provideclear ance between pulleys and brackets Install cables correctly Checkc...

Page 262: ...agelooseor worn Install cables Replacepulley Checklinkageand tight en or replace Trim control wheel moveswith excessive resistance Systemnot lubricated properly Lubricatesystem Pulleysbinding or rubbing Cablesnot in placeon pulleys Trim tab hingebinding Cablescrossed or routed incorrectly Replacebindingpulleys Provideclearancebe tween pulleysand brackets Install cables Lubricate hinge Re placeif n...

Page 263: ...adjusted properly osition Lowvoltagein system Checkpower supply indicator fails Circuitbreaker open Resetcircuit breaker djust djust nit Trim i to ind trim p pply breaker Trimi to indicate any move ment 0 Masterswitchnot on Trim indicator ground open Trim sender unit de fective Trim indicator defec tive Defectivewiringin system Trim senderunit ground open Turn on master switch Checkground wire Rep...

Page 264: ...round open from flap Checkground motor circuit relay tion Ground open from flap Checkground selectorswitch tion Defectiveflap motor Replacemotor Defectivecircuit Isolate cause and re wiring pair s fail to extend Battery switch off Turn switch or etract Flap so iddoes not ac Flap solenoid circuit Reset circuit b e Solenoid breaker open uit Defectiveflap Replaceselector selectorswitch switch Defecti...

Page 265: ...witch in correctly adjusted Checkground connec tion Isolate causeand re pair Adjust flap Adjust limit switch Flaps not synchro nized or fail to fit evenlywhen re tracted Incorrect adjustment of the transmission tube Rig Flaps haveerratic operation during extension and retraction Bindingbetween flexi ble shaft and motor Isolate causeand lu bricate cableif re quired Bindingbetween track androllers S...

Page 266: ... actuator shaft Defectivetransmission Replaceflexible shaft Determinecauseand replace or repair Check operation Faulty time delay switch Noindication of flap position on indicator Defectiveindicator unit Defectivesenderunit Senderunit not adjusted properly Replaceindicator unit Replacesenderunit Adjust sender unit Defectivewiring Battery switchoff Circuitbreaker open Senderunit ground open Checkan...

Page 267: ...Potentiometer failure Motor and or relay failure Check and rerig flaps Replace potentiometer Replace component Flaps inoperative and annunciator light off flap indicator pointing OFF Flaps inoperative and annunciator light off flap indicator showing flap position Power lost to amplifier Annunciator failure Flap asymmetric con dition Reset flap control circuit breaker Test annunciator Check and rer...

Page 268: ... 125R NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 198 MATERIAL 25 TO 50 ALUMINUM OR STEEL 6 50 Figure 5 31 Fabricated Bellcrank RiggingTool Reissued 9 23 80 SURFACECONTROLS 1L4 ...

Page 269: ... INCHBOLT FILE TO LENGTH 25 34 PLACE THIS SIDENEXT TO ELEVATOR DRILL ANDTAP 1 4 INCHBOLT FILE TO LENGTH 50 to 1 0 MATERIAL ALUMINUM PLATE SPARMATERIALMAYBE USED Figure 5 32 Fabricated Aileron and Elevator RiggingTool Reissued 9 23 80 SURFACE CONTROLS 1L5 ...

Page 270: ...1800 NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 1054 Figure 5 33 Fabricated Rudder Rigging Tool Reissued 9 23 80 SURFACECONTROLS 1L6 ...

Page 271: ...1L7 THRU 1L24 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 272: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL CARD 2 OF4 PA 31 350 PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORATION PART NUMBER 761488 2A1 ...

Page 273: ...visedmaterial Revisedtext andillustrationsareindicatedby a blackverticallinealongthe left handmarginof theframe oppositerevisedor addedmaterial Revisionlinesindicateonlycurrentrevisionswithchangesand additions to existingtext andillustrations Changesin capitalization spelling punctuation indexing physicallocation of material or completepageadditionsarenotidentifiedby revisionlines Revisionsto Serv...

Page 274: ...1E18 V SURFACE CONTROLS 1H16 AEROFICHE CARD NO 2 VI HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 2A8 VII LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM 2D14 VIII POWER PLANT 2H3 IX FUEL SYSTEM 2K1 AEROFICHE CARD NO 3 X INSTRUMENTS 3A7 XI ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3C8 AEROFICHE CARD NO 4 XII ELECTRONICS 4A9 XIII HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM 4B6 XIV ACCESSORIES AND UTILITIES 4D24 2A3 ...

Page 275: ...nding Gear Selector Mechanism 2C10 6 20 Hand Pump Ozone 2C14 6 21 Hand Pump Wiebel Tool 2C16 6 22 Hydraulic System Installation 2C18 6 23 Gear Actuating Cylinder Ozone 2C 19 6 24 Gear Actuating Cylinder Wiebel Tool 2C21 6 25 Gear Door Actuating Cylinder Ozone 2C23 6 26 Gear Door Actuating Cylinder Wiebel Tool 2DI 6 27 Hydraulic Filter 2D3 6 28 Hydraulic Pump 2D6 6 29 Power Pack Test Harness Schema...

Page 276: ...hecking Main Gear Toe in Adjustment 7 38 Nose Gear Wear Limits 7 39 Main Gear Wear Limits 8 1 Engine Cowling 8 2 Cowl Flap Transmission and Sender Assembly 8 3 Propeller Installation 8 4 Typical Nicks and Removal Method 8 5 Propeller Governor 8 6 Engine Installation 8 7 Schematic Diagram of Turbocharger System 8 8 Turbocharger Installation PA 31 350 8 9 Exhaust Waste Gate 8 10 Fuel Injector 8 11 F...

Page 277: ...lation 22 8 33 Lubricating Sleeve 2J4 8 34 Lubricating Ferrule Shoulder 2J4 8 35 Ignition System Schematic 26 8 36 Removing Frozen Spark Plug 2J7 9 1 Fuel System Schematic 2K4 9 2 Fuel Cell Installation Main Inboard 2K6 9 2a Fuel Cell Installation Nacelle Optional 2K7 9 3 Fuel Cell Installation Auxiliary Outboard 2K10 9 4 Installation of Fuel Valve Drain Plate 2K12 9 5 Fuel Gauge Adjustment Wires ...

Page 278: ...ulic Pump Troubleshooting Chart Hydraulic System Inspection Limits Troubleshooting Chart Landing Gear System Propeller Specifications Turbocharger Installation Torque Values in Inch Pounds Coupling Torques Troubleshooting Chart Engine Fuel Quantity Sender Resistance Limits Wear Limits for Electric Fuel Pump Fuel Cell Repair Equipment Lists Troubleshooting Chart Fuel System 2A17 2A 18 2D7 2DII 2GI ...

Page 279: ...Unit Optional Identification of Power Packs HydraulicPowerPack Ozone 6 21 Removalof Power Pack 6 22 Disassemblyof Power Pack 6 23 Disassemblyof Manifold 6 24 Disassemblyof Hand Pump Suction Screen 6 25 Disassemblyof Hand Pump ReliefValve 6 26 Disassemblyof MainReliefValve 6 27 Disassemblyof Priority Valve 6 28 Disassemblyof Hand PumpCheck Valve 6 29 Disassemblyof Standpipe and Filter 6 30 Disassem...

Page 280: ...k PowerPack WiebelTool Removalof Power Pack Disassemblyof Power Pack Disassemblyof Manifold Disassemblyof Hand Pump Suction Screen Disassemblyof Hand Pump ReliefValve Disassemblyof MainReliefValve Disassemblyof Priority Valve Disassemblyof Hand Pump CheckValve Disassemblyof Standpipe Filter Disassemblyof Vent Filter Disassemblyof Door Vent Valve Disassemblyof Time DelayCheckValve Disassemblyof Lan...

Page 281: ...eakage Installation of PowerPack Gear SelectorHandleMechanism Operation of Gear SelectorHandleMechanism Removalof Gear Selector HandleMechanism Installation of Gear Selector HandleMechanism Inspection of LandingGear SelectorHandleMechanism Adjustment of Gear Selector Mechanism Hydraulic Reservoir gthe Hydraulic System Pump Emergency Ozone Removalof Hand Pump Disassemblyof Hand Pump Cleaning Inspec...

Page 282: ...r ActuatingCylinders WiebelTool 6 139 Removalof Gear Door ActuatingCylinders 6 140 Disassemblyof Gear Door ActuatingCylinders 6 141 Cleaning Inspection and Repair of GearDoor ActuatingCylinders 6 142 Assemblyof Gear Door ActuatingCylinder 6 143 Installation of Gear Door Actuating Cylinder 6 144 Hydraulic Lines 6 145 Removaland Installation of HydraulicLines 6 146 HydraulicFilter 6 147 Removaland I...

Page 283: ...nd connecting arms A solenoid operated lock is located behind the instrument panel as part of the selector assembly to prevent the lever from being moved to the up position while the airplane is on the ground This solenoid is spring loaded to the locked position and activated by an anti retraction squat switch mounted on the left main gear upper torque link The anti retraction switch will also sou...

Page 284: ...TION SOLENOID DOOR SOLENOID DOWN BUS DOOR SOLENOID SWITCH UP UP MAIN GEAR LIMIT SWITCH MAIN GEAR NOTES 1 GEAR IS SHOWN DOWN AND LOCKED DOORS CLOSED AND SELECTOR HANDLE IN DOWN NEUTRAL POWER ON 2 POWERON DOORS CLOSED POWEROFF DOORS OPEN Figure 6 1 Schematic of Power Pack Electrical System Revised 3 5 4 2A13 2A13 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ...

Page 285: ...N 2 REFER TO FIGURE 6 1 FOR SCHEMATIC OF POWER PACK ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 20 10 HANDPUMPRELIEF VALVE 11 CHECK VALVE 12 HANDPUMP 13 HANDPUMPCHECK VALVE 14 PRESSURE PORT 15 SUCTION FILL DRAIN 16 PRIORITY VALVE 17 POWER PACKASSEMBLY 18 PISTONRELEASE LOCK 19 SELECTOR HANDLE REMOTE 20 NOSEGEARACTUATOR 21 RESTRICTOR VALVE 22 MAINGEARACTUATOR 23 MAINGEARDOORACTUATOR 24 LANDING GEARSELECTOR VALVE 25 DOORSOLEN...

Page 286: ...ure in the closed door cylinders The valveopens and allowsfluid to flow to the handle release valve thus returning the selector lever to neutral With the selector in neutral fluid is allowed to circulateback to the reservoir The main relief valvefunctions as a safety between the pump and selector valves Whenthe main relief valve opens fluid is directed back to the reservoir The hand pump relief va...

Page 287: ... and requires disassembly it is recommendedthat it be replaced on an exchange basis or overhauledby arecommended overhaul shop If however this cannot be achieved the power pack may be repaired in accordancewith the instructions in this manual 6 4 FLUSHING HYDRAULICSYSTEM When contamination of the hydraulic system is suspected the complete system should be drained and flushed to remove the contamin...

Page 288: ...oor Vent ValveReseatPressure Priority ValveCrackingPressure Hand Pump CheckValveCrackingPressure Landing GearHandle Position Release TimeDelay Valve Hydraulic Fluid Required ReservoirOperatingCapacity EnginePump ReservoirCapacity Emergency Weight Dry Power Pack Hydraulic FluidFlow Rate 1800PSI 5 1900PSI 7 2000 PSI 5 2100 PSI 7 1500 PSI 50 PSI 150 PSI 600 to 650 PSI 10 PSI 750 1250 PSI 5 1650 1775P...

Page 289: ...mp CheckValveCrackingPressure LandingGearPosition Release Time DelayValve Hydraulic Fluid Required Weight Dry Power Pack Hydraulic Fluid Flow Rate Both Pumps Operating WTC2135 1 1900 P S I 1900P S I 2100 P S I Max 1900P S I Min 0 to 100 P S I 150P S I Max 600 P S I 1 to 3 P S I 750 1250 P S I 5 to 9 seconds MIL H 5606 10 50 pounds 1 6 G P M WTC2135 3 1800 P S I 1800 P S I 2000 P S I Max 1800 P S I...

Page 290: ...e overflow c If the system must he operated during various ground checks overhaul or inspection of its com ponents remove the protective caps from both the suction and the pressure ports and connect the test unit pressure hose to the pressure port and the test unit suction hose to the suction port Open the valve on the suction port and proceed to operate the test unit according to instructions fur...

Page 291: ...oors closed d Set the hydraulictest unit bypassvalve fullopen e Place the landinggearselector handle in the full down position f Very slowly close the bypass valve until the handle trips back to neutral Read the gaugeat the point of handle trip Thispressure should be refer to Table VI Ior VI ll Besure to allow for time delay valveto open NOTE One release valve serves to release the handle from bot...

Page 292: ...es reliefvalvesetting The reliefvalvepressureand flow rate are givenin Tables VI I and VI II e The Ozone power pack must be removed and partially disassembled to adjust the main relief valve setting Refer to Paragraph 6 48 The WiebelTool power pack main relief valve adjustment is accomplished with the power pack installed in the airplane Remove the cover to gain access to adjusting screw Refer to ...

Page 293: ...ir The followingprocedure will purge air from system and fill the reservoir a Place the airplane on jacks in accordance with Jacking Section II b Cycle the landinggear through two complete cycles in accordance with Paragraph6 9 c With landing gear extended place gear handle in full up position and record time required for gear to retract and doors to close Timeshould not exceed9 seconds 5 secondsp...

Page 294: ...D CONTROL 14 NUT JAM 15 CLEVIS 16 CHECK VALVE L ENGINE 17 CHECK VALVE R ENGINE 18 VALVE 19 LINE PRESSURE L ENGINE 20 LINE RETURN L ENGINE 21 LINE GEAR DOWN 22 LINE GEAR UP 23 PANEL WHEEL WELL 24 HOSE GEAR UP 25 HOSE GEAR DOWN 26 LINE RETURN R ENGINE 27 LINE PRESSURE R ENGINE 28 LINE DOOR CLOSE 29 LINE GEAR UP 30 LINE DOOR OPEN 31 LINE GEAR DOWN 32 LINE HAND PUMP PRESSURE 33 LINE HAND PUMP SUCTION ...

Page 295: ...otective cap on the fitting f Checkfluid levelin the power pack reservoirand check system for leaks g Install the accesspanel on the right side of the nose section 6 18 HYDRAULICTEST UNIT OPTIONAL Multi purposehydraulic test units can be used to provide the same functions as the Piper unit however the test unit must be capableof duplicating and monitoring the operatingpressuresand flow rate giveni...

Page 296: ...FILLER DRAIN ELBOW 2 PRIMARY RELIEF VALVE 3 PRIORITY VALVE 4 HAND PUMP INLET FILTER 5 HAND PUMP RELIEF VALVE 6 TIME DELAY VALVE 7 DOOR VENT VALVE 8 STANDPIPE FILTER Figure 6 5 Location of Power Pack Components Ozone Reissued 9 23 80 2B1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ...

Page 297: ...The poppet 9 and poppet seat 10 of the main relief valve are matched parts and must be replaced as an assembly NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICEMANUAL Figure6 6 HydraulicPower Pack Ozone Revised 3 5 84 HYDRAULICSYSTEM 2B2 ...

Page 298: ...ING 38 BUTTON 39 SCREW 40 WASHER 41 PLUG 42 BRACKET 43 SCREW 44 FITTING 45 BACK UP 46 O RING 47 NUT 48 BODY 49 TIME DELAY VALVE 50 RETAINER 51 BALL 52 O RING RETAINER HEX 53 O RING RETAINER BODY 54 SPRING 55 SPACER 56 COVER RESERVOIR 57 HAND PUMP RELIEF VALVE 58 ADJUSTING PLUG 69 RETAINER HAND PUMP RELIEF 60 SPRING 61 POPPET 62 SEAT 63 O RING 64 HAND PUMP SUCTION SCREEN 65 SNAP RING 66 SPACER 67 S...

Page 299: ...er to Figure6 6 After the power pack has been removed from the airplane and all ports are capped or plugged spray with cleaning solvent Federal Specification P S 661 or equivalent to remove all accumulated dust or dirt Dry with filtered compressed air To disassemblethe unit proceed as follows a Remove retaining nut 86 O ring 87 and reservoircover 56 Coveris a snugfit on reservoir Usea soft mallet ...

Page 300: ... this position an O ring will become caught and the selector spool will then be extremely difficult to remove 6 23 DISASSEMBLY OF MANIFOLD Refer to Figure6 7 a Cut the safety wire 30 and remove the door solenoid 11 by unscrewingfrom the manifold 24 This solenoid is hand tightened Usea strap wrenchor strip of sandpaper to grip the door solenoidfor removal Removethe plungerreturn spring 13 b Remove ...

Page 301: ...INRELIEF VALVE Refer to Figure6 6 a Loosen the locknut 2 at the top of the main relief valve b Removethe adjustingscrew 3 and locknut 2 from the top of the reliefvalve c Unscrewthe retainer 4 d Removethe two buttons 5 and 7 spring 6 and ball 8 e Remove the poppet 9 from the poppet seat 10 by lifting out of the poppet assembly The poppet and poppet seat arematched parts f Using a brass hook not ove...

Page 302: ...3 5 SLEEVE TRANSFER 6 O RING SLEEVE 7 DOOR SELECTOR SPOOL 8 SPOOL DOOR SELECTOR 19 O RING 10 DOOR SOLENOID VALVE 11 SOLENOID DOOR 12 O RING SOLENOID 13 SPRING PLUNGER RETURN 14 PIN 15 PLUNGER 16 HANDLE RELEASE VALVE 17 RETAINER ADJUSTING PLUG 18 SPRING 19 O RING POPPET 20 POPPET 21 O RING 22 SLEEVE TRANSFER 23 O RING 24 MANIFOLD 25 LANDING SELECTOR SPOOL 26 SPOOL LANDING GEAR SELECTOR 27 O RING 28...

Page 303: ...e the line fitting caps and wash all parts in dry cleaningsolvent Federal Specifications P S 661 or equivalent and dry with filtered compressedair c Inspect all parts for scratches scores chips cracks and indications of excesswear d Repairsarelimited to replacement of parts O ringsandgaskets e The Parts Catalogshould be used to obtain the proper parts for the powerpack beingserviced 6 33 ASSEMBLY ...

Page 304: ...wn lubricate the spring 37 and button 38 and installthe body 48 Apply lubricant to hold the button in the spring and install with the button in the hole first f Lubricate the threads on the retainer 35 adjusting plug and install This plug provides adjustment for the priority valve Install flush at this time 6 38 ASSEMBLYOF MAIN RELIEF VALVE Refer to Figure 6 6 a Inspect the poppet 9 and poppet sea...

Page 305: ...the manifold CAUTION If the selector spool is moved much more than flush with the manifold at the end opposite the rack before the manifold is installed and the rack engagedproperly with the gear an O ring will become caught The selector spool will then have to be removed the manifold cleaned to remove all O ringparticles and a new O ringinstalled The selector spool then must be reinstalled correc...

Page 306: ...the transfer tubes into the power pack body c Install the time delay valve plunger 3 in the manifold The plunger must move freely in the manifold without binding d Mate the manifold to the power pack body using care to prevent damage to the O ringson the transfer tubes Alignthe dowelpin on the power pack with the dowelhole in the manifold NOTE When installing the manifold time the landing gear ass...

Page 307: ......

Page 308: ... for switch adjustment b Adjust the top edge of the bracket 44 to be flush with the edge of the manifold assembly Tighten the screwssecurelyand safety wire them c Adjust the switch to the full up position in the slot provided d Movethe selector spool to the gearup position and check that the switchretraction arm does not bottom on the switchbody e Move the selector spool to the gear up and gear do...

Page 309: ...HDOWN HANDLEDOWNRETURN SPRINGADJUSTINGPLUG 3 HANDLE UP RETURN SPRING ADJUSTINGPLUG Figure6 11 HandleReleaseAdjustment Ozone Reissued 9 23 80 2B14 202 Figure6 10 Timingof Selector Spool Ozone 203 POWER PACK HANDLE RELEASEDETENT SPRINGADJUSTINGPLUG RELEASEPRESSURE ADJUSTMENT Reissued HYDRAULICSYSTEM ...

Page 310: ...e power pack in the airplane After it has been installed the system must be checked and final adjustments if needed made at that time Usea 078 inch punch to rotate the gear handle shaft a Ascertain that the handle returnspring adjustingplugs 1 and 2 arenot tightened and the detent spring adjusting plug 3 has been screwed in until approximately 312 inch of thread is engaged The spring however mustn...

Page 311: ...givenin Table VI I Bleed pressure after each adjustment by cracking the cap on the door open fitting Tighten the locknut on the adjusting screwafter obtainingthe correct adjustment 6 49 ADJUSTMENTOF PRIORITYVALVE a Placethe landinggear handle in the up position and remove the cap from the gearup fitting b Apply pressure and note the priority valve cracking pressure by observingthe pressure gauge w...

Page 312: ...at the top of the coverand around the center stud 21 f Install the coverretaining nut 86 cap nut tighten and safety 6 53 TESTING RESERVOIRFOR LEAKAGE a Removethe drain fittingand attach a test unit and 150 psi gaugeto the filleror drain port b Remove the cap from the reservoir vent fitting at the top of the reservoirand operate the test pump until the reservoiris completely full as indicated by fl...

Page 313: ...IN FITTING 2 MAIN RELIEF VALVE 3 PRIORITY VALVE 4 FILTER HAND PUMP SUCTION 5 HAND PUMP RELIEF VALVE 6 TIME DELAY CHECK VALVE 7 DOOR VENT VALVE 8 STANDPIPE FILTER Figure6 12 Location of PowerPackComponents WiebelTool Reissued 9 23 80 HYDRAULICSYSTEM 2B18 ...

Page 314: ...res will be connected correctly e Remove screws 46 washers 45 switch assembly 44 and insulating plate 43 Switch will remain hanging from the electrical wires Refer to Figure 6 14 f Remove plastic strap 48 attaching the electrical wires to the door solenoid valve 11 and remove the safety wire 47 from the door solenoid valve Refer to Figure 6 14 g Disconnect electrical wires of switch and door solen...

Page 315: ...1 35 ...

Page 316: ...9 SNAP RING 50 FILTER HAND PUMP 51 HAND PUMP RELIEFVALVE 52 ADJUSTING SCREW 53 SPRING 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 STEM BODY SECONDARYRELIEFVALVE BALL SEAT O RING CHECKVALVE TIME DELAY SNAP RING O RING SEAT BALL PIN BODY CHECKVALVE O RING BODY O RING BACK UP ...

Page 317: ...ght out The landing gearselector spool 19 time delay plunger 2 and the manifold 35 are matched lapped parts If it is necessaryto replaceany of these three parts replacethem as anassemblyonly f Remove the landing gear handle releaseretainer 26 spring 25 and plunger 23 from the manifold The end of the plungerhas a ball which should remainin the plunger If it doesnot removethe ball fromthe manifold g...

Page 318: ...EVE TRANSFERVALVE 8 O RING SLEEVE 9 DOOR SELECTORSPOOL 10 SPOOL DOOR SELECTOR 11 DOOR SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY 12 SOLENOID DOOR 13 0 RING SOLENOID 14 SPRING PLUNGER RETURN 15 PLUNGER 16 PIN 17 LANDING GEAR SELECTORSPOOL 18 O RING 19 SPOOL LANDING GEAR SELECTOR 20 O RING 21 HANDLE DETENTASSEMBLY 22 O RING 23 PLUNGER 24 O RING 25 SPRING 26 RETAINER 27 O RING 28 FITTING 29 O RING 30 BACK UP 31 NUT 32 ...

Page 319: ...emove the snap ring 96 from fitting 89 c Remove guide 95 spring 94 and poppet 93 6 64 DISASSEMBLY OF STANDPIPE FILTER Refer to Figure 6 13 a Remove the standpipe filter 99 from body 67 6 65 DISASSEMBLYOF VENT FILTER Refer to Figure 6 13 a Remove snap ring 43 and pull out filter 42 6 66 DISASSEMBLYOF DOOR VENT VALVE Refer to Figure 6 13 item 26 a Remove adjusting screw 27 from top of retainer 30 b ...

Page 320: ...eturn cam d Pull the input shaft assembly 12 from Power Pack 6 70 CLEANING INSPECTIONAND REPAIROF POWERPACK a Discardall old O ringsand gaskets b Remove the line fitting caps and wash all parts in dry cleaningsolvent Federal Specification P S 661 or equivalent and dry with filtered compressedair c Inspect all parts for scratches scores chips cracksand indicationsof excesswear d Repairs arelimited ...

Page 321: ... ASSEMBLYOF HANDPUMPCHECKVALVE Refer to Figure 6 13 item 88 a Install poppet 93 spring 94 and guide 95 into fitting 89 and securewith snap ring 96 b Lubricate threads install O ring 90 back up 91 and 0 ring 92 on the fitting 89 and install assemblyinto body 67 Torque to 55 inch pounds 6 77 ASSEMBLYOF PRIORITYVALVE Refer to Figure 6 13 item 10 a Lubricate and install the O ring 18 and the back up 1...

Page 322: ...to center stud 41 e Slide deflector plate 107 over center stud 41 f Lubricate O ring 40 and install onto center stud 41 6 82 ASSEMBLY OF MANIFOLD Refer to Figure 6 14 a Lubricate and install the 0 ring 20 on the landing gear selector spool 19 and the ring 18 into the manifold 35 at the opposite end NOTE The landing gear selector spool time delay valve plunger and manifold are matched lapped parts ...

Page 323: ...was removed from the input shaft 6 then the parts must be assembled and indexed as shown in Figure 6 15 View A b Lubricate the input shaft 6 slide detent cam 5 and gear 3 into place and secure gear 3 with roll pin 4 c Slide switch cam 1 onto input shaft 6 and secure with roll pin 2 Install assembly into Power Pack body d Install the return cam 7 and secure with roll pin 8 Check the landing gear sh...

Page 324: ...he input shaft gearas shown in Figure 6 17 With landinggear selectorspool 5 protruding 06 inches from face A of manifold 1 and the input shaft return cam 4 in the horizontal position tooth of input shaft gear 3 willmatch with toothspace in the landinggear selectorspool rack 2 d Install the four manifold attaching bolts and torque to 35 inch pounds Do not overtorque bolts as this willcausebindingof...

Page 325: ...e PowerPack a Use onlyclean hydraulic fluid per MIL H 5606 b Minimumequipment needed is as follows 1 Test unit pump and hand pump with a 2500 PSI capacity 2 One hydraulic pressuregaugeof 2500 PSIcapacity 3 One hydraulic pressuregaugeof 200 PSIcapacity c Connect the test pressure hose to the pressure inlet port of the powerPack The 2500 PSI gauge is to operate off the pressure line d Connect the su...

Page 326: ...etent position 6 88 ADJUSTMENT OF HAND PUMP RELIEF VALVE Refer to Figure 6 13 item 51 a With the input shaft in either the gear up or gear down position apply hand pump pressure very slowly until fluid flows from the hand pump relief valve CAUTION It is important that the hand pump beoperated slowlyas pressure is being increasedto bleed the hand pumprelief valve b Bleed air from the PowerPackby cr...

Page 327: ...n the Power Pack and attach the pressure hose from the hand pump with the 200 PSI pressuregaugeto the door open fitting b Slowly apply pressure to see that fluid seeps from the door vent valve c Adjust the adjusting screw 27 so that fluid flows from the vent valvefrom 0 to 100 PSI See TableVII II d Increase pressure to 150 PSI max and check to see that the door vent valve is shut off If pressure f...

Page 328: ...Removal of the gear selector mechanism can be dividedinto three individualassemblies The Solenoid Assembly The SelectorHandleAssembly and The FlexibleCable Assembly a Removalof Solenoid Assembly 1 Disconnect the two wiresleadingfrom the solenoid 13 2 Remove two locknuts securing the solenoid to the mounting block 14 and remove the solenoid b Removalof Selector HandleAssembly 1 Removestop pin 3 and...

Page 329: ... PIN 4 SAFETY WIRE 5 PLATE ASSY 6 LEVER ASSY 7 CABLE ASSY 8 BRACKET ASSY 9 POWER PACK 10 CONTROL ARM 11 BRACKET ASSY 12 PIN WASHER COTTER PIN 13 SOLENOID 14 MOUNTING BLOCK 15 PANEL ASSY 16 LIGHT ASSY 17 CABLE ATTACHMENT PIN 18 TERMINAL 19 CLAMP 20 LOCKNUT 21 FIREWALL PLATE 22 GROMMET 23 BUSHING VIEW A A Figure6 19 LandingGearSelectorMechanism Revised 2 8 82 2C10 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ...

Page 330: ...ct the solenoid wiresto their appropriate terminals 6 100 INSPECTIONOF LANDINGGEAR SELECTORHANDLEMECHANISM a Ascertain that the handle does not contact the ends of the slot in the instrument panel when moved to the extremes of its travel b Inspect and be certain there is adequate clearance between the selector gear mechanism and wiringharnesswhichruns laterallyacross the aircraft c Determine that ...

Page 331: ...6 b Pullthe plunger assemblyfrom the pump body c Slidethe scraper 17 and packinggland 15 from the plunger 13 d To remove the check ball assembly from the plunger remove the snap ring 7 in the end of the plunger and with a low charge of air injected into the hole in the side of the plunger blow the check ball 10 and seat 9 from the plunger Remove the spring 1 e To remove the check ball assemblyloca...

Page 332: ...h bolts b Connect the hydraulicpressure and suction linesto the forward end of the pump c Bleed the hand pump as described in Paragraph 6 110 and test the hand pump as described in Paragraph6 111 d Install accesspanel e Ascertainthat hydraulic reservoiris full 6 110 BLEEDINGHANDPUMP The hand pump may be purged by operatingthe pump until all air has been expelled fromthe pump Thiswillusually requir...

Page 333: ...ALL CHECK 11 SPRING 12 O RING PACKING 13 PLUNGER 14 O RING PACKING 15 GLAND PACKING 16 O RING 17 SCRAPER 18 BRACKET 19 SCREW ALLEN 20 LINK 21 LEVER 22 PIN FLAT HEAD 23 PIN FLAT HEAD 24 PIN FLAT HEAD 25 PIN COTTER 26 PIN ROLL 27 SPRING 28 SCREW 29 STOP 30 SAFETY WIRE 31 WASHER Figure6 20 Hand Pump Ozone Reissued 9 23 80 HYDRAULICSYSTEM 2C14 ...

Page 334: ...he pump body to remove the seat 3 the ball 4 and the spring 5 6 115 CLEANING INSPECTIONAND REPAIROF HANDPUMP Same as Paragraph 6 107 6 116 ASSEMBLYOF HANDPUMP Refer to Figure6 21 Lubricate all parts with oil per MIL H 5606 prior to assembly a Lubricate O ring 8 and install on seat 9 b Install spring 11 ball 10 and lubricated seat 9 into the plunger 13 and retain with snap ring 7 c Install GT ring ...

Page 335: ...PIN IS O RING 16 GLAND 17 BACK UP 18 BACK UP 19 O RING 20 SCRAPER 21 BRACKET 22 QUICK CLICK PIN 23 LINK 24 QUICK CLICK PIN 25 SCREW 26 LEVER 27 GRIP 28 ROLL PIN 29 HANDLE 30 STOP 31 ROLL PIN 32 SPRING 33 DRIVE SCREW 34 HANDLE ASSEMBLY NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 1325 Figure 6 21 Hand Pump WiebelTool Reissued 9 23 80 2C16 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ...

Page 336: ...as pressure is being increased to bleed the hand pump relief valve If the hand pump is operated rapidly damage to the valvecan occur as air permits parts to slam against each other Maximum indication of the gauge should be as indicated in Table VI II During the pumping operation the emergency hand pump should not feel spongy in either the up or down stroke e Crack door open fitting to release gaug...

Page 337: ...GEAR ACTUATING CYLINDER RIGHT 2 GEAR ACTUATING CYLINDER LEFT 3 DOOR ACTUATING CYLINDER RIGHT 4 DOOR ACTUATING CYLINDER LEFT 5 EMERGENCY HAND PUMP 6 FILTER RIGHT PUMP 7 FILTER LEFT PUMP 8 HYDRAULIC PUMP RIGHT 9 HYDRAULIC PUMP LEFT 10 POWER PACK ASSEMBLY 11 FILLER ASSEMBLY I Figure 6 22 Hydraulic System Installation Revised 10 5 83 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ...

Page 338: ...ERVICEMANUAL 1070 3 1 CYLINDER BODY 2 O RING 3 PISTON 4 O RING 5 GLAND 6 O RING 7 LOCKNUT GLAND 8 STOP 9 LOCKNUT 10 LOCK 11 LOCKNUT 12 LOCK 13 ROD END 13 Figure6 23 GearActuatingCylinder Ozone Reissued 9 23 80 HYDRAULICSYSTEM 2C19 ...

Page 339: ...oke control on the cylinder rod and installlocknut 9 and lock 10 g Install the rod end 13 locknut 11 and lock 12 on the piston rod h Adjust rod end 13 to preliminary length obtained before disassembly Before securing the locknuts of the stroke control stop and rod end with MS20995C32lock wire ascertain that the stroke control stop and rod end fitting are properly adjusted Refer to Adjustment of La...

Page 340: ...1326 NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL Figure 6 24 Gear Actuating Cylinder Wiebel Tool 2C21 Revised 10 5 83 HYDRAULICSYSTEM ...

Page 341: ...and tighten nut 11 to a torque of 85 inch pounds 6 131 INSTALLATION OF GEARACTUATING CYLINDER Sameas Paragraph6 125 6 132 GEARDOORACTUATINGCYLINDERS OZONE 6 133 REMOVALOF GEARDOORACTUATINGCYLINDERS a Withmaster switchoff actuate the hand pumphandle to bringthe geardoor down b Disconnectthe hydrauliclinesfrom the actuating cylinderandcap the open lineends to prevent contamination c Disconnectthe cy...

Page 342: ...9 O RING 10 RACE 11 WASHER 12 BALLS 13 NUT KNURLED 14 O RING 15 BACKUP RING 16 NAMEPLATE 17 BARREL 18 PLUNGER 19 O RING 20 BACKUP RING 21 SPRING 22 CLEVIS END 23 SAFETY WIRE NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 1071 Figure6 25 Gear DoorActuatingCylinder Ozone 2C23 Reissued 9 23 80 HYDRAULICSYSTEM ...

Page 343: ...nger 18 c With knurled nuts 13 on the barrel 17 install O rings 14 and back up rings 15 in grooves on barrel d Install O ring 9 and back up rings 8 in groove on piston 7 and install balls 12 in holes of piston e Insert piston into barrel Be sure that all six balls 12 are in place in the piston as the piston is inserted in the barrel f Screw the barrel 17 into the clevisend 22 Tighten the barel dow...

Page 344: ...5 SAFETYWIRE 6 PISTON 7 BALL 6 8 GT RING 9 O RING 10 BACK UP 11 NUT 12 BARREL 13 NUT 14 BACK UP 15 O RING 16 RACE 17 O RING 18 BACK UP 19 PLUNGER 20 SPRING 21 SAFETYWIRE 22 CLEVIS END 19 17 18 Figure6 26 Gear Door ActuatingCylinder WiebelTool Reissued 9 23 80 2D1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ...

Page 345: ...door actuator cylinder e Repair of most parts of the landing geardoor actuator assemblyis impractical Replacedefective parts with new parts Minor scratches and scores may be removed by polishingwith fine abrasive crocus cloth Federal Specification P C 458 providing their removaldoes not affect the operation of the actuator assembly Replace all O rings back up rings and GT ringswith new ones during...

Page 346: ...re to be tightened so that the O ring seals are on the non threaded portion of the fitting NOTE Some hydraulic lines are not interchangeable Refer to parts catalog for correct replacementpart numbers 6 146 HYDRAULIC FILTER 6 147 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC FILTER The hydraulic filter locatedon the lower right forward side of eachengine firewall is removedby the following procedure a Remo...

Page 347: ... fault and it should be removed to determine the causeof malfunction 6 151 PROCEDURE AFTER ENGINE DRIVEN HYDRAULIC PUMP FAILURE Should a pump breakage occur there may be metal particles in the hydraulic system To rectify this condition the hydraulic systemshould be flushed Proceed with the followingsteps a Replace the defective engine drivenhydraulic pump and prime it in accordance with Paragraph ...

Page 348: ...move the rear side by rocking it from side to side andslidingit from the four dowels 11 In case of sticking tap gently with a plasticor rubber hammer f Remove the four studs 14 from the rear side Remove and discard the large O ringseal 15 from the rear side Pull the drive 1 and secondary shafts 17 until drive pins 16 and 2 clear gears Removedrive pins g Remove drive gear 19 secondary gear 18 and s...

Page 349: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 1072 Figure6 28 Hydraulic Pump Reissued 9 23 80 HYDRAULICSYSTEM 2D6 ...

Page 350: ...oneanyburrsaround thegearpockets Lap the faces butdo notremovemore than0 0001 totalof metal frombothsides Lapthesurfacetoremoveany scratches If deepscratches arepresentreplacepart If deepscratchesarepresent replacesecondaryshaft Gears I Visually inspect gears for evi dence of chipped teeth or cracks around the bore Mea sure the gear O D which should be0 8562 0 8560 Visually inspect the bearing bor...

Page 351: ... probably be found that the pump is not producing its rated capacity and therefore the system may not be doing an adequate job Therefore it is necessary to repair or replace any parts that are not within the stated limits 6 155 ASSEMBLYOF HYDRAULIC PUMP Refer to Figure 6 28 The seal and seal rings should be soakedin the hydraulic MIL H 5606 fluid for two hours minimum time before installation a Re...

Page 352: ...hydraulic hosesand prime the pump before completingthe hookup to the firewall fittings in accordancewith Paragraph6 157 f Checkto be sure that system reservoircontains the required amount of clean fluid g Changesystem fluid filters in accordance with Paragraph6 148 h Check to be sure that system reservoircontains the required amount of hydraulic fluid 6 157 PRIMINGHYDRAULICPUMP The followinginstru...

Page 353: ...the pumps to the rest of the hydraulic systemuntil the systemhas been flushed 3 Proceed to flush the systemin accordancewith Paragraph64 6 159 HIGH ALTITUDEGEAR OPERATION Should it be necessary to operate the landinggear above 15 000 feet the landing gearselectormay return to its neutral position before the geardoor closingcycle is complete If this occurs manualoverride of the time delay cycle mus...

Page 354: ... Internal leakagein hand pump relief valve Adjust lever Adjust lever Refer to paragraph 6 158 Then fill the power pack with hydraulic fluid Refer to paragraph 6 158 Then check the system with hydraulic test unit or hand pump Check systemopera tion per paragraph 6 13 Check system operation per paragraph 6 14 Gear operates abnor mally slow or partially Low fluid level Refer to paragraph 6 158 Then f...

Page 355: ...fore replacingpump Selectorhandle re turns to neutral be fore cycleis complete Cable line or other obstruction restricting the travel required to fully select gear up or down Checkand remove obstruction Selectorleverand or push pullrods out of adjustment If gear completes cycle red light out but doors do not close battery output may be low Timedelay valve and or piston re leaselock out of adjustme...

Page 356: ...ose wire or mounting or bent bracket Doors come open in flight NOTE Refer to Landing Gear Troubleshooting Chart Table II 1 Doors fail to close Improper rigging of door actuator Malfunction of actuator lock mechanism Faulty limit switch Check for proper rigging Check actuator operation Check all indicator lights Low electric power supply Cannon plug on power pack loose Solenoid valve stuck in door ...

Page 357: ...rAssembly 2E7 7 17 Adjustmentof NoseGearDoor 2E7 7 18 MainLandingGearSystem 2E7 7 19 Disassemblyof MainGearOleo 2E7 7 20 Cleaning InspectionandRepairof the MainGearOleo 2E 1 7 21 Assemblyof MainGearOleo 2E 7 22 Removalof MainLandingGear 2E 1 7 23 Cleaning InspectionandRepairofthe MainLandingGear 2E12 7 24 Installationof MainLandingGear 2E12 7 25 Adjustmentof MainLandingGear 2E13 7 26 Alignmentof M...

Page 358: ... Cylinder 2F12 7 57 Removal of Brake Master Cylinder 2F12 7 58 Disassembly of Brake Master Cylinder 2F12 7 59 Cleaning Inspection and Repair of Brake Master Cylinder 2F 12 7 60 Assembly of Brake Master Cylinder 2F14 7 61 Installation of Brake Master Cylinder 2F14 7 62 Parking Brake Valve 2F14 7 63 Removal of Parking Brake Valve 2F14 7 64 Disassembly of Parking Brake Valve 2F14 7 65 Cleaning Inspec...

Page 359: ...cated on the instrument panel to the right of the gearselectorcontrol are one red and three green indicator lights The red light will show an indication when the gearis not locked in either the up or down position and the greenlights willshow when each individualgear is down and locked There is no indication light when the gear is up and locked The red light will alsoshowan indication wheneverthe ...

Page 360: ...late assembly 12 cut safety wire 10 and remove cap bolt II that attach the plate assembly 12 and aligner guide 13 to the top of the oleo cylinder f Disconnect the shimmy dampener 27 by removing the bolt assembly 28 that connects the dampener to the cylinder g Release and remove the retainer ring 10 at the top of the housing 35 and pull the complete cylinder assembly from the bottom of the housing ...

Page 361: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 1207 1 PIN RETAINER 2 BEARING UPPER 3 SPACER 28 4 O RING OUTER GASKET 5 BEARING LOWER 6 O RING INNER PACKING Reissued 9 23 80 LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM 2D18 ...

Page 362: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL Figure 7 1 Nose Gear Oleo Strut Assembly cont Reissued 9 23 80 LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM 2D19 ...

Page 363: ...k tube for corrosion scratches nicks dents and misalignment 7 Air valvegeneralcondition c Repairof the oleo is limited to smoothing out minor scratches nicksand dents and replacement of parts d Individualreplacementof wiperstrips may be achievedper paragraph7 31 NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICEMANUAL m The orifice plate 16 is removed from the bottom of the orificetube by releasingthe retainer ring 17 that ...

Page 364: ...acket 40 and steering arm 42 Torque cap bolts 37 30 35 in lbs and safety with MS20995C40 wire 44 j At the top of the oleo housing on later models as shown in Figure 7 2 install on the cylinder the aligner guide bracket 13 and the plate assembly 12 Torque cap bolts 11 50 55 in lbs and safety with MS20995C51 wire Install steering arm 8 special washers 7 sleeve 18 spring 6 washer 5 nut 4 with torque ...

Page 365: ...d with support tube 17 as one unit i To remove the support tube 17 first remove the up limit switch 15 and wire support clamps Hold the support nuts within the nose section wrench the support bolts and remove tube i The gear housing 44 and attachment plates 43 right may be removed by grinding the rivet heads flush with the plate and removing the rivets k The upper drag links 37 and 39 and attachme...

Page 366: ...with the holes in the hook 4 Bolt the hook in position and ascertain that it rotates freely and with no side play and safety e Install the uplock rod or cable 18 by attaching and securing the proper end to the uplock hook and the other end on the gear actuating cylinder support bolt f The idler link 24 may be installed by the following procedure I Align the bolt hole in the link 24 with the lug ho...

Page 367: ...OD AND DUST BOOT USED ON AIRCRAFT MODELS WITH S N 31 5001 TO 31 8252063 IN CLUSIVE CABLE ASSEMBLY USED ON AIRCRAFT MODELS WITH S N 31 8252064 AND UP Figure 7 3 Nose Landing Gear Installation Revised 10 5 83 2D24 LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM 2D24 ...

Page 368: ...I NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 1076 NOTE 14 20 207 37 o SKETCHA SKETCHB Figure 7 Nose Landing Gear Installation cont Revised 10 5 83 LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM 2E11 ...

Page 369: ...ane on jacks and gearextended disconnectboth geardoor retraction rods 40 and secure the doors in the open position b To facilitate adjustment of the uplock disconnect the lowerdraglink 41 from the landinggear oleo housing 44 c Disconnectthe actuating cylinderrod end 33 from the idler link 24 d Ascertainthat one end of the downlockspring 22 is disconnected e Rotate the drag link assemblyup by hand ...

Page 370: ...ump and adjust the rod end 33 until the attachment bolt can be freely inserted Releasepressure and extend the rod end one full turn NOTE Actuator cylinder attachment bolt must remain at the top of the attachment fitting slot duringadjustment n Reinstall attachment bolt and secure Tighten rod end locknut Figure 7 8 shows the piston rod end with installationof locknut and lock NOTE It may be necessa...

Page 371: ...IGMETHOD Fabricateajig toolconformingto specificationsgivenin Figure7 34 a Placetheairplaneonjacks RefertoJacking SectionII b Leveltheairplanelaterallyandlongitudinally c Attach the fabricated nose wheeljig to the front of the nose wheelat the axle andextend and attachaplumbbob froma pointthat is approximately20 inchesforwardalongthebottom enter rowof rivets as measuredfromthe wheelwellopening Ref...

Page 372: ...RALTO FWD 3 87 IN NEUTRALTO REAR 3 63 IN STA 65 75 NEUTRAL POSITION Figure 7 4 Clamping Rudder Pedals in Neutral Position Figure 7 5 Rudder Pedals Neutral Angle REFER TO FIGURE 7 34 FOR FABRICATED TOOL Figure 7 6 Aligning Nose Gear Revised 3 5 84 LANDINGGEARAND BRAKESYSTEM 2E5 ...

Page 373: ...omexcessiveload ing shouldbe replaced 5 Inspectend capfor signsof excessivesideloading Resultof extremesideloadingto endcap wi11beelongationor deformationof 0 375diameterthroughhole Inthisevent replaceendcap 6 InspectClamp assemblyfor distortionfromexcessiveloading conditions Check welds on clampassemblyfor developmentof anycracks 7 Checknuton clampassemblytoen surelockingfeatureis notdamagedor de...

Page 374: ...olvent b Inspect the door for cracks or bent skin loose hinge brackets and worn or corroded bearings c Check the retraction mechanism for worn down lock spring and worn or damaged surfaces d Repair to the door assembly is limited to replacing hinge bearings or rivets and mechanism parts minor skin repairs and repainting 7 16 INSTALLATIONOF NOSE GEAR DOOR ASSEMBLY a To install the door retraction m...

Page 375: ...tthebottomof theoleohousing 21 f Pullthepistontube 22 withcomponentpartsfromthe housing cylinder NOTE Prior to removingthe upperbearing 8 withretainingpins 7 fromthe pistontube 22 place a referencemark with a grease pencilfromthe upperbearingto thepistontube Thiswillensure properindexingof partsuponreassembly g The fork tube componentsmay be removedby reachingin the tube and pushingout the upper b...

Page 376: ...R 3 O RING PACKING 4 TUBE ORIFICE S PLATE ORIFICE 6 RING RETAINER 7 PIN RETAINER 8 BEARING UPPER 9 SPACER 10 O RING GASKET 11 BEARING LOWER VIEWA A Refer to following page Figure 7 8 Main Gear Oleo Strut Assembly Revised 9 24 81 2E9 LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM 2E9 ...

Page 377: ...N SERVICE MANUAL B C 11 12 13 14 15 NOTE SPECIALSHIM P N54066 00 USED ONLY IF RETAINER RINGGROOVEIN ORIFICETUBEIS 0 105 INCHWIDE Figure7 8 MainGearOleoStrutAssembly cont Revised 3 31 94 LANDINGGEARANDBRAKESYSTEM 2E10 ...

Page 378: ... Chart Section II g Servicetheoleo strut withfluidand air referto Oleo Struts Section II andsafetywith MS20995 C40 wire 39 betweenthe fillerplug 20 and cap bolt 1 h Check the gear alignment refer to Paragraph 7 26 and gear operation 7 22 REMOVAL OF MAIN LANDING GEAR Refer to Figure 7 9 a Place the airplane on jacks Refer to Jacking Section II b Remove the two access plates forward and two access p...

Page 379: ... springs 2 Check the lockhook springs for load tension belowtheminimumallowabletolerances The minimum tension for the uplock hook spring is 4 pounds and the minimum tensionfor the downlock hook spring is 7 pounds Thesechecksare performed by fasteninga fishtype scaleto theparticular hook andspring and pulling against the hook and spring to get a reading on the scale f Inspect the uplock roller for ...

Page 380: ...nlock hook 34 may be installed on the drag link assemblyby the following procedure 1 Placethe U end of the downlock spring 68 over the back of the hook 34 with the loops also toward the back 2 Spreadthe spring and fit the loops over the bushing that goesthrough the hook 3 Insert the endsof the spring into holes locatedin the downlock switch bracket 33 on each side of the drag link assembly Push th...

Page 381: ...assure that the hook is operating properly f If the hook operates properly determine proper clearance between the hook 34 and pin 62 by engaging the hook and pushing up on the side brace link assembly where the upper and lower links hinge until the hook is tight against the pin This will allow the link stops to separate Clearancebetween the stops should not exceed 0 020 of an inch If clearanceexce...

Page 382: ...SIDE BRACE LOWER 36 SIDE BRACE UPPERAFT 37 PLATE MOUNTING 38 BOLT ASSEMBLY 39 VALVE ASSEMBLY 40 HOUSING GEAR 41 SWITCH HI GEAR ONLY 42 LINK TORQUE UPPER 43 LINK TORQUE LOWRER 44 LINE BRAKE 45 STRUT ASSEMBLY 46 BRAKE ASSEMBLY 47 BRACKE T MOUNTING 48 DISC BRAKE 49 WHEEL AND TIRE 50 HINGE OUTBOARD DOOR 51 BEARING HINGE 52 DOOR OUTBOARD 53 BRACKET DOOR 54 ROD RETRACTION 55 HOSE BRAKE 56 NUT LOCK 57 WA...

Page 383: ...1 3001 TO 31 8252063 INCL CABLE ASSEMBLY USED ON AIR CRAFTWITH S N 31 8252064 AND UP 2 GEAR DOWN AND LOCKED 3 ANTI ROTATION CLIP USED WITH CABLES ONLY 35 063 TO 156 OVER CENTER SEE NOTE 2 SKETCH B Figure 7 9 Main Landing Gear Installation Left Revised 3 5 84 2E16 LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM ...

Page 384: ...he actuator NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 208 1 CYLINDER 2 STROKE STOP 3 KEY ROD END LOCK 4 KEY STROKE STOP LOCK 5 ROD END 6 LOCKNUT ROD END 7 LOCKNUT STROKE STOP 5 Pull the uplock rod or cable 14 out to its full lengthand adjust the rod or cableenduntil the attaching bolt can befreely inserted Removethe bolt and turn the rodend out one halfturn and install bolt andspacerbushing Tightenthe locknu...

Page 385: ...he forward side of the axle hubs Devisea support to hold the straightedge in position b Place a spacer block against the wheelrim at the hub line with the wideend toward the front of the wheel to check and or adjust the landinggear for proper toe in of 5 degree Refer to Figure7 1L Set a square against the straightedge and spacer block and check to see if its outstanding leg bears against the space...

Page 386: ...ings installing bolt assemblyand securing Install the actuating cylinderrod to the door b The outboard gear door is installed by aligning the hinge bracket holes with the bearings installing bolt assemblies and securing Attach the actuating rods between the door and landing gear housing 7 30 ADJUSTMENT OF MAINLANDINGGEAR DOORS a Ascertain that the main landinggear hasbeen properly adjusted b Adjus...

Page 387: ...e bevel a little longerthan needed to circlethe piston tube h Insert the new wiper strip up into the oleo housing with the tapered edgedown Slidethe retainer washer and snap ring up the piston tube and insert them into the oleo housing Using snap ring pliers to compressthe snap ring installit into the annular slot in the oleo housing i Inflate the oleo strut in accordance with instructions givenin...

Page 388: ...RNING LIGHT RIGHT MAIN GEAR DOOR LEFTMAIN GEAR DOOR L AJAR WARNING HORN NOTE REFER TO ELECTRICAL SECTION FOR SCHEMATIC OF SYSTEM NOTE AIRPLANE ON THE GROUND GEAR DOWN AND LOCKED THROTTLES BACK AND SWITCHESOFF Figure 7 12 Landing Gear Circuit Diagram Reissued 9 23 80 LANDINGGEARANDBRAKESYSTEM 2E21 ...

Page 389: ...d bottom surface of the slot in the sidebrace link Refer to Figure 7 13 3 Lower the hook allowing it to rest on the feeler gauge The end of the gauge should be even with the lock pin The switchshould not be heard to actuate 4 Again raisethe hook allowing the switch to actuate and place a 030 gauge in the slot of the side brace link 5 Lower the hook The switch should actuate allowingthe greenindica...

Page 390: ...it actuates at this point Securethe switch d Extend and then compress the strut to ascertain that the switch will actuate in the last 250 125 inch of oleo extension e Remove airplanefromjacks f Refer to Chapters 11and 14for right gear safety switch information 7 38 LANDINGGEARWARNINGSYSTEM 7 39 REMOVALOF GEAR WARNING SWITCHES Refer to Figure 7 14 Thegear warningswitches are located within the cont...

Page 391: ...2E24 INTENTIONALLYLEFT BLANK ...

Page 392: ...ER RIGHT THROTTLE 3 ACTUATOR LEFT THROTTLE 4 ACTUATOR RIGHT THROTTLE 5 SCREW ADJUSTMENT 6 BRACKET MOUNTING 7 SCREW ADJUSTMENT BRACKET MOUNTING 9 SWITCH HORN 10 SPACER BLOCK 11 SWITCH HORN 12 SPACER BLOCK 13 SPRING TENSION Figure 7 14 Gear Warning Switches Installation Reissued 9 23 80 LANDINGGEARANDBRAKESYSTEM 2F1 ...

Page 393: ...smay be installed on their mounting brackets by the followingprocedure 1 Connect the electrical leads to their respectiveswitchterminals Refer to Electrical System Schematic Section XI for wireinstallation 2 Place the switch and spacer block in its mounting bracket and install attachment screws It will be necessary to swing the bracket of the other switch and spacer block forward to install the at...

Page 394: ...NOSE WHEEL ASSEMBLY AND SERIAL NUMBER EFFECTIVITY Figure 7 15 Nose Wheel Assembly 1087 NOTE ON 40 141 ASSEMBLY ONLY 1 WHEEL HALF OUTER 2 WHEEL HALF INNER 3 SPACER 4 BRAKE DISC 5 CUP BEARING 6 CONE BEARING 7 RETAINER GREASE SEAL 8 GREASE SEAL 9 SNAP RING 10 BOLT 11 WASHER 12 NUT 13 SNAP RING 14 HUBCAP Figure 7 16 Main Wheel Assembly Cleveland Revised 3 11 81 LANDING GEARAND BRAKESYSTEM 2F3 ...

Page 395: ...e wheelassembly c Flex the fork enough to remove the wheel spacers and to allow the wheel to clear the fork assembly d The wheelhalves and 2 may be separated by removingthe valvecore and completely deflating the tire Break tire bead from wheel by usinga mallet Remove the wheelthrough bolts 3 Pull the wheel halvesfrom the tire by removingthe wheel half opposite the valvestem first and then the othe...

Page 396: ...ESERVOIR ASSEMBLY 4 MASTER CYLINDER RIGHT 5 MASTER CYLINDER LEFT 6 VALVE PARKING BRAKE 7 HANDLE PARKING BRAKE 8 LINK FUSELAGE 9 HOSE FLEXIBLE 10 LINK GEAR 11 BRAKE ASSEMBLY Figure 7 17 Brake Installation Typical Reissued 9 23 80 LANDINGGEARANDBRAKESYSTEM 2F5 ...

Page 397: ...heel through bolts 10 Separate the wheel halvesfrom the tire by removingthe wheelhalf opposite the valvestem first and then the other half CAUTION Do not pry between the wheel flange and tire bead with sharp tools as this could damagethe wheeland tire f Remove the bearingcone 6 by removingsnap ring 9 securingthe greaseseal 8 and seal retainers 7 The bearing cup 5 should be removed only for replace...

Page 398: ...ted if the parts have been repaired and thoroughly cleaned Paint exposedareas with one coat zinc chromate primer and one coat of aluminum lacquer NOTE Neverpaint workingsurfacesof the bearingcups a BearingCupReplacement 1 Removal a Insert wheel half into boiling water for 15 minutes or place in an ovennot exceeding 250 F 121 C for 15 minutes b Remove from source of heat and invert wheel half If th...

Page 399: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL Figure 7 20 Wheel Brake Assembly Cleveland30 95and 30 95a Reissued 9 23 80 LANDINGGEAR ANDBRAKESYSTEM 2F8 ...

Page 400: ...clearance is necessary as they are self adjusting Inspection of the lining is necessary and it may be inspected visually while installed on the airplane The linings are of the bonded type and need not be replaced until the thickness of any one segmentbecomesworn to 100 of an inch or unevenly worn 7 53 REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY OF WHEEL BRAKEASSEMBLY Referto Figure7 19 7 20 or 7 21 a To remove the br...

Page 401: ...EFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 212 PRESS ANCHORBOLT HOLDINGFIXTURE STEP A CYLINDER BOLT HOLDII FIXTUI BODY HOLDING FIXTURE STEPB STEPC CYLINDERBODY STEPD Figure 7 22 Removaland Installation of Anchor Bolts Reissued 9 23 80 LANDING GEARANDBRAKESYSTEM 2F10 ...

Page 402: ...lean the assembly with denatured alcohol and dry thoroughly b Check the walls of the cylinder housing and pistons for scratches burrs corrosion etc that may damage O rings c Check the general condition of the bleeder screw and lines d Check anchor bolts for wear e Lining may be removed from a backing plate by inserting a sharp tool between the lining and plate Press new lining on the backing plate...

Page 403: ...of Figure7 19or Figure 7 20 Assembliesfallingoutside the limitsnoted should be removed and rechecked for lining and brake disc minimum thickness The wheel should rotate freely if bindingoccurs check axle nut to insure proper seating If rubbing occurs check back plate assemblyand pressure plate assemblyliningsto be sure that liningsare fully seated h Connect the brake line to the housing and bleed ...

Page 404: ...RING 6 NUT 7 WASHER 8 BUSHING 9 SPRING 10 O RING 11 O RING 12 O RING 13 CAM 14 STUD 15 SWIVEL 16 LEVER 17 WASHER 18 NUT 19 COTTER PIN 14 Figure 7 24 Parking Brake Valve Assembly 216 FROM PRESSURE POT Figure 7 25 Bleeding Brake Typical Reissued 9 23 80 LANDINGGEARAND BRAKESYSTEM 2F13 ...

Page 405: ...Disconnect the fluid lines from the valve c Remove the screwsthat attach the valveto its mounting bracket d Placea protective material overthe line openingsto prevent contamination of the system 7 64 DISASSEMBLY OF PARKING BRAKE VALVE Refer to Figure 7 24 a Remove the two fittings 2 from the outside of the valve body 1 A valvespring 3 is held in placeby the fittings Usecaution not to loosen these ...

Page 406: ...ned whether any air remains in the system If air bubbles are evident fillingof the systemshall be continued until all of the air is out of the system and a steady flow of fluid is obtained d Tightenbleeder fitting and removethe hose Checkbrakesfor proper pedal pressure e Repeatthis procedure on the other gear f Drainexcessfluid from reservoirto fluid levelline with a syringe 7 69 WHEELS GOODYEAR 7...

Page 407: ...essary Refer to Paragraph 7 72 for removal procedures if replacement is required 7 71 CLEANINGAND INSPECTIONOF MAINWHEELASSEMBLY a Remove dirt and grease with a quick drying cleaning solvent Federal Specification P D 680 Stoddard solvent A soft bristle brush may be used to removehardened grease dust or dirt CAUTION Quick drying cleaning solvents are toxic and volatile Use in a well ventilated area...

Page 408: ... two threads adjacent to the bolt shank Replacecracked bolts NOTE No refinishingof bolts is permissible k Check self lockingnuts 16 for self lockingfeature Replaceif nut can be turned onto bolt with finger pressure 1 Inspect keyway liners 12 on inboard wheel sub assembly 6 for wear If distance between surfaces of liners across any tang slot of inboard wheel sub assemblyexceeds 0 620 of an inch dri...

Page 409: ...by the drill Avoid enlargingrivet holes in wheel flange b Punch out the rivet shank and removethe slot shield 13 and keywayliner 12 NOTE Inspect area under keywayliner for corrosion Blend out corrosion pits to 0 010 of an inch deep and retreat reworked areas in accordance with paragraph 7 73 a 2 Installation a Position the new liner 12 on the inboard wheel sub assemblywith the tab extension on end...

Page 410: ...ssembly 5 and insert the valvethrough the valvehole f Position the inboard wheel sub assembly 6 in the tire and alignthe bolt holeswith thosein the outboard wheel sub assembly 5 g Install the countersunk washers 11 on the bolts 10 with the washer countersink facing the bolt head Install the bolt with washer through the inboard sub assembly 6 and outboard sub assembly 5 h Install the flat washer 15...

Page 411: ...ing careful that the seal is properly seated against the bearing cup 7 CAUTION Exercise care when installing the wheel assembly on the airplane so asnot to damagethe bearingconesand bearingseal n Install the axle nut and adjust the bearing For proper seating of the bearings rotate the wheel while adjustingthe axle nuts Upon completion safety axle nuts and installhubcap 7 74 BRAKES GOODYEAR 7 75 DE...

Page 412: ...BACK 6 DISC ROTATING 7 DISC STATIONARY 8 PLATE PRESSURE 9 INSULATOR PISTON 10 PISTON 11 O RING PACKING 12 VALVE BLEEDER 13 ADAPTER BLEEDER 14 O RING PACKING 15 HOUSING 16 SHIELD SNOW 17 TUBE TORQUE I87 WEAR PAD 19 RIVET Figure 7 27 Wheel Brake Assembly Reissued 9 23 80 LANDINGGEARANDBRAKESYSTEM 2F21 ...

Page 413: ...to Figure 7 27 a Place the airplane on jacks Refer to Jacking Section II b Remove the main wheel assembly in accordance with paragraph 7 70 c Disconnect and cap the hydraulicbrakelineat the brake assemblyandremovethesix boltssecuring the brake assembly to the landing gear strut d Place the brake assembly with the housing down on a clean flat surface e Remove the six self lockingnuts 2 bolts 3 and ...

Page 414: ...o snow shieldasshownabove Pilotdrill andcut slotsas required No specialtools required 3 Metal stamp R5000086 in 0 12 inch characters as shown above 4 Touch upslotswith Aluminum LacquerSpecificationTT L 32 5 Reassemblebrakeassemblyper paragraph 7 80 Figure 7 28 Snow Shield Modification Reissued 9 23 80 LANDINGGEARAND BRAKESYSTEM NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 2F23 ...

Page 415: ...ea Do not inhale the vapors and avoid contact with skin or clothing b Clean the rotating disc 6 with compressedair and a soft wire or stiff bristle brush c Clean piston insulators 9 with denatured alcohol Dry with compressedair or a cleancloth NOTE New O ring packings should be installed at each overhaul If the packings must be reused they should be cleaned with denatured alcohol and dried with a ...

Page 416: ...ce NOTE As much as 25 percent of mix may be lost through chipping provided the mix loss is scattered Refer to Figure 7 32 Dishingof discsin excessof 0 030 inch Discswhichare 0 125 inch or more out of round Battered tangswhich are lessthan 0 615 inch in width Shrunken discswith an insidediameter of less thart 7 79 inches Replace Replace Replace Replace PressurePlate 8 Key slotcorers cracked Replace...

Page 417: ... 0 640 inch Replace Dished 0 030 inch or more Out of round 0 120 inch or more Replace plate Replace plate Torque Tube 17 Cracked torque tube Replace Key width is 0 545 inch or lessat any point on key Replace Brake Housing 15 Cracked housing Replace Stripped or badly damagedthreads in inlet and bleeder bosses Cylinder cavitiesworn in excessof 1 380 inches in diameter Replace Replace Nicks scratches...

Page 418: ...han 0 003 accordance with paragraph 7 79 inch can be repaired in Stationary Disc 7 Crackedrelief slot terminal holesand key slotcorners Replace Disc worn to 0 130 inch or less Disc dished in excess of 0 030 inch Insidediameter of disc interferes with torque tube Key slotsworn and battered to lessthan 0 590 inch or greater than 0 640 inch in width Insidediameter of disc to 7 10 inches or less measu...

Page 419: ...ge cracks under head and in threads adjacent to bolt shank and bent bolts Replace Insulators 9 Smallblistersnot ex ceeding0 010 inch Grind OFF Worn to 0 385 inch or lessin thickness BRAKEPARTSTOLERANCES Replace PARTS NEW STATIONARYDISC ROTATINGDISC INSULATORS PRESSUREPLATEASSY BACKPLATEASSY 156 174 414 PA 31 350 MIN THICKNESS 130 127 385 225 090 NOTE Refer to Service Manual for detailed service in...

Page 420: ...NUAL 275 CURLING Figure 7 30 Wear Pad Wear Limits 0 105 MAX 0 095 MIN 276 0 251 MAX 0 247 MIN PRESSUREPLATE BACK PLATE Figure 7 31 Limits For Repadded Pressure and Back Plates Reissued 9 23 80 LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM 2G5 ...

Page 421: ...F MIX MISSING SEE NOTE STILL SERVICEABLE LESS THAN 25 OF MIX MISSING SEE NOTE NOTE AS MUCH AS 25 OF MIX MAYBE LOST THROUGH CHIPPING PROVIDED MIX LOSS IS SCATTERED Figure 7 32 Brake Disc Visual Check For Serviceable Limits Reissued 9 23 80 LANDING GEARANDBRAKESYSTEM 2G6 ...

Page 422: ...ds is desirable It should be determined that a force of not less than 2 pounds or more than 100 pounds is required to causemovement of pad A maximum of one crack is permitted in the shop head of a tubular rivet but it must not extend into the rivet shank To check rivets that appear unseated insert a 0 0015 inch feeler gauge between the discand the pad It should not slidepast the rivet 4 After repa...

Page 423: ...h filtered dried compressedair 2 Re treat reworked areaswith DowNo 1solution MIL M 3171 Type I 3 Repaint reworked areas with two coats of zinc chromate primer SpecificationMIL P 8585 and two coats of aluminumlacquer SpecificationTT L 32 7 80 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION OF BRAKE ASSEMBLY Refer to Figure 7 27 a Lubricate the piston O ring packing 11 piston cylinder walls and cylindercontacting surface...

Page 424: ...tating disc 6 overthe torque tube 1 Install the stationary disc 7 on the torque tube with torque tube keys in key slots in the disc Place the secondrotating disc 6 on the stationary disc 7 m Install the back plate 5 with wear pads down on the torque tube with bolts through bolt holes in the back plate n Install self locking nuts 2 on brake bolts 3 Draw nuts up evenly and torque to 120 inch pounds ...

Page 425: ...lacesafety switch Gearretracts or ex tends before the doors open Priority valveleaksin power pack Solenoidvalvestuck in closed position Check priority valve crackingpressure Turn off power and hand pump doors open Microswitch on power pack out of adjustment Checkfor bent bracket or loosemounting or wireand adjust NOTE With power off solenoid valve shuttles to door open and the doors may be opened ...

Page 426: ...e Powerpakmicroswitchout Adjust or replaceswitch of adjustment or faulty Nosegear failsto Not enough actuator Increasethe actuator lock up whenhandle stroke stroke returns to neutral Geardoors pinching Relievedoor pinch by lengtheningdoor oper ating rods Maingear fail to Uplock rod out of Adjust rod lock up adjustment Actuator out of adjust Adjust actuator ment Nored light on panel Circuit breaker...

Page 427: ... one or both enginesis above 15 inchesof manifoldpressure Red indicator light stays on with gear up and locked Flashingred light and warninghorn fail to operate when power from both enginesis reduced below 14 or 15 inchesmanifold pressure Throttle switchesare faulty Throttle switchesout of adjustment Doorscould be open Switchdefective Throttle switchesout of adjustment Throttle switchesare defecti...

Page 428: ...s and or bushings Replacebolts and or bushings Mainlandinggear shimmiesduringfast taxi take off and landing Tire out of balance Wornor loosewheel bearings Checkbalanceand re placetire if necessary Replaceand or adjust wheelbearings Worntorque linkbolts and or bushings Replacebolts and or bushings Strut bottoms on normal landingor when taxiingover rough ground Excessiveor uneven wear on main tires ...

Page 429: ...on main tires cont Nosegear failsto steer properly Wheelout of alignment toe in or toe out Oleocylinder binding in strut housing Check wheelalignment Lubricate strut hous ing One brake dragging Steeringarm roller sheared at top of strut Determine causeand correct Replace defectiveroller Reissued 9 23 80 LANDINGGEARAND BRAKESYSTEM 2G14 ...

Page 430: ... 48 50 AND POLISH CONTOUR AREA FREE OF TOOL MARKS 5 TO 10 RMS AFTER HND 3 SERVICE GY1SA GY1BB RIVETS SEMI TUBULAR RIVETS 4 EDGE OF FORMING TOOL MUST BE ON CENTER LINE OF PEEN AS SHOWN WHEN FORMING CONTOUR OF PEEN TOOL NO ST1 71219 SEE NOTE 4 NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL DIA 0 001 0 000 ROUND HEAD RIVET DRIVER 5T1 25310 VIEW A SWAGING PEEN 5T1 71219 Figure 7 33 Fabricated Rivet Tools Goodyear Only ...

Page 431: ...SPRING 2 375 31 0 SCRIBELINES AS SHOWN 31 20 OR 10x 125 x90 STRAP 125R 22 0 25 8 75 NOTE THE PA 23 CHECKINGTOOL MAY BE MODIFIED TO THESE DIMENSIONS BY EXTENDING THE DEGREEANGLE ON THE TOOL PLATE Figure 7 34 Fabricated Tool Checking Nose Wheel Alignment Reissued 9 23 80 2G16 LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM ...

Page 432: ... 875 x 095 x 9 188 TUBE 125 x 3 50 x 24 71 PLATE NOTE IT IS IMPORTANT THAT CENTERLINE ACCURACY BE USED WHEN LOCATING HOLES FORINSTALLATION OF BUSHING SIGHT SLOT AND ELONGATED HOLE 875 x 095 x 625 TUBE Figure 7 35 Fabricated Tool Checking Nose Gear Link Travel Reissued 9 23 80 LANDINGGEARAND BRAKESYSTEM 2G17 ...

Page 433: ... 0 x 1 0 ROD NOTE IT IS IMPORTANTTHAT CENTERLINE ACCURACYBE USED WHEN LOCATING HOLES FORINSTALLATION OF BUSHING SIGHT SLOT AND ELONGATED HOLE Figure 7 36 Fabricated Tool Checking Main Gear Side Brace Link Travel Figure 7 36 Fabricated Tool Checking Main Gear Side Brace Link Travel Reissued 9 23 80 LANDING GEARANDBRAKESYSTEM 2G18 ...

Page 434: ...FTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 218 TOP 11 56 NOTE MARK LARGE END FORWARD SIDE MATERIAL HARDWOOD 1 10 x 1 x 11 56 Figure 7 37 Fabricated Tool Checking Main Gear Toe in Adjustment Reissued 9 23 80 2G19 LANDINGGEAR AND BRAKESYSTEM ...

Page 435: ...4 NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICE MANUAL Figure7 38 NoseGearWearLimits Revised 3 31 94 LANDINGGEAR ANDBRAKESYSTEM 2G20 ...

Page 436: ...ing Upper Drag Link L R Both ends Bolt Drag Link Top L R Bushing Drag Link Plate L R Mfg Dimension 0 5625 0 0015 0 0000 0 5670 0 0000 0 0040 0 5625 0 0015 0 0000 0 4375 0 0015 0 0000 0 4367 0 0000 0 0005 0 4375 0 0015 0 0000 0 4367 0 0000 0 0005 0 4375 0 0015 0 0000 0 4367 0 0000 0 0005 0 4375 0 0015 0 0000 Min Service Limit 0 5625 0 5570 0 5625 0 4375 0 4350 0 4375 0 4355 0 4375 0 4350 0 4375 Max...

Page 437: ...ork TorqueLink Attachment Bushing Cylinder Torque Link Attachment Bearing Oleo Strut Lower Bearing Oleo Strut Lower 0 3125 0 0015 0 0000 0 3117 0 0000 0 0005 0 3130 0 0020 0 0000 0 3125 0 0015 0 0000 2 369 0 0030 0 0000 2 372 0 0040 0 000 0 3125 0 3140 0 3105 0 3117 0 3130 0 3160 0 3125 0 3160 2 369 2 372 2 372 2 376 10 31799 Bearing Oleo Strut Upper 2 3730 0 0000 0 0020 Chrome Plate Worn Thru 2 3...

Page 438: ...9 NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICE MANUAL 11 13 I 7 39 Main Gear WearLimit Revised 3 31 94 LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM 2G23 ...

Page 439: ... Joint Bushing L R Side Brace Link LowerEnd Bushing Aft SideBrace UpperEnd Bolt Aft SideBrace UpperEnd AN178maybe usedto reduceplay Mfg Dimension 0 6245 0 0015 0 0000 0 6 240 0 0000 0 0040 0 6250 0 0015 0 0000 0 4990 0 0010 0 0000 0 4991 0 0000 0 0005 0 5000 0 0015 0 0000 0 4991 0 0000 0 0005 0 5000 0 0015 0 0000 0 5000 0 0015 0 0000 0 4990 0 0000 0 0040 Min Service Limit 0 6245 0 6190 0 6250 0 49...

Page 440: ...achment 0 3740 0 0020 0 0000 0 3745 Ream at install if req 0 3775 5 AN176 42 Bolt Torque Link to Housing 7 NAS75 6 011 Bushing Torque Link 8 NAS75 7 011 Bushing Torque Link 9 NAS77 7 35 Center 0 3742 0 0000 0 0005 0 3750 0 0015 0 0000 0 4375 0 0015 0 0000 0 3732 0 3742 0 3750 0 3775 0 4375 0 4400 10 AN7 22 Bolt Torque Link Center AN177may be used to reduce play 0 4370 0 0000 0 0040 0 4330 0 4370 1...

Page 441: ...001thru 31 81036 Bearing Oleo Strut Bottom Ser No s 31 81037andup 2 750 0 002 0 000 2 750 0 002 0 000 2 750 2 753 2 750 2 753 13 40247 0 40247 2 Bearing Oleo Strut Top Unnotched Bearing Oleo Strut Top Notched 3 2480 0 000 0 002 3 2480 0 000 0 002 Chrome Plate Worn Thru 3 2480 3 40327 Housing Assembly Cylinder Bore 3 2500 0 003 0 000 3 2500 3 2545 Figure7 39 MainGearWearLimits cont Revised 3 31 94 ...

Page 442: ...ly Rigging and Adjustment of Cowl Flap Position Sender ler Removal of Propeller Cleaning Inspection and Repair of Propeller Installation of Propeller Adjustment of Low Pitch Blade Angle and Stop Blade Track ler Governor Removal of Propeller Governor Installation of Propeller Governor Rigging and Adjustment of Propeller Governor Removal of Engine Installation of Engine Shock Mounts Replacing Engine...

Page 443: ... 65 Adjustment of Idle Speed and Mixture 2111 8 66 Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle 2111 8 67 Removal of Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle 2111 8 68 Cleaning and Inspection of Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle 2111 8 69 Installation of Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle 2112 8 70 Ignition System Maintenance 2112 8 71 Magneto 2112 8 72 Description and Principle of Operation 2112 8 73 Inspection of Magneto 2112 8 74 Magneto Installation and Timin...

Page 444: ...omplished by compressedair The inductionsystemconsistsof a dry typeair filter an alternateairdoor aBendixRSA IOEDI type fuel injector and a Lear Sieglerfuel supplypumpas an integralpart of the fuelinjectorsystem An AiResearch modelTH08A60turbochargeris mountedas an integralpart of the engine Automaticwastegate controlof theturbochargerprovidesconstantairdensityat thefuelinjectorinletfromsealevelto...

Page 445: ...rkis doneon theengine eitheron or off the aircraft Suitableprotectivecaps plugsandcoversmustbe usedto protectall openingsas theyare exposed NOTE Dust caps used to protectopen lines must alwaysbe installed OVERthe tubeends and NOTIN the tube ends Flowthrough the lines may be blockedoff if lines areinadvertentlyinstalled withadust capin thetubeends d Shouldanyitemsbedroppedintotheengine theassemblyp...

Page 446: ...ted to two 2 minutes or cylinderhead temperature of 450 F whichever is reached first Prolong ground runningwiththe cowlingremovedcouldcauselocalhot spotsin thecylindersandirreversibleenginedamage 8 7 CLEANING INSPECTION ANDREPAIR a Thecowlingshouldbecleanedwitha suitablesolventandthen wipedwithacleancloth b Inspectthe cowlingfor dents cracks looserivets damagedor missingfastenersanddamagedfiber gl...

Page 447: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICE MANUAL ...

Page 448: ...27should be applied to the screwon Dukes transmission h When the transmission assembly is disassembled for any reason or at 500 hours the Dukes transmissionshould be repacked 3 4 minimum full with Dukes Formula No 2 P N 2196 74 1grease 8 12 INSTALLATIONOF COWLFLAPTRANSMISSION Refer to Figure8 2 a Install the torque tube 11 with bearing blocks 14 Tighten the bearing block bolts after the tube and b...

Page 449: ... clockwisedirection to its stop position e Turn on the master switch A minimum of 24 volts must be supplied to the electricalsystem when making this adjustment f Rotate the sender shaft slowly counterclockwise when viewedfrom the shaft end until the flap indicator on the instrument panel reads flapclosed Tighten the arm on the sendershaft g Operate the flap to the open and close positions and obse...

Page 450: ... allowed by the pitch change mechanism If they appear tight and are properly lubricated the pitch change mechanism should be checked further i Greaseblade hub through zerk fittings Remove one of the two fittings for each propellerblade alternate the next time Apply greasethrough the zerk fitting until fresh greaseappears at the fitting hole of the removed fitting Care should be taken to avoidblowi...

Page 451: ... BOLT 4 COUNTERWEIGHT 5 PROPELLER DOME 6 SCREW CAPATTACHMENT 7 CAP SPINNER 8 SAFETY WIRE 9 CHECKNUT SPINNER 10 CAP AIRVALVE 11 AIRVALVE 12 LOWPITCH ADJUSTMENT 13 GREASE FITTING 14 BALANCE WEIGHT 7 10 2 4 12 11 Figure 8 3 PropellerInstallation Reissued 9 23 80 POWERPLANT 2H12 ...

Page 452: ...ws Low Pitch CheckNut 2575 RPMMax Required Torque Dry 22 foot pounds 60 foot pounds 35 40 foot pounds 40 inch pounds 35 40 foot pounds CHAMBERPRESSUREREQUIREMENTS WITHTEMPERATURE Without Feather AssistSpringAssembly With Feather AssistSpringAssembly Temp F Press psi 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 86 84 82 80 78 76 74 Temp F 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 Press psi 72 70 68 66 64 62 60 70 to 100 40 to 70 0 to 40 30 to...

Page 453: ... adjusted for proper blade angle If however this adjustment has been disturbed the following procedure is given for obtaining blade angle 1 The blade angle Refer to Table VIII I is determined by placing a propeller protractor on the face side of the propeller at the 30 inch station as measured from the hub centerline The blade must be horizontal 2 The low pitch stop adjustment is made by a screw i...

Page 454: ... and check that lines are not separated more than 062 inch c Propellershavingexcessblade track should be removedand inspected for bent blades or for parts of sheared O ring or foreign particles whichhave lodgedbetween hub and crankshaft mounting faces Bent bladeswill require repair and overhaul of assembly 8 23 PROPELLERGOVERNOR 8 24 REMOVAL OF PROPELLER GOVERNOR a Remove the upper engine cowl per...

Page 455: ...setting should be adjusted as follows 1 Shut down the engine and removethe upper enginecowl 2 Adjust the governor by means of the fine adjustment screw 2 for 2575 RPM To do this loosen the high RPMfine adjustment screw locknut and turn the screwin aclockwisedirection to decrease enginespeed or in a counterclockwisedirection to increaseenginespeed NOTE One revolution of the fine adjustment screw wi...

Page 456: ...ted on the right lowerside of the enginemount Disconnect the field wire i Disconnect the electrical leads to the oil temperature sender at the accessory housing the cylinder head temperature probe at the number six cylinderand the exhaust temperature at the aft side of the exhaust manifold j Disconnect the magneto ground leads and the retard spark lead of the left magneto at the magneto k Disconne...

Page 457: ...nifold m Connect the alternator primary cable to the filter box located on the lower right side engine mount Connect the field wire n Route the starter cable through the lower side of the left aft engine baffle and attach the cable end to the starter Securecablewith clampsat the enginemount and the engine o Ascertainthat the magneto switchesare off and install the propeller per paragraph 8 20 p In...

Page 458: ...foot pounds 8 32 INSTALLATION OF OIL COOLER a When installing fittings in the oil coolers care should be used to prevent excessive torque being applied to the cooler When a rectangular fitting boss is provided backup wrench should be used employing a scissor motion so that no load is transmitted to the cooler When the oil cooler has a round fitting boss care should be taken not to permit excessive...

Page 459: ...ion TERM MEANING Supercharge To increase the air pressure density above or higher than ambient conditions Supercharger A device that accomplishes the increase in pressure Turbo supercharger More commonly referred to as a Turbocharger this device is driven bya turbine The turbine is spun by energy extracted from the engine exhaust gas Compressor Turbine The portion of a turbocharger that takes inam...

Page 460: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL NOTE Torque nuts on AN6 41A attaching theengine mountto thefirwall 13to 16 foot pounds Figure 8 6 Engine Installation Revised 3 31 94 POWER PLANT 2H21 ...

Page 461: ...RESSOR ASSEMBLY 16 EXHAUST TAIL PIPE UPPER 17 SHAFT TACHOMETER 18 THERMOCOUPLE 19 TAIL PIPE BOTTOM 20 HOSE INTAKE PRESSURE PUMP 21 EXHAUST PLENUM 22 EXHAUST STACK EXTENSION L 23 COOLER OIL 24 MAGNETO ASSEMBLY 25 TUBE BREATHER 26 TUBE MAGNETO COOLING 27 DRAIN ENGINE SUMP 28 EXHAUST STACK LEFT 29 PIPE INTAKE 30 SPARK PLUG 31 NOZZLE INJECTOR 32 TUBE AIR BLEED 33 BOLT 34 BUSHING 35 SHOCK MOUNT GOLD CO...

Page 462: ...critical altitude will be seen Differential Pressure Controller Ground Boosted or Ground Turbocharged Deck Pressure Manifold Pressure Normalizing Reissued 9 23 80 This controller uses a diaphragm rather than a bellows as is found in the density controller It is used in conjunction with the density controller Its function is to override the density controller so that the compressor discharge pressu...

Page 463: ...system in this position and proceed to install couplings around flange and engage latch Tighten coupling nut to 50 inch pounds initial torque Tap outer periphery of coupling with mallet to distribute band tension Check torque and continue tightening to a final torque of 70 80 inch pounds Tappping coupling until torque reading stabilizes 2 With the flanges together position the coupling over the fl...

Page 464: ... were encountered it would theoretically run continuously It would also be very unstable because if for some reason the turbo speed would change the compressor would pump more air to drive the turbine faster etc A turbocharged engine above critical altitude wastegate closed is similar to the example mentioned above except now there is an engine placed between the compressor discharge and turbine i...

Page 465: ...exhaust extension and from the airplane f For service maintenance and overhaul of the turbocharger refer to the manufacturer s recommended instructions 1 Remove the tailpipe assembly by disconnecting it at the exhaust plenum and the turbine discharge 2 Disconnect the linesfrom the by passvalveactuator 3 Disconnect the by passvalvefrom the exhaust plenum e The exhaust plenum may be removedby the fo...

Page 466: ...e compressorinlet and the exhaust to the turbine discharge 4 Connect the oil supply and return linesto the center section of the turbo d Install the engine cowling Refer to Paragraph 8 8 8 38 ADJUSTMENT OF TURBOCHARGER It is recommendedthat adjustmentsofthe turbocharger be conducted byan authorized overhaulfacility inaccordancewiththe latestrevisionof Avco LycomingService Instruction No 1187 8 39 ...

Page 467: ... Refer to Figure 8 8 The butterfly valve in the exhaust wastegate assembly is set to a predetermined open and closed clearance A table of these clearances is given in Figure 8 8 for the specific engine being worked on With 50 60 psi pressure in the wastegate cylinder adjust the closed position A of the valve so that clearance between the butterfly and side of housing is in accordance with specific...

Page 468: ... ACTUATOR DRAIN FLOW THE BUILD UP OF OIL PRESSURE IN THE ACTUATOR CAUSESTHE PISTON TO MOVETHEWASTEGATETOWARD THECLOSED POSITION ASTHEWASTE GATECLOSES MOREEXHAUST GASES ARE DIVERTEDINTO THE TURBINE CAUSINGTHESHAFTTO INCREASE IN SPEED INCREASING THECOMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE NOTE1 SPRING TENSION HOLDS WASTEGATE OPEN ENGINE OILPRESSURE AGAINST DIAPHRAGM CLOSES WASTE GATE OIL PRESSURE DECREASED ORI...

Page 469: ...099 INCL MVT68049 450M 46 55 IN LBS 31 8152100 AND UP NH1000897 50 SEESKETCHA AND NOTE SKETCH A NOTE POSITION COUPLING AS SHOWNAND TORQUETO 40 IN LB DRY TORQUE 10 18276 225M COUPLING 80 90 IN LBS COUPLING V BAND BYPASS VALVE TAIL PIPE WASTE GATE COMPRESSORDISCHARGE HOUSING HOSECLAMPS AND HOSE FUEL INJECTOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESS CONTROLLER DENSITY CONTROLLER EXHAUST BYPASSVALVE WASTEGATE ACTUATOR HOSE...

Page 470: ...ngprocedure a Disconnect the oil inlet and outlet lines from the turbocharger and allow all oil to drain b Cap the oil outlet port on the turbocharger c Pour the MouseMilkinto theoilinlet portof theturbocharger andallowthe unitto soak overnight d Drain all Mouse Milk from the turbocharger and flush the unit with engine oil e Prime the turbocharger in accordance with Paragraph 8 36 8 53 INDUCTION S...

Page 471: ...te air door is incorporated in the inductionair tube between the air filterand theturbocharger compressorinlet Thepurpose ofthe door isto provideasourceof airshould there be an air stoppage through the filter The followingshould be checked during inspection a Door seal must fit flush with interior of duct opening b Actuate the door to determine that it is not sticking or binding c A minimum of a 9...

Page 472: ...nnection with the throttle and manualmixturecontrol leversshould be checked for freedomof movementand lubricated if necessary b Place a drop of enginegrade oil on the endof the throttle shaft insuch a manner that it can work into the throttle shaft bushings 8 61 REMOVAL OF FUEL INJECTOR a Removethe lowercowl panel as described in paragraph 8 6 b Disconnectthe throttle and mixture control cables at...

Page 473: ...g case Packa one half pound bagof silicagel crystals in the dustproof container with injector The bag must not touch the injector CAUTION Extreme caution should be exercised when handling or working around the injector to prevent oil or fuel from entering the air sections of the injector Asexplained previously damageto the air diaphragm will result Fluid can easily enter the airsection of the inje...

Page 474: ... Idle Cut Off position and observe the tachometer for any change during the leaning process Caution must be exercised to return the mixture control to the Full Rich position before the RPMcan drop to a point where the engine cuts out An increaseof more than 50 RPMwhile leaning out indicatesan excessivelyrich idle mixture An immediatedecreasein RPM if not precededby a momentary increase indicates t...

Page 475: ...er switch depressed the right side of the magneto is grounded and rendered inoperative while left side of the magneto with retard breaker continues to function At the slow cranking speedof the enginethe vibrator providesthe highenergyspark necessaryto fire the spark plugs The vibrator providesinterrupted battery current to the primary coil of the magneto The pulsating DC current is then stepped up...

Page 476: ...tributor Block Tower 223 NORMAL POINT IS SMOOTH AND FLAT SURFACE HAS DULL GRAY SANDBLASTED APPEARANCE MINOR IRREGULARITIES SMOOTH ROLLING HILLS AND DALES WITHOUT ANY DEEP PITS OR HIGH PEAKS THIS IS A NORMAL CON DITION OF POINT WEAR WELL DEFINED MOUND EXTENDING NOTICEABLY ABOVE SURROUNDING SURFACE REJECTPOINTS Figure 8 13 Contact Points Reissued 9 23 80 POWER PLANT 2113 ...

Page 477: ...7 NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICE MANUAL 228 RIGHT ENGINE LEFT ENGINE Figure 8 14 Engine Timing Marks BENDIX SWITCH LEAD TERMINAL KIT Figure 8 15 Timing Light Connected to Magneto Reissued 9 23 80 POWERPLANT 2114 ...

Page 478: ...proper lubrication If oil has migrated from one follower felt to another it may be necessary to remove the lubrication from one felt strip while oiling another If felt is overlubricated remove oil by usinga clean lintless cloth If dry apply oneor two drops of Bendix BreakerFelt Lubricant 10 86527 h Check the capacitors for looseness in the magneto cover of the harness assemblyand for any physical ...

Page 479: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 279 A RETARD ANGLES E GAP ANGLES Figure 8 16 Timing Marks on Magneto Rotor Present 238 Figure 8 17 Timing Marks on Magneto Rotor Earlier Reissued 9 23 80 POWERPLANT 2116 ...

Page 480: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 239 RED PAINTED TOOTH Figure 8 18 Painted Tooth Centered in Timing Window I INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Reissued 9 23 80 POWERPLANT 2117 ...

Page 481: ...GH TENSION OUTLETS LEFT MAIN AND RETARD BREAKER ASSEMBLY RIGHT MAGNETO HIGH TENSION OUTLETS 281 VIEWA A 1 RIGHT MAIN CONTACT ASSEMBLY 2 LEFT MAIN CONTACT ASSEMBLY 3 RETARD BREAKER 4 SCREW 5 LOCK WASHER 6 FLAT WASHER 7 RETARD CAM S MAIN CAM 4 Figure 8 19 Cam End View of Magneto Reisued 9 23 80 POWERPLANT 2118 ...

Page 482: ...8 20 Timing Mark on Rotor Aligned with Pointer Right Hand Rotation Figure 8 21 Timing Light Connected to Magneto Figure 8 22 Timing Light Connected to Magneto and Breakers Figure 8 23 Checking Harness Lead Continuity Reissued 9 23 80 POWER PLANT 2119 ...

Page 483: ...he magneto drive gear backlash by turning the propeller opposite to normal rotation approximately 40 past number one firing position then turn propellerin direction of normal rotation up to number one firingposition of 20 BTC f Remove the plug or adapter from the distributor inspection windowsat either end of the magneto housing Refer to Figure 8 18 Also removethe plugfrom the E gap inspectionwind...

Page 484: ...nd the late breaker must open within 3 enginedegrees fromthe first breaker opening It makesno difference which breakeropens first m Repeat Step k if necessaryuntil conditions of Step 1 are met If the late breaker opens more than 3 degreesfrom the early one the internal timingof the magnetomustbe rechecked Referto Internal Timing Paragraph 8 75 n Torque the magneto securing clamps to 150 inch pound...

Page 485: ... Bend bracket carefully Do not correct by bending back if bent too much this weakensthe bracket g Position rotor so keyway is at 12 o clock position and red painted distributor teeth arevisiblein timingwindows h Loosen drive shaft nut and position the Rotor Holding Tool Bendix part number 11 8465 under washeror bushing on driveend of rotor shaft with clampat 4 o clock position so any shaft deflect...

Page 486: ...dth of R or L mark on rotor If breakersare not properly synchronized reset right breaker q Check right main breaker contact for 0 016 004 inch point opening and torque right breaker contact securing screws to 20 25 inch pounds If point opening is out of limits repeat timing procedure setting left main breaker opening at 016 002 inch If right contacts open beyond 020 inch set left contacts closer t...

Page 487: ...243 244 CUT NOTCH TO FIT SNUG ON NO 58 DRILL WITH JAWS CLOSED Figure 8 24 Checking Harness Lead Insulation Resistance Figure 8 25 Modified Pliers 230A Figure 8 26 Removing Spring From Lead Assembly Reissued 9 23 80 POWERPLANT 2124 ...

Page 488: ...UAL BRAZE DRILL NO 47 1 4 IN DEEP TAP 3 48 BLENDO D TO POLISH O D I D 12 000 IN MAT NO 30 DRILL RODOR EQUIVALENT Figure 8 27 Assembly Tool C346 SPRINGRETAINER ASSY Figure 8 28 Using Assembly Tool Reissued 9 23 80 POWER PLANT 2J1 ...

Page 489: ...G Figure 8 29 Ferrule Positioned Under Braid Figure 8 30 Ferrule Seating Tool 11 7074 C473 C473 11 8626 SPRING INSERTION GUIDE DISTRIBUTOR BLOCK 11 3699 HANDLE DISTRIBUTOR BLOCK Figure 8 31 Position of 11 8627 Kit and Contact Spring at Start of Installation Figure 8 32 Position of 11 8627 Kit and Contact Spring after Installation Reissued 9 23 80 POWERPLANT 2J2 ...

Page 490: ...icator lamp flashes and GAP fires simultaneously as long as the PRESS TO TESTswitch is held depressed Wheneverindicator lamp flashes and GAP fails to fire lead under test is defectiveand must be replaced 8 78 MAINTENANCEOF HARNESS Minor repairs of the harness assembly such as replacement of contact springs sleeves compression springs eyelets or grommets can be accomplishedwith the harness mounted ...

Page 491: ... the cableterminal into the tool 4 Workinsulating sleeveand springretainer assemblyinto position overthe cableand unscrew the tool Install contact springon cable terminal NOTE It may be necessary to lubricate the cable and insulating sleeve with a thin film of DC 200 200 000 centistokes or commercial gradealcohol to facilitate assembly e To replaceone of the lead assembliesproceed as follows 1 Rem...

Page 492: ...pray grommets and sleeves with Fluorocarbon Spray such as MS S 122 supplied by Miller StephensonChemicalCo Inc 16 Sugar Hollow Road Danbury Connecticut 06810 or equivalent i Prior to seatingspark plugleadterminal inplugbarrel usefluorocarbon spray on spark plugterminal insulating sleeve Refer to Figure 8 33 to prevent heat from sticking sleeveto spark plug barrel Lightly lubricate the shoulderof f...

Page 493: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 1106 FIRING ORDER 1 4 5 2 3 6 Figure 8 35 Ignition System Schematic PA 31 350 Reissued 9 23 80 POWERPLANT 2J6 ...

Page 494: ...tion from the plug care must be taken to pull the lead straight out and in line with the centerline of the plugbarrel otherwise a sideload willbe applied which frequently results in damageto the barrel insulator and connector If the lead cannot be removed easily in this manner the resisting contact between the neoprene collarand the barrel insulator willbe broken by a rotary twisting of the collar...

Page 495: ...not beremoved by normal means the funnel adapter is placed overand around the spark plug Place the funnelof the C02 bottle insidethe funnel adapter and releasethe carbon dioxide to chilland contract the spark plug Breakthe spark plugloosewith a wrench A warmcylinderhead at the timethe carbon dioxideisapplied willaid inthe removalof anexcessively seized plug e Do not allowforeign objects to enter t...

Page 496: ...same time observe the No 1 cylinder spark plug lead which is fired by the left magneto circuit A series of sparks should beseen whenholding the lead approximately 19 of an inch from engine ground WARNING Grasp the spark pluglead farenoughaway from the connection so as not to produce any dangerouselectrical shock e If the sparkdoes not jump the gap check the appliedvoltageto the starting vibrator T...

Page 497: ...andusinga sharp knife cut through the folds of the element at both ends closeto the metal caps Then carefully unfold the pleated element and examine the material trapped in the filter for evidenceof internal enginedamagesuch as chips or particles from bearings In new or newly overhauledengines some small particle of metallic shavingsmight be found these are generally of no consequenceand should no...

Page 498: ...nd interpretation by the maintenance personnel using this system It must be remembered that the oil analysis technique is not a replacement for other established maintenance checks such as differential cylinder pressure checks boroscopic examination and filter content inspection The oil analysisis used to estimate wear ratio values of the particular engine or enginesbeingmonitored For further info...

Page 499: ... operation of magnetobreaker Lack of sufficient fuel flow Internal failure Open throttle and unload engineby engagingstarter Mixturein Idle Cut off Open throttle to one fourth of its range Cleanand adjust or replace spark plugs Checkwith electrictester and replaceany defective wires Replacewith charged battery Cleaningpoints Check timingof magnetos Disconnectfuel line at fuel injectorand check fue...

Page 500: ...o advancetiming of ignition If voltageis adequate listen for buzzingof vi brator duringstarter If no buzzing is heard either the vibrator is defectiveor the circuit from the Out put terminal on the vi brator to the retard contact assemblyis open Checkboth Switch and Retard cir cuits Alsocheck for good electrical ground Retard points may not be closingdue to wrongadjust ment or may not beelec trica...

Page 501: ...g and whileholding No 1pluglead 19 of an inch fromground energize vibrator by activatingthe starter switch Pluglead should throw a 19 of an inch spark If spark is weak or missingtry newvibrator If this does not correct trouble check magnetofor improper internal timingor improperlymesheddistri butor gears Magnetoimproperlytimed to engine Advancecontact assembly out of adjustment in ternal timingoff...

Page 502: ...gnitionsystem Adjust fuel pressure Low power and uneven running Mixture too richas in dicated by sluggishengine operation red exhaust flame at night Extreme casesindicated by black smoke from exhaust Readjustment of fuelin jector by authorized per sonnel is indicated Mixture too lean indi cated by overheatingor backfiring Leaksin induction system Defectivespark plugs Improper fuel Magnetobreaker p...

Page 503: ...ne mount Defectivemounting bushings Unevencompression Defectivespark plugs 0GINE cont Remedy Checkwirewith electric tester Replacedefective wire Replaceconnectors on spark plugwire Tighten all connectionsand replace defectiveparts Adjust throttle lever Check strainer gaugeand flow at fuel injector inlet Examineair scoop and re move restrictions Drainand refill tank with recommended fuel Tightenall...

Page 504: ...of limits Check magneto to engine timing Inspect contact assemblies for proper opening Checkplugs and leads Low oil pressure Insufficientoil Fill sump with recommended oil Air lock or dirt in re lief valve Leak in suction line or pressureline Dirty oil strainers Highoil temperature Defectivepressuregauge Stoppagein oil pump intake passage Removeand cleanoil pres sure reliefvalve Checkgasketbetween...

Page 505: ...causedby worn or stuck rings Failing or failed Examinesump for metal bearings particles If found over haul of engine is indicated Defectivetemperature Replacegauge Excessiveoil consumption gauge Low grade of oil Failing or failed bearings Worn piston rings Incorrect installation of piston rings Failure of ringsto seat Newnitrided cylinders Fill tank with oil conform ing to specifications Checksump...

Page 506: ...r Cloggedmanifoldsystem Foreignmateriallodged in compressorimpeller or turbine Clearall ducting Disassembleand clean Excessivedirt build up in compressor Piston sealin actuator leaking Usuallyac companied by oil leakage at drain line Wastegate controller malfunction Wastegate butterfly not closing Turbochargerimpeller binding frozen or foulinghousing Thoroughly cleancompressor assembly Serviceair ...

Page 507: ...too low Inlet orifice to actuator clogged Overhaulturbocharger Removeand cleanlines Havewastegate controller adjusted Tightenfittings Replace linesor hoses Increaseoil pressure to desiredpressure Removeinlet line at ac tuator and cleanorifice Criticalaltitude lower than specified Controller not getting enough oil pressure to closethe wastegate Check pump outlet pressure oil filters and external li...

Page 508: ...nto manifold Actuator to wastegate linkagebinding Cloggedbreather Bootstrapping Replacecontroller Correct causeof binding Check breather for re strictions to air flow Operate engine within range outlined in operation manual NOTE Smokewould be normal if enginehas idled for a prolongedperiod High deck pressure Com pressor dischargepres sure Controllermeteringvalve not opening Aneroid bellowsleaking ...

Page 509: ...wer conditions Should open when actuator inlet line is disconnected Replacecontroller Removeand disassembleac tuator check condition of piston and packingor re placeactuator assembly Manifoldpressuredrops as altitude increases below 1500 feet Oilin induction housing Malfunctionof pressure ratio controller Oilleakingpast sealin controllers Replacepressureratio controller Replacefaulty controller En...

Page 510: ... Removeand replaceunit bypassvalveor bearing seizure Obstruction in oil outlet Blockedoil drain return line Brokenlinkage Wastegate won t close completely Controllermalfunction Obstruction in oil inlet orifice Leakingvalvesin con troller Piston sealin bypass valveworn or broken Cleanreturn lines Cleanline Replacelinkageand adjust wastegate to open and close position to specifications in overhaulma...

Page 511: ...overhaul manual Replaceor overhaul turbo charger Damageto turbine or compressorwheel Exhaust leaks Controller or wastegate malfunction Replace or overhaul turbo charger Repairleaks Replacecontroller NOTE Whenit has been determined that a controller is malfunctioning it should be removed and replaced The old unit should be sent to approved facilities for overhaul of turbochargers or repaired in acc...

Page 512: ...Fuel Gauges Valves Removal of Fuel Valves Disassembly of Selector Valve Scott Cleaning Inspection and Repair of Selector Valve Scott Assembly of Selector Valve Scott Leak Test of Selector Valve Scott Disassembly of Crossfeed Valve Cleaning Inspection and Repair of Crossfeed Valve Assembly of Crossfeed Valve Leak Test of Crossfeed Valve Disassembly of Fire Wall Shutoff Valve Cleaning Inspection and...

Page 513: ... Installationof FuelFilter 2L 9 48 CleaningFuelSystem 2L 9 49 EmergencyElectricFuelPump 2LI 9 50 Removalof EmergencyElectricFuelPump 2LI 9 51 DisassemblyofEmergencyElectricFuelPump 2LI 9 52 CleaningInspectionandRepairof EmergencyElectricFuelPump 2L3 9 53 Assemblyof EmergencyElectricFuelPump 2L3 9 54 Adjustmentof EmergencyElectricFuelPump BenchTest 2L5 9 55 Adjustmentof EmergencyElectricFuelPump In...

Page 514: ...inuous duty inlinetype pump located betweenthe fuel filter and the electric fuel pump These pumps are provided to maintain fuel under pressure to the other fuel pumps improving the altitude performance of the fuel system Each pump is con trolled by a separate circuit braker located in the circuit braker control panel These pumps are activated when the master switchis turned on and continueto opera...

Page 515: ...FEED VALVE 10 FUELPRESSURE GAUGE 11 FUELQUANTITYGAUGE 12 FUELTANK VENTCHECKVALVE 13 OUTBOARD FUELTANK 14 INBOARDFUELTANK 15 FUELFILTER QUICKDRAIN 16 FUELFILTER 17 FUELTANK SELECTOR VALVE 18 CROSSFEED QUICKDRAINVALVE 19 FUELTANK QUICKDRAIN 20 FUELTANK STRAINER 21 FUELSENDER SELECTOR SWITCHES 22 SURGE TANKWITHFLAPPER VALVE 23 LOWFUEL WARNINGPROBE 24 NACELLE FUELCELL OPTIONAL 25 FUELREGULATOR SHUTOFF...

Page 516: ...underside of the wing remove the access plates to the fuel cell outlet and vent c Loosen the clamp and disconnect the nipple fittings at the fuel outlet at the inboard end of the cell and vent line at the outboard end of the cell d Remove the screws that secure the drain fitting plate draw the drain down enough to disconnect the fitting clamp and remove the drain e On top of the wing remove the ac...

Page 517: ...ER FILLER 9 GASKET 10 GASKET 11 PLATE CELLATTACHMENT 12 KNOTAND WASHER 13 VALVE CHECK 14 BUSHING SNAP 15 LINER CELL 16 LOOP ATTACHMENT 17 RIB ASSEMBLY 18 CORD 19 CLAMP 20 PLATE DRAIN 21 SCREW 22 CAP BOLT 23 GASKET 24 WASHER 25 STRAINER FINGER 26 NIPPLE 27 CELL 28 PROBE 29 SCREW NYLON 30 GASKET 31 ZINC CHROMATE TAPE 32 COVER FUELCELL 33 GASKET 34 NUT SKETCH D SKETCH E Figure9 2 Fuel Cell Installati...

Page 518: ...LER 8 ADAPTER FILLER 9 GASKET 10 PLATE CELLATTACHMENT 8 11 BRACKET FILLERNECK 12 VENT NON ICING 13 CHECKVALVE 14 GASKET 15 GASKET FUELSENDER 16 GASKET FUEL SENDER 17 DRAINASSEMBLY 18 SKIN NACELLETOP 19 STRAINER FINGER 20 CAP BOLT 21 CELL 22 WASHER 23 GASKET 24 SCREW NYLON 25 SCREW 26 NIPPLE 27 COVER ACCESS 28 SPACER Figure9 2a FuelCellInstallation NacelleOptional Added 3 11 81 FUEL SYSTEM 2K7 ...

Page 519: ... inside and outside for cuts abraded scuffed areasand accessorydamage Also inspectthe fittingsealsfor nicks scratchesandforeignmaterial 2 Used Cells Cellsremoved from the airframe cavity for inspection and repair or cellsbeing returned to servicefrom storage should be inspectedas outlined above Cellsinstalledin the airframecavity may be inspected for possiblerepairsby reachingthrough the fuel cell...

Page 520: ...WARNING Do not permit smoking or open flame near repair area or cells b When storing cells observe the following rules 1 Fold cells smoothly and lightly as possible with a minimum number of folds Place protective wadding between folds 2 Wrap cell in moisture proof paper and place it in a suitable container Do not crowd cell in container use wadding to prevent movement 3 Stack boxed cells to allow ...

Page 521: ... 11 PLATE CELLATTACHMENT 12 KNOT AND WASHER 13 VALVE CHECK 14 BUSHING SNAP 15 LINER CELL 16 LOOP ATTACHMENT 17 RIB ASSEMBLY 18 CORD 19 CLAMP 20 PLATE DRAIN 21 SCREW 22 SCREW NYLON 23 GASKET 24 STRAINER 25 NIPPLE 26 CELL 27 GAP BOLT 28 WASHER NOTE INSTALL WITH ARROW TOWARD FUEL CELL AND HINGE UP SKETCHC Figure 9 3 Fuel Cell Installation Auxiliary Outboard Reissued 9 23 80 FUELSYSTEM 2K10 ...

Page 522: ...gh the accessopeningof the cell compartment g Unroll the cell and establish correct relationship of the cell to the compartment Insure bottom of fuel cellis smoothed out and free of wrinkles h Remove the backing from the tape installed in Step b Press the cell to the exposed tape on the cell i Lay out the nylon cord furnished with fuel cell on the wingto determine the length of cord for each tie T...

Page 523: ...ter and gaskets one gasket on each side of the wingskin bracket with the attachment holes in the skin bracket and adapter bracket Install machinescrewsand secure q Install fuel senders gaskets one on each sideof bracket and screws Tightennylon screwsto 5 2 0 inch pounds r Connect sender wires andascertainthat insulator sleeveis insulatingto point wherewireattaches sender Install senderaccessplates...

Page 524: ...ll dirt and foreign material with a clean soft lint free tack cloth and inspect for cleanliness i Install the fuel cap adapter bracket by wrapping the bracket with a protective cover so as not to damage the cell insert it through the access opening and slide it in position Install the gasket between the bracket and cell and start the cap bolts that attach the bracket to the cell Alignthe holesinth...

Page 525: ...gallons to the outboard and inboard cells respectivelyfor each quarter capacity of the cells At each quarter increment until full check that the quantity pointer aligns withinone needlewidthof the indexwire withthe selectorleverat eitherONposition h Should the gaugeand the amount offuel inthe cellnot correspond the gaugemay becalibrated per paragraph 9 14 9 13 CHECKING FUEL QUANTITY SENDERS a Disc...

Page 526: ...nd fuselage are removed by the followingprocedure a Remove the access plate located forward of the main spar on the underside of the wing between the wingand fuselage b If the selector valveis to be removed drain the appropriate fuel cell Refer to Drainingthe Fuel Cell Section II If the crossfeed valve or emergency shutoff valve is to be removed ascertain that the selectorvalveis off c Disconnect ...

Page 527: ... invalveare special Do not use ANfittings 9 19 ASSEMBLY OF SELECTORVALVE SCOTT Refer to Figure9 6 a If either fitting 1 1 was removed install the O ringpacking 17 and assemblethe fitting on the valvebody 2 b Lubricate the O ring packings 17 with a thin coat of stop lock greaseand install on the valve spool 12 c Insert and center the spool in the valvebody d Lubricate the seal 19 and O ring 16 and ...

Page 528: ...ingthe leverto left e Repeat stepc f Disconnectand wipe fluid fromexterior 9 21 DISASSEMBLY OF CROSSFEEDVALVE Refer to Figure9 7 a Disconnectthe control arm 10 from the valvestep 2 by removingnut 9 from the pin 8 b Pushthe stemout of the valvebody 3 c Removeseal s requiring replacement d If seat valve 4 is removed replaceO ringpacking 6 9 22 CLEANING INSPECTIONANDREPAIROF CROSSFEEDVALVE a Cleanthe...

Page 529: ...NAND REPAIROF FIRE WALLSHUTOFFVALVE a Cleanthe valvecomponents in a suitablecleaningsolvent b Inspectthe valvefor the following 1 Check that the valveand valvebody stop pins are not bent broken or missing 2 Check that the handle is not loose on the valve 3 Check that the valveand inside of the valvebody is free of scratches burrs etc that may damagethe O rings c Repair to the valve is limited to r...

Page 530: ...UEL PUMP LEFT 14 INJECTOR LEFT 15 GAUGE FUEL PRESSURE 16 GAUGE FUEL FLOW 17 BULKHEAD 16 LINE RT DECK PRESSURE 19 LINE RT FUEL PRESSURE 20 LINE RT FUEL FLOW PRESSURE 21 LINE LT DECK PRESSURE 22 LINE LT FUEL PRESSURE 23 LINE LT FUEL FLOW PRESSURE 24 RIB ASSEMBLY 25 BRACKET MOUNTING 26 LINE TO LT ENGINE 27 VALVE EMERGENCY SHUTOFF 28 CONTROL EMERGENCY SHUTOFF 29 BRACKET MOUNTING 30 FUEL PUMP ELECTRIC ...

Page 531: ...ROL SELECTOR VALVE 38 VALVE FUEL SELECTOR 39 VALVE CROSSFEED 40 LINE CROSSFEED 41 L PRESSURE SWITCH 42 R PRESSURE SWITCH 43 FUEL BOOST PUMP 44 LOCKWIRE MS20995C41 45 LINE TO L PRESSURE SWITCH 46 BRACKET LEFT 47 BRACKET RIGHT 48 BUSHING 49 CROSSFEED CONTROL CABLE SKETCHC Figure 9 9 Fuel System Installation cont Revised 10 15 82 FUEL SYSTEM 2K20 ...

Page 532: ...ctor panel assembly 3 Loosen the screws holding the switch to the assembly and move the switch to proper position 4 Checkproper operation then reinstall fuel selector panel g Reinstall the accesspanels 9 31 ADJUSTMENT OF CROSSFEEDVALVE a Remove the fuel selector panel cover in the cockpit and the access panel to the control valve located belowthe fuselageand the undersideof the left wing b Ascerta...

Page 533: ...e control to relievepressure and then close the lightsshould come on andstay on NOTE Do not run pumps at no flow for more than one minute Troubleshoot the electrical wiring and refer to the paragraphs on adjustment of fuel boost pumps and warningsensors if the operational test does not check out 9 36 REMOVALAND INSTALLATIONOF FUEL BOOSTPUMP WARNINGSENSOR Removal is accomplishedby the following a R...

Page 534: ...ilter fromthe airplane For cleaningand servicingpurposesonly stepsaand bof thisparagraph are necessary then proceed to paragraph 9 44 a Turn the fuelselector valveto the OFF position b Remove the access panel forward of the main spar between the underside of the wing and the fuselage c Disconnectthe electricalleadsto the fuel pump d Disconnect the fuel lines to the filter and fuel pump Cover the l...

Page 535: ...dition of bowl drain and internal drain O ring e Check for corrosion of filter parts f Check movement of bypass valve g Check condition of filter rubber shock mounts h Normal repairs necessary for the filter are replacement of bowl gaskets and damaged filter discs 9 46 ASSEMBLY OF FUEL FILTER REFER TO FIGURE 9 11 a If removed install bypass valve spring 8 relief ball 9 and seat 10 b Place the filt...

Page 536: ...ndadjustment a Turnthe fuelselectortothe OFFposition b Remove the access panel forwardof the main spar betweenthe undersideof the wing andthe fuselage c Disconnecttheelectricalleadsto thefuelpump d Disconnectthe fuel lines fromthe fuel pumpandfilter assembly Coverthe line ends to prevent contamination e Removetheboltsthat securethe pumpandfiltertotheir mountingbracketsandremovefromthe airplane f S...

Page 537: ... 10 INSERT 11 BLADE 12 RING BLADE RET 13 ROTOR 14 WEAR PLATE 15 WEAR PLATE SPRING 16 PLUG INSERT 17 O RING 18 CAN COVER 19 SCREWS 20 INSERT BEARING RET 21 PISTON 22 SPRING VALVE 23 O RING 24 GUIDE ADJ 25 SCREW ADJ 26 LOCKNUT VALVE 27 RING RET TRU ARC 21 ADAPTER 29 SCREWS 30 SCREWS Figure 9 12 Electric Fuel Pump Reissued 9 23 80 FUEL SYSTEM 2L2 ...

Page 538: ...ess flush with body housing 4 b Lubricate O ring seals with Parker O Lube or equivalent to facilitate reassembly c Replace the valve spring 22 and piston assembly 21 Check for free movement of plunger d With the piston assembly 21 valve spring 22 adjustment guide 24 and adjustment screw 25 in place secure with Tru Arc retaining spring 27 e Install the rotor 13 into the insert 10 and the rotor blad...

Page 539: ...ARTLIMIT DIM WORN PART LIMIT DIM A B C D E 0 2502 MAX 0 6252 MAX 0 6252 MAX 0 0455 MAX 0 2493 MIN F G H I K 0 6245 MIN 0 6344 MIN 0 6246 MIN 0 298 MIN 0 0488 MIN t F ROTOR t BLADE K A WEARNOTCHEXCEEDING 0 010INCHINDEPTHIN THIS AREAINDICATES THATBLADESHOULDBE DISCARDED Revised 3 31 94 FUELSYSTEM 2L4 ...

Page 540: ...ourcefromthepumpandremovethefuellinesfromthe pump 9 55 ADJUSTMENT OF EMERGENCY ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP IN THE AIRPLANE a With the access panelsremovedand the fuel selectorin the OFF position remove the fuel line fromtheoutletendofthe pump b Connecta testline witha bypassvalveandpressuregaugetothe outletendof thepump c Place a containerbelowthepumptocatchanyfuel fromthe test lineduringthe adjustmentof t...

Page 541: ...s are neat and permanent Heatcure repairingallowscellsto be curedandreadyfor installationin two hours Air curerepairingrequiresthatthe cell notbe movedfor 72 hoursor longer Quickcurerepairingcan beused on cellsthat haveminordamageandcanberepairedinsix hours 9 58 HANDLING OF REPAIR MATERIALS CAUTION Repaircementfor heat andair curerepairs 5923c andquickcure repairs 82c32 requires thoroughmixing to ...

Page 542: ...dyear Street Rockmart Georgia 30153 0548 9 13b 9 60 REPAIR PATCH HEATCURE METHOD CAUTION Do not apply an outsideand insidepatch simultaneously Apply outsidepatchfirst a Cut apatchfromFT 227repairfabrictothe sizerequiredto ensureaproperlapovertheinjuryin all directions 1 Holdshearsatanangletoproducea bevelededge feather on the patch 2 Roundcornersof patch Ensuredullsideor gumcontactfaceof repairpat...

Page 543: ... GROUP II MINIMUM EQUIPMENT 250 ml Sheet 6in X 24 in min Sheet 12 4 in X 12in X 12inmin lin wide 1 4 in X6 in X6 in min Q GROUPIII MINIMUMLEAKTESTEQUIPMENT Q algrade 40 gin 2ozbottle ate commercialgrade commercialgrade white ure iron 240 temperature setting 6 inch with25 footcord 8 to 10inchlong BlackandDeckerP N725 2250rpm 1 9amp 115VACor equivalent DunemoreR421003 1 4in drive 1inlongX 1in dia or...

Page 544: ...ricandcementcanbepurchasedseparatelybyspecifyingthe codenumberor nationalstock number NSN listedabove 4 SolventandCleanclothcanbepurchasedfromAeroHardwareor alocalsupplier 9 60 REPAIR PATCH HEAT CURE METHOD continued WARNING Cementsandsolventsare flammable Mixand applycementin wellventilatedarea Repair cement 5923c shelf life is one year from date on contain er Do not use out dated cement NOTE Mix...

Page 545: ...tcrease Ensurepatchdoesnotmovewhentighteningclamp q Foldcellnexttopatch Placeplatewithairfoamoverpatch r Place 2F1 3 2572repair iron on centerof plate Cover iron with other backupboard Secure assemblyin placewithC clamp Wipeoff anyexcesscementthat flowsfrompressureplates s Connectrepairironto 110 120Vac Setironto240 Fandallowto curefor twohours t Unplugironandallowassemblyto cooltothetouch u Disse...

Page 546: ...d accessorywillprobablyleave anunevencavity andsurface f Prepare replacementaccessoryby buffingand washingcontact surface Also wash cell surface see repairpatch g Apply mixed 80C27repair cementto both surfacesbeingsure to level cavityleft by removalof old accessory h Roll new accessoryinto placeas witha repair patch andplace suitablepaddedplates in positionto insure adequatepressure when clamped U...

Page 547: ...emicalTest 1 Attachtestplatesto all fittingopeningsexceptone 2 Makeup a phenolphthalein solutionas follows Add 40 gramsphenolphthalein crystalsin 1 2 gallonof EthylAlcohol mix thenadd 1 2gallonof water 3 Pour ammoniaon an absorbentclothin the ratio of 3ml percubic footof cell capacity Place thesaturatedclothinsidethecellandinstallremainingtestplate 4 Inflatethe cell with air to a pressureof 1 4psi...

Page 548: ... safety wire and plain nut and washer securing the probe to the mounting plate also remove and discard the gasket from between the mounting plate and probe d Apply MIL S 8802 B1 2 sealant or equivalent between the mounting plate and mounting surface of the probe e Assemble the probe to the plate as shown in Figure 9 14 securing the probe in place with the washer and plain nut Torque nut 35 50 inch...

Page 549: ...ers in wingsand at gauge Float and arm as sembly of fuel trans mitter s in wing sticking Check fuel transmitters in wingsand repair or replace Fuel gaugeindi catingapproximately 1 2 tank when tank is full but will function normally on other tank Inboard fuel transmit ter assemblygrounded Float and arm assembly of fuel transmitter s in wingsticking Checkinboard fue transmitter installation and repa...

Page 550: ...ruction in electricpump Check bypassvalve Air leak in intake lines Defective gauge Replace gauge Pressure low or Obstruction in inlet Trace lines and locate pressure surges side of pump obstruction Faulty pump Replace Unidentified leak Fuel linesdamagedor Locateand repair or improperly installed tighten O rings improperly Locate and repair or installed tighten Fuel valve leaks Worn O rings Replace...

Page 551: ...open circuit or faulty component Fuel flow sensor probe malfunction Gated delay relay malfunction Checkfree movementof probe tip replaceif defective Replacerelay after the cause for the white wire to ground has been iso lated and corrected Fuel flow warning light failsto ex tinguish Low fuel levelin fuel cell Fuel flow sensor probe malfunction Fill Check free movementof probe tip replaceif defecti...

Page 552: ...m bus Replace Check and reset the gear oil temperature and fuel quantity indicator circuit breaker If the breaker is popped the fuel flow warning lightshave failed also Trace through system for an open circuit or faulty component Pressureswitch malfunction Replace Fuel boost pump warninglight fails to extinguish Fuel boost pump circuit breaker popped Fuel boost pump malfunction Checkand reset Chec...

Page 553: ... lights No power from bus Check andreset the gear oil temperature and fuel quantity indicator circuit breaker Trace through system for an open circuit or faulty component Test switch mal function Check connectionsand replaceif necessary All the warning lights fail to extinguish Test switch grounded Correct or replace if necessary I 0 Reissued 9 23 80 FUEL SYSTEM 2L18 ...

Page 554: ...2L19 THRU 2L24 INTENTIONALLYLEFTBLANK ...

Page 555: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL CARD 3 OF4 PA 31 350 PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORATION PART NUMBER 761488 3A1 ...

Page 556: ...capitalization spelling punctuation indexing physicallocation of material or completepageadditionsare notidentifiedby revisionlines Revisionsto ServiceManual761488 issuedNovember11 1972areas follows Revisions Publication Date AeroficheCardEffectivity ORG721111 CR800923 PR810311 PR810824 PR820208 PR821015 PR831005 PR840305 PR840503 IR860429 IR860925 IR870505 IR871009 IRP00313 PR940331 November 11 1...

Page 557: ... 1E18 V SURFACE CONTROLS 1H16 AEROFICHE CARD NO 2 VI HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 2A8 VII LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM 2D14 VIII POWER PLANT 2H3 IX FUELSYSTEM 2K1 AEROFICHE CARD NO 3 X INSTRUMENTS 3A7 XI ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3C8 AEROFICHE CARD NO 4 XII ELECTRONICS 4A9 XIII HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM 4B6 XIV ACCESSORIES AND UTILITIES 4D24 3A3 ...

Page 558: ...tor Prestolite 11 4 Schematic Alternator Paralleling System 11 5 Removal of Rectifier 1 6 Removal of Slip Ring End Bearing 11 7 Removal of Drive End Head 11 8 Removal of End Head Bearing 11 9 Testing Rotor for Ground 11 10 Testing Rotor for Shorts 11 11 Installation of Bearing 11 12 Installation of Rectifier 3A1I 3A12 3A19 3A21 3A23 3B1 3B2 3B3 3B4 3B5 3C14 3C15 3C19 3C20 3C22 3C22 3C23 3C23 3C24 ...

Page 559: ...ure Indicators 3B23 X XV Exhaust Gas TemperatureGauge 3C1 X XVI Cylinder Head TemperatureGauge 3C2 X XVII Fuel Flow Gauge 3C3 X XVIII Instrument Markings 3C5 XI l Alternator Test Specifications Prestolite 3C18 XI II Alternator Belt Tension 3DII XI III Starting Motor Test Specifications 3D18 XI IV Hydrometer PercentageGuide 3D18 XI V Troubleshooting Chart Electrical System 3EII XI VI Circuit Load C...

Page 560: ...3A6 INTENTIONALLYLEFT BLANK ...

Page 561: ...os 31 7652124 and up 10 20 Pilot s Gyros and Deicer Boots S N 31 5001 to 31 7652123 10 21 Pilot s Gvros and Deicer Boots S N 31 7652124 and up SECTION X INSTRUMENTS Paragraph Aerofiche Grid No 3A10 3A10 3A10 3A10 3A13 3A13 3A14 3A15 3A15 3A15 3A16 3A17 3A17 3A17 3A17 3A17 3A17 3A18 3A20 3A24 3A24 3B6 3B6 3B6 3B8 3B8 3B8 3B8 3B8 3B9 3B9 3B9 3B9 3B9 3B9 3B10 3B10 3B10 3B10 3B10 3B11 10 22 Pilot s Gy...

Page 562: ... 10 60 Fuel PressureGauge 10 61 General 10 62 Troubleshooting 10 63 Removaland Replacement 10 64 ElectricalInstruments 10 65 Turn and Bank Pictorial Rate Instruments 10 66 General 10 67 Troubleshooting 10 68 Removaland Replacement 10 69 Fuel Quantity Indicator 10 70 General 10 71 Troubleshooting 10 72 Removaland Replacement 10 73 OilTemperatureIndicator 10 74 General 10 75 Troubleshooting 10 76 Re...

Page 563: ...0 93 Troubleshooting 10 94 Removal and Replacement of Face Mounted 10 95 General 10 96 Manifold Pressure Gauge Filters 10 97 Gyro Service Procedure 10 98 Gyro Installation Inspection 10 99 Gyro Handling and Shipping 10 100 Clock 10 101 Removal and Installation of Clock 10 102 Replacement of Battery Digital C 10 103 Digital Clock Timer Chronometer Operation Aerofiche Grid No Instruments lock erOper...

Page 564: ... shielded post lights or a light incorporated as part of the instrument The panel has been arranged to accommodate flight instruments in the left side in front of the pilot electronic equipment and some engine instruments in the center and the remaining engine and miscellaneous instruments to the right A second set of flight instruments may be installedin the right side of the panel for use by the...

Page 565: ...TIC SOURCE VALVE 28 MIKE AND EARPHONE JACKS PILOT 29 AUTOPILOT CONTROLS 30 ADF 31 WINDSHIELD WIPER CONTROL EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK 32 CIGAR LIGHTER 33 NAV 2 34 PARKING BRAKE 35 GEAR SELECTOR 36 GEAR INDICATOR LIGHTS 37 RADAR ALTIMETER 38 RADIO LIGHT SWITCH 39 AVIONICS MASTER SWITCH 40 PA VOLUME CONTROL ON OFF KNOB 41 AVIONICS 42 RADAR 43 MANUAL ALTERNATE AIR CONTROLS 44 HEATER CONTROL SWITCH 45 WIN...

Page 566: ...ED AIRSPACEUNDERIFR CONDITIONS SEE ADVISORY CIRCULAR AC 43 13 1A SECTION4 OF CHAPTER 16 REFER TO PARTS CATALOG FORTYPICALSYSTEM ROUTING 1 PITOTHEAD 2 ALTERNATESTATICSOURCE 3 ALTIMETER 4 AIRSPEEDINDICATOR 5 RATEOF CLIMBINDICATOR 6 SUCTIONGAUGE 7 STATICSOURCE FORPILOT SAND OPTIONAL COPILOT S STATICINSTRUMENTS 8 STATICSOURCE FORALTIMATIC V SERIES ALTITUDE CONTROLLER 9 ALTITUDECONTROLLER Figure 10 2 I...

Page 567: ...dded control wheeltube 6 Unscrewthe electricalconnector from the post light s 7 Disconnect the plumbing and or electrical connector from the back of the instrument and identify each line to facilitate reinstallation Attach a dust cap or plug to each fitting 8 Removethe post light s by turning off nut 9 Removethe screwsthat secure the instrument in the panel cutout 10 Remove the instrument from the...

Page 568: ...ion of excessive friction Note if the erection or warm up time is excessive caging functions are normal and warningflagsand indicatinglightsand test circuitsare operable e Note operation of instruments during engine runup Check for intermittent or improper operation of any instrument f Inspect the complete system for generalcondition apparent and obvious defects insecurity of attachments tubing co...

Page 569: ...igure 2 3 of Section II The left nacelle access panel may have the ice detection light while the right access panel is a grill type panel 2 Disconnect the hose clamp and remove the hose from the filter 3 Remove the locking nut from the filter line and remove the filter NOTE The filter should be replaced at each 100 hour inspection Refer to PA 31 350 Parts Catalog for correct part number h Installa...

Page 570: ...s and only at right anglesto the visejaws Use only enough visepressure to hold pump firmly DONOT apply visepressureto outside diameter or overalllength The ports of the AIRBORNE dry air pump have been treated with a dry film lubricant and the AIRBORNEfittings are cadmium plated thus eliminatingany need for thread lubricants If a thread lubricant is required use a powdered moly sulfide or graphite ...

Page 571: ...m the line 10 14 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE SWITCH Serial Nos 31 5001to 31 765123 a Screwthe switchinto the line and tighten b Connect the electrical leads c Reinstallaccesspanels 10 15 REMOVAL OF PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE a Remove accesspanel on top of nacelle Refer to Figure 2 3 WingSection access panel 7 left 14right b Disconnecthose clampsand remove hoses fromvalve c Removehardware attaching valveto...

Page 572: ...ding not be within the tolerance shutdown the engine and remove the forwardaccesspanelat the top of the nacelle d The pressure control valves 3 are located in the forward center portion of the nacelle Loosen the locknut on the pressure control valve 3 with an attached solenoid and rotate the knurled screw clockwise IN to increase pressure or counterclockwise OUT to decrease pressure until the desi...

Page 573: ...PRESSURESWITCH 9 CHECK VALVE 10 INSTRUMENT PRESSURE GAUGE 11 DEICER TIMER 12 PILOT DIRECTIONAL GYRO 13 PILOT ALTITUDE GYRO 14 COPILOT DIRECTIONAL GYRO IS COPILOT ALTITUDE GYRO 16 PNEUMATIC RELAY SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY 17 PRESSURE SWITCH Figure 10 3 Pilot s and Copilot s Gyro InstallationWithDeicer SerialNumbers31 5001 to 31 7652123inclusive Reissued 9 23 80 INSTRUMENTS 3A19 ...

Page 574: ...PM and with the deicersactivated insure that the pressure gaugefor the pilot s gyrosreads 5 5 4 in Hg 2 7 2 psi NOTE There will be a momentary fluctuation of pressure at the beginning of boot inflation Therefore the pilot s gyro pressure should be readjust prior to completion of the boot inflation cycle The air to the copilot s gyrosis shut off when the deicer systemis activated If these condition...

Page 575: ...4and up 1 DEICER BOOTS 2 INLET FILTER 3 PUMP 4 DUAL REGULATOR 5 FILTER 6 CHECK VALVE 7 DEICER CONTRO 8 EJECTOR 9 DEICER DUMP VALVE 10 PNEUMATIC REL 11 MANIFOLD CHEC 12 INSTRUMENT PR 13 DEICER TIMER 14 PRESSURE SWITC IS PILOT DIRECTIONAL 16 PILOT ALTITUDE 17 COPILOT DIRECT 18 COPILOT ALTITU Reissued 9 23 80 3A21 INSTRUMENTS ...

Page 576: ...essure adjust the copilot s side of the pneumatic relay shutoff valveassembly 10 by loosening the locknut on the right side of the control and with an Allen wrench turn the set screw counterclockwise OUT or clockwise IN until the desired pressure setting is obtained Tighten the locknut j With both engines operating at 2200 RPM the pressure gauge for the pilot s gyros located on copilot s instrumen...

Page 577: ... CONTROL 5 PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE 6 FILTER 7 PRESSURE PUMP 8 INLET FILTER 9 PRESSURE SWITCH 10 CHECK VALVE 11 DEICER TIMER 12 DIRECTIONAL GYRO 13 PRESSURE GAUGE 14 ATTITUDE GYRO 15 PRESSURE REGULATOR Figure 10 5 Pilot s Gyro Installation With Deicer Serial Numbers 31 5001to 31 7652123inclusive 3A23 Reissued 9 23 80 INSTRUMENTS ...

Page 578: ... met the regulator assembly is defective 10 21 PILOT S GYROS AND DEICER BOOTS Serial Nos 31 7652124and up Refer to Figure 10 6 To adjust the systempressurefor thisinstallationuse theinstructions outlinedin Paragraphs 10 17and 10 20 Steps a thru g The adjustment of gyro pressure is as follows a With both enginesoperating at 2200 RPM the pressuregaugefor the pilot s gyros located on the copilot s in...

Page 579: ...ALVE 8 EJECTOR 9 DEICER DUMP VALVE 10 RELAY VALVE 11 MANIFOLD CHECK VALVE 12 INSTRUMENT PRESSURE GAUGE AND SOURCE INDICATOR 13 DEICER TIMER 14 PRESSURE SWITCH 15 PILOT DIRECTIONAL GYRO 16 PI LOT ALTITUDE GYRO 17 PLUG Figure 10 6 Pilot s Gyro Installation With Deicer Serial Numbers 31 7652124and up Reissued 9 23 80 INSTRUMENTS 3B1 ...

Page 580: ...3 DIRECTIONAL GYRO 4 ATTITUDE GYRO 5 DIRECTIONAL GYRO 6 INSTRUMENT PRESSURE GAUGE 7 CHECK VALVE 8 PRESSURE SWITCH 9 INLET FILTER 10 PUMP 11 FILTER Figure 10 7 Pilot s and Copilot s Gyro Installation Serial Numbers 31 5001to 31 7652123inclusive Reissued 9 23 80 INSTRUMENTS 3B2 ...

Page 581: ...67C 1 INLET FILTER 2 PUMP 3 REGULATOR 4 FILTER S MANIFOLD CHECK VALVE 6 INSTRUMENT PRESSURE GAUGE 7 REGULATOR 8 GYROS Figure 10 8 Pilot s and Copilot s Gyro Installation Serial Numbers 31 7652124 and up Reissued 9 23 80 INSTRUMENTS 3B3 ...

Page 582: ...O 2 DIRECTIONAL GYRO 3 INSTRUMENT PRESSURE GAUGE 4 CHECK VALVE 5 PRESSURE SWITCH 6 INLET FILTER 7 PUMP 8 FILTER 9 PRESSURE REGULATOR Figure 10 9 Pilot s Gyro Installation Serial Numbers 31 5001 to 31 7652123 inclusive Reissued 9 23 80 384 INSTRUMENTS ...

Page 583: ...RVICEMANUAL 1 INLET FILTER 2 PUMP 3 REGULATOR 4 FILTER 5 MANIFOLD CHECK VALVE 6 INSTRUMENT PRESSURE GAUGE 7 GYROS Figure 10 10 Pilot s Gyro Installation Serial Numbers 31 7652124 and up Reissued 9 23 80 INSTRUMENTS 3B5 ...

Page 584: ...ght engine shutdown d With both engines operating at 2200 RPM insure that the pressure gaugereads 5 5 4 in Hg 2 7 2 psi 10 24 DEICER BOOTS PRESSURE TEST a Use a source of clean air which can be regulated between 18and 20 psi alongwith a testing rig consistingof 1 Adjustableregulator 2 Pressureregulator 3 Shutoff valve NOTE The shutoff valve must be connected so as to trap air in the deicer system ...

Page 585: ...ive Dis connected broken or restricted lines Hose from instrument to gaugeleakingor restricted Faulty gauge Mal functioning regulator valveor pump Regulatorvalvesincor rectly adjusted Leak ingof the systemlines or fitting Regulatorvalveincor rectly adjusted Checkoperation of valveand replace if necessary Checkoperation of valveand replace if necessary Replacepump Locate trouble and correct Checkal...

Page 586: ...ace 10 26b ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN DIRECTIONAL GYRO These gyros contain rotors which are electrically driven with the gyro rotor acting as the armature of an electric motor To eliminate the friction of brush assemblies which would induce abnormal precession the rotor armature is inductively excited The electric D G is subject to the same operational requirements of the air driven D G except for the me...

Page 587: ...These gyros contain rotors which are electrically driven with the gyro rotor acting as the armature of an induction motor Brush assemblies are not used since the friction would result in abnormal precession the rotorarmature is inductively excited The electric A H is subject to the same operational requirements of the air driven A H except for the method of obtaining rotor rotation and the design ...

Page 588: ...f this section 10 33 RATE OF CLIMB INDICATOR 10 34 GENERAL The rate of climb indicator measures the rate of change in static pressure when the airplane is climbing or descending By means of a pointer and dial this instrument will indicate the rate of ascent or descent of the airplane in feet per minute Due to the lag of the instrument the aircraft will be climbing or descending before the instrume...

Page 589: ... line and test installa tion for leaks Defective mechanism Replace instrument Rate of climb indi cates when aircraft is banked Pointer has to be set before every flight Pointer cannot be reset to zero Instrument reads very low during climb or descent Water in static line Temperature compen sator inoperative Diaphragm distorted Case of instrument or line broken or leaking Disconnect static lines an...

Page 590: ...o indicate a higher altitude 10 39 TROUBLESHOOTING TABLEX V ALTIMETER Trouble Cause Remedy Excessivescaleerror Excessivepointer oscillation High or low reading Setting knob is hard to turn Inner reference marker failsto movewhen setting knob is rotated Setting knob set screwloose or missing Cracked or loose coverglass Improper calibration adjustment Defectivemechanism Improperventing Wronglubricat...

Page 591: ...providesa meansof indicatingthe speedof the airplane passing through the air The airspeed indication dependson the differentialpressurebetween pitot air pressureand static air pressure This instrument has the diaphragmvented to the pitot air sourceand the caseisvented to the static air system As the airplane increases speed the pitot air pressure increases causing the diaphragm to expand A mechani...

Page 592: ...elf of ice with switch ON Circuit breaker popped Open circuit Excessivevoltage drop between battery and pitot head Heatingelement burned out instru out li to pit Reset Repai Check head Repla ce instrument leak and correct ace instrument leak and correct gn pitot static ve linesfromstatic ments and blow nes fromcockpit ot static head ir voltageat pitot ce pitot head NOTE When any connections in sta...

Page 593: ...t External magnetic interference Locate magneticinter ferenceand eliminate if possible Excessivecard oscillation Improper mounting on instrument panel Aligninstrument Insufficientliquid Replaceor repair instrument Cardsluggish Weakcard magnet Replaceor repair instrument Instrument too heavilycompensated Excessivepivot fric tion or broken jewel Removeexcess compensation Replaceor repair instrument ...

Page 594: ...d to the instrument through a line A pointer indicates the manifold pressureavailableat the engine in inchesof mercury 10 50 TROUBLESHOOTING TABLEX VIII MANIFOLDPRESSUREINDICATOR Trouble Cause Remedy Excessiveerror at existing barometric pressure Excessiveerror when engine is running Sluggishor jerky pointer movement Pointer shifted Line leaking Defectiveinstrument Restricted filter element Replac...

Page 595: ...her permanent or intermittent Broken drivecable Springsweak Replacecable Replaceinstrument Loosecablecon nections Tighten cable Pointer oscillates excessively Rough spot on or sharp bend in cable Excessivefriction in instrument Indicator changesin climb Pointer goes allthe way to stop more noticeablein cold weather Pointerjumps at idle Tachometer cable breaks Excessiveclearancein speed cup Excessi...

Page 596: ...proper calibration adjustment Replaceinstrument Replaceinstrument Excessivepointer oscillation Sluggishoperation of pointer or pres sure failsto build up Air in line or rough enginerelief valve Enginereliefvalve open Line restriction to instrument Disconnectline and fill with light oil Check for leaks If trouble persists clean and adjust relief valve Cleanand check Cleanand check Lossof oil in eng...

Page 597: ...ck diaphragmand relief valvesin enginepump Check for obstruction in electricpump Checkbypassvalve Air leak in intake lines Replacegauge Pressurelow or pressuresurges Obstruction in inlet side of pump Tracelinesand locate obstruction Faulty bypassvalve Replace Faulty diaphragm Replaceor rebuild pump Needlefluctuation Surgedome on pump filledwith fuel Removeand empty Air in line Loosenline at gauge ...

Page 598: ...terpret and respond to the displays The BALL portion of both instru ments is free to roll within the inclined glass tube display on lower instrument face The glass tube isfilled with non freezing liquid to dampen the movements of the ball within the tube It must be realized the BALL portion of both instruments ONLY INDICATES SIDE FORCES The Turn and Bank rotor is driven either electrically or by a...

Page 599: ...3B21 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 600: ...t Replacefuel transmitter Checkwiring Replace Fuel gaugeindicates empty or approximately half full when tanks are full Short to ground l eaking float Checkwiring Replace 10 72 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Refer to paragraph 10 94of this section 10 73 OIL TEMPERATUREINDICATOR 10 74 GENERAL The oil temperature indicator is mounted in the instrument cluster on the instrument panel This instrument will pro...

Page 601: ...lary Wiring wiringto instrument open Excessiveerror Improper calibration Replaceinstrument adjustment Pointer failsto Brokenor damaged Checkengine unit and move as engineis capillaryor open wiring warmed up wiring Dullor discolored Age Replaceinstrument marking 110 76 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Refer to paragraph 10 94of this section Reissued 9 23 80 INSTRUMENTS 3B23 ...

Page 602: ...ould be performed before removing the instrument a The thermocouple probe should be removed and cleaned at each 100hour inspection This will ensure good and rapid response to temperature changes The following procedure should be used 1 Detach the thermocouple leads from the extension lead if necessary Do not detach if the probe can be removed and cleaned with leads attached 2 Unscrew the attaching...

Page 603: ...7 ohms TOTALRESISTANCE 8 ohms INDICATORIMPEDANCE 8 ohms 10 84 TROUBLESHOOTING TABLEX XV EXHAUSTGASTEMPERATUREGAUGE Trouble Cause Remedy Gaugeinoperative MasterSwitchOFF Turn switchON Circuit breaker OUT Defectivegauge probe or wiring Adjustingpotentio meter turned off scale Pushbreaker IN Checkprobe and lead wiresfor chafing breaksor shorting between wiresand or metal structure Resetpotentiometer ...

Page 604: ...his section 10 90 FUEL FLOWGAUGE 10 91 GENERAL The fuel flow gaugeis a non electricdifferentialpressure gaugemounted in the bottom of the instrument panel This instrument measures flow by reading the pressure drop across a fixed orifice located in the fuel divider With a constant fuel pressure being suppliedby the engine drivenpump and putting a fixed orifice in the fuel divider head and then meas...

Page 605: ...trument connections for easeof installation CAUTION DONOT use thread lube on fittings or in ports of gyros The use of thread lube can cause contamination which shortens the life expectancy of the gyro and cause premature failure Any evidence of thread lube will create a WARRANTY VOID CONDITION Makesure that all air linesare cleanand free of oil grease pipe compound or any foreign particles or resi...

Page 606: ...other intruments tubing or airframe members when the engines are started or stopped e Are unused ports correctly sealed against air leaks f Is the system pressure correct and does the pressure gauge givean accurate reading g Is the pressure regulator adjusted correctly and functioning properly h Is proper voltage available i Is electrical grounding intact j Is circuit breaker correct or faulty k A...

Page 607: ...e Green Arc Normal Operating Range Yellow Arc Caution Range Yellow Arc Caution Range Radial Red Line Minimum Maximum 60 to 90 PSI 25 to 60 PSI 90 to 100 PSI 25 PSI 100 PSI Oil Temperature Green Arc Normal Operating Range Yellow Arc Caution Range Radial Red Line Never Exceed Flap Indicator White Arc Range of Flap Permitted for Take Off 120 to 245 F 50 to 120 F 245 F 0 to 15 Airspeed Indicator Green...

Page 608: ...l life of approximately 24 months To replace the battery it will be necessary to remove the clock from the instrument panel a Remove the four screws which secure the clock to the panel b Reaching up behind the instrument panel remove the clock from its position and move it to a more accessible location c Remove the screw from the back of the clock and gently separate the case from the face d Repla...

Page 609: ...decimal point annunciator over the CLOCK legend and to place the display in the CLOCK mode 2 Press the SET button once The digital display will indicate the date Advance to the desired month by pressing the DT AV button 3 Press the SET button once Advance to the desired day by pressing the DT AV button 4 Press the SET button twice Advance to the desired hour by pressing the DT AV button 5 Press th...

Page 610: ...3C24 11 15 Testing of Alternator 3D 11 16 Precautions 3D2 11 17 Alternator Nomenclature 3D3 11 18 Regulator 3D3 11 19 Regulator Components 3D3 11 20 Operation of Regulator 3D4 11 21 Balancing Circuit Operation 3D5 11 22 Preparation for Testing 3D5 11 23 Testing Regulator LAMAR 3D6 11 24 Adjusting Regulator LAMAR 3D7 11 25 Overvoltage Control D9 11 26 Purpose and Operation 3D9 11 27 Test Procedure ...

Page 611: ...tch 11 62 Removal of Door Ajar Switch 11 63 Installation of Door Ajar Switch 11 64 Adjustment of Door Ajar Switch 11 65 Electrical Switches 11 66 Switch and Circuit Breaker Panel 11 67 O erhead Switch Panel 11 68 Trim Indicator Lights 11 69 Replacementof Trim Indicator Lights 11 70 Cowl Flap Indicator Lights 11 71 Replacementof Cowl Flap Indicator Lights 11 72 Landing Lights 11 73 Removal of Landi...

Page 612: ... Strobe Power Supply Serial Nos 31 7305053 and up 3E3 11 95 Removal of Tail Strobe Power Supply Serial Nos 31 7305053 and up 3E4 11 96 Installation of Tail Strobe Power Supply Serial Nos 31 7305053 and up 3E4 11 97 Troubleshooting 3E4 11 98 Recognition Lights 3E5 11 99 Removal of Inflight Recognition Lights 3E5 11 100 Installation of Inflight Recognition Lights 3E5 11 101 Removal of Anti Collision...

Page 613: ...y for Electro Luminescent Panels 11 120 Removal of Annunciator Controller 11 121 Installation of Annunciator Controller 11 122 Removal of Annunciator Panel 11 123 Installation of Annunciator Panel 11 124 Chimes Assembly 11 125 Removal of Chimes Assembly 11 126 Installation of Chimes Assembly Aerofiche Grid No 3E8 3E8 3E9 3E9 3E9 3E9 3E9 3E9 3E10 3E10 3E10 NOTE Refer to Table XI XI for the Index of...

Page 614: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 3C12 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 615: ... panel b Tworotating beacons Serial Nos 31 7305001to 31 7305052 onemounted on the fin tip and one mounted on the bottom ofthe fuselage controlled byasingleswitchand thermal circuitbreaker locatedin the left sidepanel Three strobe lights are incorporated on aircraft with Serial Nos 31 7305053 and up There is one strobe light on each of the wing tips and one on the tail As optional equipment a groun...

Page 616: ...Figure11 1 Overhead SwitchPanel NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 1269 A 3C14 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 617: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL C Figure 11 2 Switchand CircuitBreakerControl Panel Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3C15 ...

Page 618: ...ntensity of the lights and a circuit breaker located in the left side panel controls power to the annunciator panel The gear oil temperature cylinder head temperature and fuel quantity indicators and their associated sender units are protected by a single circuit breaker The left and right turn indicators are each connected directiv to the main distribution bus through its own circuit breaker The ...

Page 619: ... explained in their respectivesections 11 3 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubles peculiar to the electrical system are listed in Table XI VIalong with their probable causesand suggestedremedies The wiring diagrams included in the manual willgivea physical breakdown of the different electrical circuits used in the airplane Refer to Table XI I for list of Electrical System Schematics After the trouble has been ...

Page 620: ...he appropriate button LEFT or RIGHT located above the ammeter on the overhead switch panel A shunt is installedbetween aircraft electrical busand the positive terminal of the battery to allowmeasuringof the battery chargeand dischargecurrent with its ammeter An alternator inoperative INOP warning light is provided for each alternator The appropriate light willilluminate wheneverits respectivealter...

Page 621: ...or transient voltageprotection Three positive rectifiers are mounted in the rectifier mounting plate whilethe three negative rectifiers are mounted in the slip ring end head Each pair of rectifiers is connected to a stator lead with high temperature solder The stator leadsare anchored to the rectifier mounting plate with epoxy cement for vibration protection d The stator contains a speciallead whi...

Page 622: ...AINSERVICE MANUAL TO STARTIR AND FLAP SOL C P THISFIGURE FOR REFERENCEPURPOSESONLY FOR TROUBLESHOOTING SCHEMATICS REFER TO TABLE XI I Figure 11 4 Alternator ParallelingSystem Reissued 9 23 80 3C20 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 623: ...lows the output circuitis operational g Should there be no indication of voltage trace back through the output circuit until voltage is indicated Refer to Figure 11 4 A component that does not indicate voltageat both its input and output terminalsshould be replaced h Check the field circuit by connectinga voltmeter to the previouslydisconnected field F 2 lead If a reading of approximately I to 3 v...

Page 624: ...ssembly in the slip ring end head Removethe brush and holder assemblyfrom the end head b Remove the safety wire from the through bolts Hold the pulley with a strap wrenchand remove the pulley nut The pulley must be removed with a puller Removethe fan woodruff key and spacerfrom the shaft c Remove the four through bolts and tap the driveend headlightly to separate the driveend head and rotor as a u...

Page 625: ...t or poles To test for shorted turns in the rotor winding connect a voltmeter ammeter and rheostat as shown in Figure 11 10 or use an ohmmeter Rotor current draw andresistanceare listed in the Alternator Service Test Specifications paragraph Excessive current draw or a low ohmmeter reading indicates shorted windings No current draw or an infinite ohmmeter reading would indicate an open winding b R...

Page 626: ...overheating If all other electrical checks are normal and alternator fails to supply its rated output the stator should be replaced to determine whether or not it is the faulty component d Bearingsand Seals Wheneverthe alternator is overhauled new bearingsand oil or greaseseals are recommended even though the bearings and seals appear to be in good condition A faulty seal can cause an alternator t...

Page 627: ...e there is no mechanicalinterference Torque the through bolts to 30 to 35 inch pounds Safety wireshould be installed after the unit has been bench tested for output Install spacer woodruff key fan pulley lock washerand nut Torque the nut to 35 foot pounds using a strap wrench to hold the pulley Do not install the blast tube assemblyuntil after the unit has been bench tested g Install the brush and...

Page 628: ...ng the electrical system a Disconnect the battery before connectingor disconnectingtest instruments except voltmeter or before removing or replacing any unit or wiring Accidental grounding or shorting at the regulator alternator ammeter or accessories willcauseseveredamageto the units and or wiring b The alternator must not be operated on open circuit with the rotor windingenergized c Do not attem...

Page 629: ...at is installed after the alternator has been assembled The brush holder has a small hole that intersects the brush cavities Use a pin or a piece of wire as shown in Figure 11 16 to hold the brushes in the holder during assembly Remove the pin after the brush holder retaining screws have been tightened Make a continuity check to be sure the brushes are seated against the slip rings d Drive Pulley ...

Page 630: ...t the junction of R1 and R2 and the reference voltage across Z1 are applied to comparison transistor Q1 R3 is adjusted so that these voltages are balanced with the desired alternator output voltagepresent on the BUS terminal of the regulator d Thereafter wheneveralternator output voltage as applied to the BUS terminal fallsbelow the desired regulation value the comparison transistor Q1 will supply...

Page 631: ...ators to their respectivealternator fields i The balancing circuit will thus automatically maintain at a low value the difference voltage applied to the alternator fields In a parallel system havingidentical alternators operatingat the same RPM the output currents of the alternators will thus be maintained nearly equal j In whichever regulator of a pair is set to deliver the highest voltage the ba...

Page 632: ...st be in good condition and should be fully charged i The voltmeter and ammeter should be of the best quality and shouldbe accurate j A carbon pileconnected across the battery may be used to load the chargingcircuit whiletesting the regulator 11 23 TESTINGREGULATOR Lamar a The procedure for testing the regulator whether on the airplaneor on the test bench remainsthe same Connect the test meters an...

Page 633: ...est equipment connected as shown in Figure 11 20 The balance adjustment is made while operating only one engine either left or right The engine to be operated must be selectedso as to permit the techniciana completelysafeaccessto both of the regulators so that they may be adjusted whilethe engine is operatingwithout danger Weshall designate the engine selected to be operated as RIGHT and the inope...

Page 634: ...nt to a point wherethe voltmeter willreada lowvalue Anyreading fromzeroto8 0voltsis acceptable A stable reading should not beexpected A lowermeterrangesuchas 10 voltsmay beusedfor this adjustment Nowreconnect the wireto join the PAR terminals of the two regulators and observethat the voltmeterdrops toa verylowvalue 0 2to 0 5 volt andit willbestable Continue operationsin thismanner for 5 to 10minut...

Page 635: ...ue thereby opening the relay contactsand disconnectingthe field circuit of the alternator c The relay contacts will remain open until the alternator switch is turned off Figure 11 21 illustrates the overvoltagecontrol connected in a typical Prestoliteinsulated field alternator 11 27 TEST PROCEDURE Connect the relay as shownin Figure 11 22 Usea 100 ohm potentiometer of 15 watt rating or more to adj...

Page 636: ...mmeter and set it to 60 volts D C Connect the positivelead of the VOMto the output LOAD terminal of the LEFT overvoltagerelay Connect the negativelead of the VOMto airframe ground f Increase the output voltage of the variable D C power supply until the LEFT overvoltagerelay trips out An audible click willbe heard when the relay operates and the VOMneedlemust drop to zero volts Record the power sup...

Page 637: ...sion accordingly TABLE XI ll ALTERNATOR BELT TENSION Widthof Torque Indicated at Belt Condition Alternator Pulley 3 8 inch New 11 to 13 ft lbs 3 8 inch Used 7 to 9 ft lbs 1 2 inch New 13 to 15 ft lbs 1 2 inch Used 9 to 11 ft lbs NOTE SEE PAR 14 108FOR ALTERNATEBELT TENSION WITH FREON COMPRESSOR INSTALLED NOTE The higher tension specifiedfor a new belt is to compensate for the initial stretch that ...

Page 638: ...rough the armature winding to ground The magnetic force created in the armature combined with that created in the field windingsbeginsto turn the armature The gear cut on the drive end of the armature shaft extends through the gearhousing where it is supported by a roller bearing The gear mates with the teeth of the reduction gear that drivesthe bendix shaft The shaft is keyed to the reduction gea...

Page 639: ... in armature shaft at drive end and pack gear box with 1 3 to 2 0 ounces of Lithium Soap Base Grease 1925 Molytex O or equivalent d The starting motor should be operated for a few seconds with engine ignition off to make sure that the pinion engages properly and that it turns freely without binding or excessive noise Then the engine should be started two or three times to see that the pinion disen...

Page 640: ...or rough bearing surfaces and rough or damaged splines b To test the armature for grounds a set of test probes connected inseries with a I10 volt light should be used Touch one probe to a commutator segment and the other to the armature core If the test lamp lights the armature is grounded and should be replaced c To test for shorted armature coils a growler is used Refer to Figure 11 25 The armat...

Page 641: ...DLE AND PINION HOUSING BEARINGS Unless replacement of a needle bearing assembly is necessary do not remove it from the gear housing If the needle bearing assembly has been removed replacement should be made with an arbor press and with the assembly pressed in flush with the edge of the casting The needle bearing on the armature side must be flush with the side of the casting toward the armature an...

Page 642: ...r always use an arbor press and the proper bearing arbor for installing graphitized bronze and roller bearings The Bendix shaft should have a thin film of Lubriplate 777 or equivalent on the Bendix portion of the shaft No dimensional specification for end play is necessary however make sure the fiber thrust washer is on the drive end of the armature shaft and that a steel thrust washer is on each ...

Page 643: ...d cranking power Maketest connections as shownin Figure 11 28 c If torque and current are not within specifications check the seatingof the brushes and internal connections for highresistance If these checks are made and found to be in good order replace frame and field assemblyand retest starter 11 45 STARTINGMOTORCONTROLCIRCUIT a Inspect the control circuit wiring between the battery solenoidand...

Page 644: ...Access to the battery is through the nose baggage compartment panel The stainless steel box has a plastic drain tube located on the bottom side near the right rear corner which is normally closed off with a clamp and should be opened occasionally to drain off any accumulation of liquid The battery should be checked for fluid level but must not be filled above the baffle plates A hydrometer check s...

Page 645: ...to enter battery Repeat application until all bubblingaction has ceased c Washbattery and box with clean water and dry d Closebattery box drain tube clamp e Asnecessary paint the battery box with an acid resistant paint f Check battery vent tubing is not blocked or kinked Replace as necessary 11 51a CLEANING OF VENT HOSES AND VENTS Due to the required length of the vent linesthe following cleaning...

Page 646: ...ith a power cart and the airplane s battery is nearly depleted the procedure in step a need not be followed The capacity of a power cart is sufficient to start an aircraft with a low battery If a six volt battery is available it can be connected in series with the 24 volt external battery to supply 30 volts for starting In this case use the samestarting procedure as used with a power cart CAUTION ...

Page 647: ... The lamp is located above each passengerwindow withthe airvents a Placing a flat tool between the trim molding and plate at the center between the two control units pry the plate out being carefulnot to bend it b Removethe ground wire from the light assemblyand removethe cover overthe lamp c Replacethe lamp usingthe proper number 11 60 INSTALLATIONOF LAMPIN OVERHEADREADINGLIGHTS a Replace the cov...

Page 648: ...ringare not damaged 11 67 OVERHEADSWITCHPANEL Removalof the overhead switchesdoes not require the removalof the trim panel The switches are held in place with clips and can be removed by pulling them out and replaced by pushingthem back into the clipslocated in the panel assembly 11 68 TRIM INDICATORLIGHTS 11 69 REPLACEMENTOF TRIM INDICATOR LIGHTS The trim indicator lights are located in the contr...

Page 649: ... of the housing Refer to Figure 11 29 Align the bracket longitudinally and secure with clamps The light beam angle may be adjusted by the adjustment screwsat the sides of the bracket and tilting as desired 11 75 POSITIONLIGHTS 11 76 REMOVALOF WING TIP POSITIONLIGHT The wing tip position lights are located on each wingtip insidea plexiglascover a Remove the screwssecuringthe plexiglascoverto the wi...

Page 650: ...NG 11 81 REMOVALOF RED FIN TIP ANTI COLLISION LIGHT SerialNos 31 7305001 to 31 7305052 a Loosenscrew securingthe ring clampto the baseof the red strobe lensenough to remove the ring clamp b Removethe lens c Pull strobe tube out of its socket NOTE If removal of the tube socket is desired proceed to the next step If not proceed to paragraph 11 82 step d d Removescrewssecuringfin tip to the fin e Lif...

Page 651: ...raft skin 11 85 REMOVAL OF WING TIP ANTI COLLISION LIGHTS The wing tip anti collision lights are located on each wing tip insidea plexiglascover a Remove the screwssecuringthe plexiglascoverto the wingtip and remove the cover b Remove the screw securingthe lensretainer and remove lensand retainer c Remove the three screwssecuringthe light bracket assembly d Cut the three wiresto the strobe lamp at...

Page 652: ...ith the appropriate screws e Install navigationlight previouslyremoved f Replace lensand lensretainer and secure with the appropriate screws 11 89 REMOVALOF RED STROBE POWERSUPPLY Serial Nos 31 7305001 to 31 7305052 The red strobe power supply is mounted on the forward sideof the longitudinal beam at sta 203 a Remove passengerseats from the right sideof the airplane b Remove carpet from over the r...

Page 653: ...previously removed b Insert other screw through the three ground wireterminals and install and secureto strobe power supply c Connect white wireto wirefrom circuit protector at quick disconnect connector d Install two plugs into their correct sockets on the power supply e Install andsecure accessplate between sta 35 and sta 57 11 93 REMOVALOF WINGTIP STROBEPOWERSUPPLY Serial Nos 31 7305053 and up ...

Page 654: ...across the xenon flash tube which is designed to hold off the 450 voltsDC applied until the flash tube is triggeredby an external pulse This pulseis generated by a solidstate timing circuit in the power supply When troubleshooting the strobe light system it must first be determined whether the trouble is in the flash tube or the power supply Replacement of the flash tube willconfirm whether the tu...

Page 655: ...ctor to pin 1of tube socket pin 2of AMP connectorto pin6and 7oftube socketand pin3of AMPconnector topin4of tube socket Whenmakingthese tests if no continuity exists the tube socket assemblyis broken and should be replaced 4 Checkfor continuitybetweenpin 1of AMP connector topins 4 6and 7ofthe tubesocketand pin 2of AMP connectorto pins 1and 4 of tube socket If continuityexiststhe tube socketassembly...

Page 656: ...crewspreviously removed b Reconnect the electrical connector c Install aft panel in rear baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws 11 105 STALL WARNING HORN INDICATOR AND DETECTOR The stall warning system consists of a lift detector which is electronically connected to a stall warning horn and light As stalling conditions are approached the lift detector will activate the stall warnin...

Page 657: ...COCKPIT LIGHTING The lighting in the cockpit area of the Navajo Chieftain is controlled by several typesof electricalpower connections The overhead map lightsare controlled by on off switcheslo cated on the forward part of the overhead panel In the centerof the overhead panel is the potentiometer for the pilot s flight panel all instruments placards and dials necessaryfor the pilot s flightoperati...

Page 658: ...E DIMMER Serial Nos 31 7305001to 31 7352171 The fol lowing procedures apply to the panel lights dimmer only a Remove the screwssecuring the royalite overhead trim panel and let hang b Remove the knob from the potentiometer in the center of the panel c Remove the nut securing the potentiometer to the front of the panel d Pull the potentiometer out of the overhead panel e Disconnect connector E308 f...

Page 659: ...ched from the airplane 11 121 INSTALLATION OF ANNUNCIATOR CONTROLLER a Position the annunciator controller with mounting bracket attached inits properlocation on the radio support shelfwith the electrical connection facing aft b Secure the unit by installing appropriate screwsthrough the mounting bracket c Connect the electrical connection to the unit d Install the accesspanel between Sta 35 00and...

Page 660: ...Remove access panel c Disconnect electrical connector d Remove securing screws from chimes assembly and remove 11 126 a b c d INSTALLATION OF CHIMES ASSEMBLY Position chimes assembly on shelf mount and secure with appropriate screws Reconnect electrical connector Replace access panel and secure with appropriate screws Place power on circuit by pushing in circuit breaker and run an operational chec...

Page 661: ...or loosecon nections Defectivestarter solenoidor control switch Binding worn or im properly seated brush or brusheswith ex cessiveside play Checkand rechargeif necessary Refer to wiringdiagram and check all wiring Replace faulty unit Brushesshould be a free fit in the brush boxes without excessiveside play Bindingbrushesand brush boxes should be wipedclean with a gasoline undoped moistened cloth A...

Page 662: ...r metal particles Dirty commutator Shorted grounded or open armature Grounded or open field circuit If commutator is rough or dirty smooth and polish with No 000 sandpaper If too rough and pitted removeand turn down Blowout all particles Removeand replace with an armature known to be in good condition Test and then replace with new part Motor operates at proper speedbut failsto crank engine Lowmot...

Page 663: ...Cleanas outlined above Test and replace defec tive parts Excessivewearand arcing of motor brushes Rough or scoredcom mutator Removeand turn commutator down on a lathe Armature assemblynot concentric Refacecommutator BATTERY24 V Battery will not hold charge Battery worn out Replacebattery Chargingrate not set right Reset Dischargetoo great to replace Standing too long Equipment left ON accidentally...

Page 664: ... Hold down loose Replacebattery and NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL Compound on top of battery melts Electrolyte runs out of vent plugs Excessivecorrosion insidecontainer Battery freezes Frozen battery Chargingrate too high Too much water added to battery Spillagefrom over fillings Vent lines leaking or clogged Dischargedbattery Wateradded and battery not charged immediately tighten Replace Reduce ...

Page 665: ...LENOID Replacebattery Does not operate Open circuit Repairwiring Dirty contacts on connector plug Open circuited solenoid coil Plungerbinding Clean contacts Replaceunit Removeand wash plunger and housing thoroughly with carbon tetrachloride Changespring compression only as a last resort Intermittent operation Short circuited coil Looseelec trical connection Replacecoil Cleanand tighten electricalc...

Page 666: ... LIGHTS MAP LIGHTS DOME LIGHTS DOOR UNSAFE LIGHT NO SMOKING FASTEN SEAT BELT 15 FAN MOTOR 10 LEFT FLAP MOTOR RIGHT FLAP MOTOR 10 LEFT FUEL PUMP RIGHT FUEL PUMP 5 FUEL QUAN INDICATORS OIL TEMP INDICATORS CYL HD TEMP INDICATORS GEAR POSITION LIGHTS 5 SELECTOR LOCK SOLENOID MOTION LIGHT WARNING HORN LANDING LIGHT GROUND SOLENOID GROUND WARNING RELAY 5 FAN MOTOR 20 FAN MOTOR 15 HEATER ASSEMBLY BLOWER ...

Page 667: ...L RELAY INDICATOR LIGHT 5 TRIM INDICATOR SYSTEM PNEUMATIC SOURCE INDICATOR 5 TURN BANK INDICATOR 25 HEATED WINDSHIELD 10 WIPER MOTOR 25 MOTOR 3 3 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 MAX CURRENT PER UNIT 28 5V 0 90 1 04 0 01 16 0 0 60 0 16 2 80 0 50 0 01 0 24 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 20 0 20 0 04 0 42 0 04 0 82 22 6 4 60 12 0 ADF 1 ADF 2 AUDIO AUTOPILOT AVIONICS 5 ADF T12C OR ADF T12D BENDIX KR ...

Page 668: ...COMM IIA NARCO MP 10 CONVERTER XMITT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 XMITT RCV XMITT RCV XM ITT RCV XMITT RCV XMITT RCV XMITT RCV XMITT RCV XMITT RCV 1 1 I 1 1 1 45 1 50 1 60 1 70 2 85 3 50 3 00 0 60 0 25 0 39 0 25 095 6 20 0 62 5 40 1 25 5 40 1 25 4 MAX 0 80 5 80 1 90 5 00 1 50 0 18 065 0 30 0 70 0 30 0 60 0 60 9 55 2 85 15 0 2 50 5 00 9 17 0 90 1 14 1 35 VOA 8 VOA 9 INDICATORS VOA 40 VOA 60M INDICATORS NAV II...

Page 669: ... 2 Tail Strobe SeeNote 2 Trim Indicator Voltmeter WingInspection WingTip Position SeeNote 1 WingTip Position SeeNote 2 WingTip Strobe See Note 2 472 861 472 028 472 047 453 792 472 028 472 047 453 791 472 028 758 151 472 028 472 028 472 755 472 028 453 791 753 476 472 028 472 047 472 028 472 028 758 418 472 769 472 052 472 028 758 472 472 052 472 058 453 886 761 214 753 440 472 028 758 293 757 634...

Page 670: ...anels are mixed in the same aircraft Use the followingprocedure on the green light panels only Insert in series with the black lead the components listed below for that particular panel PANEL Air Control LandingGear Strip Light Switch PanelLight Switch Windshield Pitot Heat Revised 10 5 83 COMPONENT Resistor Resistor Resistor Resistor Resistor VALUE 47K 47K 47K 47K 47K ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3E20 ...

Page 671: ...NUMBER SANDLOCATIONS CIRCUITS A C F G H L P Q RP RZ J AUTOPILOT CONTROLSURFACE FLIGHT INSTRUMENT LANDINGGEAR HEATER VENTILATING DEICING LIGHTING POWER FUEL OIL ENGINEINSTRUMENT RADIOPOWER RADIOAUDIO IGNITION E 100Series Left Wingand Nacelle E 200 Series Right Wingand Nacelle E 300 Series Aft Fuselage E400 Series Forward Fuselage ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Revised 10 5 83 3E21 ...

Page 672: ...YPE BUSBAR PUSH TYPE PUSH PULL TYPE ALTERNATOR CIGAR LIGHTER BEACON THERMAL SWITCH ELECTRICALCLUTCH FUSE RESISTOR TERMINALBLOCK POTENTIOMETER LAMP GROUND SWITCH CONDUCTORS CONDUCTORS INSULATED CONNECTOR CONDUCTORS CROSSINGAND JUNCTIONS OF CONDUCTORS THE DOT AT THE INTERSECTION INDICATESA JOININGOF CONDUCTORS Revised 10 5 83 3E22 ELECRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 673: ...52095 and up 3F15 11 31 Beverage Unit Early Models 3F4 I 32 S N 31 7752001 and up 3F4 Cabin Divider Rear 11 78 S N 31 7305001 to 31 7652177 3G15 DEICE SYSTEMS 11 68 Heated Lift Detector Pneumatic Deice Systems 11 106 S N 31 7305001 to 31 7652123 3120 I1 107 S N 31 7652124 to 31 8052004 3121 11 108 SN 31 8052005 and up 3122 11 48 Pitot Heat 3F13 11 105 Prop Deice 3120 11 49 Windshield Heat 3F13 ELE...

Page 674: ... 31 8052001 to 31 8152113 3GI 11 104 S N 31 8152113 and up 3119 11 30 Ground VentFan Early Models 3F4 11 32 S N 31 7752001 and up 3F4 FLAP SYSTEMS 11 69 Cowl Flaps 3G5 Wing Flaps Dukes Installation 11 73a When Kit No 763 822 NOT installed S N 31 5001 to 31 7752192 3G9 11 73b When Kit No 763 822 IS installed S N 31 5001 thru 31 7752192 and S N 31 7852001 and up 3G9 Wing Flaps Calco 11 74 S N 31 730...

Page 675: ...tmeter 11 60 S N 31 7305153 to 31 7652177 3F20 11 61 S N 31 7752001 and up 3F21 LANDING GEAR SYSTEMS 11 89 Gear and Safety Solenoid Early Models 3HI3 11 90 Gear and Safety Solenoid Later Models 3H15 Gear and Safety Solenoid 11 91 S N 31 7952001 to 31 825020 3H17 11 92 S N 31 8252021 and up 3H19 LIGHTING EXTERNAL Anti Collision Rotating Beacon 11 44 S N 31 7305001 to 31 7305052 3FII Anti Collision ...

Page 676: ... Courtesy Lights With Timer Installation Optional 11 109 S N 31 8352001 and up 3123 Cabin Lighting 11 95 S N 31 7852001 to 31 7852171 311 11 96 S N 31 7952001 to 31 8052221 Early Models 313 11 97 S N 31 7952001 to 31 8052221 Later Models 315 11 98 S N 31 8152001 and up 317 Panel Lighting 11 85 S N 31 7305001 to 31 7652177 3H5 11 86 S N 31 7752001 to 31 7852171 3H7 11 87 S N 31 7952001 to 31 795225...

Page 677: ...Lights and Switches S N 31 7305001 to 31 7652177 S N 31 7752001 to 31 7752193 Chimes Optional S N 31 8152001 and up Stall Warning SN 31 7305001 to 31 7552075 S N 31 7552076 to 31 7652076 31 7652078 and 31 7752001 and up Stall Warning With Time Delay S N 31 7652077 31 7652079 to 31 8152113 S N 31 8252021 and up WINDSHIELDSYSTEMS Windshield Heat System Windshield Wiper 3F17 3H21 3H23 3F18 3G2 3G3 3G...

Page 678: ...CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 44741 S 44741 S UNIT Figure 11 31 BeverageUnit Early Models NOTE 2 NOTES 1 7 5 AMP C B ON LATER MODELS 2 CONN E302A ON LATER MODELS Figure 11 32 BeverageUnit and Ground Vent Fan S N PA 31 7752001and up 3F4 Revised 2 8 82 ELECTRICALSYSTEM ...

Page 679: ...2CONN E 302CONN E 301CONN Figure11 33 Landing Taxi andWingInspectionLights Early Models LTS LANDING TAS LTS SAFETY SOLENOID E302 CONN E 1CONN SEE NOTE SEENOTE2 NOTES 1 CONN E321AON LATERMODELS 2 CONN E302AON LATERMODELS 3 CONN E103A ONLATER MODELS Figure 11 33 Landing Taxi andWingInspectionLights S N sPA 31 7752001 andup Revised 3 31 94 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3F5 ...

Page 680: ...AJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL EL203 Figure 11 35 Fuel Pumps Left and Right Early Models EL204 44741 FUEL LEFT SWITCHES Figure 11 36 Fuel Pump Left S N PA 31 7752001and up Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3F6 ...

Page 681: ... E204 44741 TO LEFT C P I FUEL PUMP RIGHT Figure 11 37 Fuel Pump Right S N PA 31 7752001andup 44741 S TO TRIM a COWL FLAP IDN 5 Figure 11 38 Pneumatic Indicators S N PA 31 7305001to 31 7652177 Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3F7 ...

Page 682: ...S INDICATOR SWITCH NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL Figure 11 39 Pneumatic Indicators S N PA 31 7752001to 31 7752193 EL205 44741 Figure 11 40 Pneumatic Indicators S N PA 31 7852001and up Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3F8 ...

Page 683: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL EL20 44741 Figure 11 41 Position Lights S N PA 31 7305001 to 31 7305052 Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3F9 ...

Page 684: ...652177 POSITION LIGHTS RIGHT WING ROOT NOTES 1 PIN 2 CONN E312B ON LATER MODELS 2 CON E312A ON LATERMODELS Figure 11 43 Position Lights S N PA 31 7752001and up 3 CONN E302A ON LATERMODELS 4 CONN E102 ON LATER MODELS PIN 3 CONN E206 ON LATERMODELS Rebsued 9 23 80 ELECTRCALSYSTEM 3F10 ...

Page 685: ...AVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICE MANUAL Figure 11 44 Rotating Beacons S N PA 31 7305001to 31 7305052 44741 A ANTI COLLISIO LIGHTS Figure 11 45 Strobe Lights S N PA 31 7305053to 31 7652177 Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3F11 ...

Page 686: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL EL207 NOTES NOTE 1 4414 SEE NOTE2 1 CONN 302A ON LATER MODELS ...

Page 687: ...HIELD HEATING ELEMENT NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICE MANUAL 44741 Figure 11 48 Pitot Heat Right and Left 42637 E073695 1 5 2 0 OHMS ATHEATING WLEMENTS HEATED WINDSHIELD SWITCH Revised 3 31 94 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3F13 ...

Page 688: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICEMANUAL INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EL19 44115 BUS Figure 11 50 Windshield Wiper Revised 10 5 83 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3F14 ...

Page 689: ...CIGARLIGHTER WIRINGON EARLIER MODELS EL218 44741 Figure 11 51 Cigar Lighter S N PA 31 7752096 to 31 8052094 E303 CONN PEDESTALCIGAR LIGHTER LEFT AND RIGHT CIGAR LIGHTERS NOT AFFECTIVE ON MODELS LEFT CIGAR Figure 11 52 Cigar Lighter S N PA 31 8052095 and up ELECTRICALSYSTEM Revised 10 5 83 3F15 ...

Page 690: ...3 Avionics Master and EmergencySwitch Circuit EL229 44741 ANTI COLLISION SWITCH EL229 49515 RECOG IDENT 5 AMP OTES Figure11 54 RecognitionLights S N PA 31 7852001 and up Revised 10 5 83 Figure 11 55 Ground RecognitionBeacon S N PA 31 7952001and up ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3F16 ...

Page 691: ...OM BATTERY SWITCH Figure 11 56 Ground Clearance Switch Optional EL230 44741 SEE NOTE CONN E302 L174EE CONN E301 CABIN DOOR AJAR SWITCHES SEE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL NOTE CONN E302A ON LATERMODELS Figure 11 57 Cabin Door Ajar Switches S N PA 31 7852001and up Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3F17 ...

Page 692: ...TO CABIN LIGHTS NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL EL233 71619 SEECABINLIGHTS CONN E328 CABIN LTS CHIMES SPEAKER Figure 11 58 Chimes S N PA 31 8152001and up INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Revised 10 5 83 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3F18 ...

Page 693: ...Figure 11 59 Trim and Cowl Flap Indicators S N PA 31 7305001to 31 7305152 Reissued 9 23 80 3F19 ELECTRICALSYSTEM ...

Page 694: ...Figure 11 60 Trim and Cowl FlapIndicators Voltmeter S N PA 31 7305153to 31 7652177 Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3F20 ...

Page 695: ...Figure 11 61 Trim and Cowl Flap Indicators Voltmeter S N PA 31 7752001and up Revised 2 8 82 3F21 3F21 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 696: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 3F22 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 697: ...Figure 11 63 Heater Blowerand CigarLighter S N PA 31 7305001to 31 7652027 Revised 2 8 82 3F23 ELECTRICALSYSTEM ...

Page 698: ...XFORCIGARLIGHTER WIRING ON LATER MODELS NOTE COMPLETEDIAGRAM FORANY S N PAST 31 7622250 E 303 CONN Figure 11 64 Heater Blower and Cigar Lighter S N PA 31 7652028 to 31 8052000 Revised 3 5 84 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3F24 ...

Page 699: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL EL217 44741 NOTE CONN E101 ON LATER MODELS Figure 11 65 Heater and Blower S N PA 31 8052001 to 31 8152113 Revised 9 24 81 ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3G1 ...

Page 700: ...LIFT Figure 11 66 Stall Warning S N PA 31 7305001 to 31 7552075 Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3G2 ...

Page 701: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL EL220 44741 CONN E205 ON LATERMODELS Figure 11 67 Stall Warning S N PA 31 7552076 to 31 7652076 31 7652078 and 31 7752001 and up Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3G3 ...

Page 702: ...r NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL EL221 4741 71110 NOTES 1 OPTIONAL ION S N 31 8052001 AND UP 2 CONN E205 ON LATER MODELS Revised 2 8 82 3G4 ELECTRICALSYSTEM ...

Page 703: ...COWL FLAP MOTOR SEE NOTE 2 COWL FLAP BRAKE SOLENOID NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL EL222 44741 CLOSE NOTES 1 CONN E204 ON LATER MODELS 2 CONN E103 ON LATER MODELS Figure 11 69 Cowl Flap Motors Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3G5 ...

Page 704: ...EL223 44741 NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL NACELLE SCOOP Figure 11 70 Air Control with or without Air Conditioning SN PA 31 7305001 to 31 7952250 Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3G6 ...

Page 705: ...FT MODIFIED BY SERVICE BULLETIN 7041 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL EL224 44741 71103 CONN E 30 Figure 11 71 Air Control with or without Air Conditioning SN PA 31 8052001 to 31 8052187 Revised 10 5 83 3G7 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 706: ...NG PRESSUREAT 40 PSI AND CLOSES AT 10 PSI BELOW 10 PSI THE SWITCH REMAINS CLOSED ON AS CENDING PRESSURE Figure 11 72 Air Control With or Without Air Conditioning S N PA 31 8052188 to S N PA 31 8252020and up Revised 3 5 84 3G8 ELECTRICALSYSTEM ...

Page 707: ...Installation When Kit No 763 822NOT installed S N s 31 5001 thru 31 7752192 WING FLAP MOTOR Figure 11 73b Wing Flap Motor Dukes Installation S N s 31 5001 thru31 7752192 when Kit No 763 822 IS installed and SN s 31 7852001 and up Revised 3 31 94 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3G9 ...

Page 708: ...IOMETER NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL EL62 74249 WAS F35EE FLAP MALFUNCTION LIGHT Figure 11 74 ing Flap Motor Installation Calco Mod per ServiceKit 764 938L Ref ServiceLetter 959 Added 10 5 83 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3G10 ...

Page 709: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL EL227 49501 LAP MOTOR Figure 11 75 Wing Flap Motor Calco SN PA 31 7952001and up Revised 10 5 83 3G11 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 710: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL LIGHT Figure 11 76 Stall Warning With Time Delay S N PA 31 8252021and up Revised 10 5 83 3G12 ELECTRICALSYSTEM ...

Page 711: ...PRESSURE SWITCH OPENS ON DESCENDING PRESSURE AT 40 PSI AND CLOSES AT 10 PSI BELOW 10 PSI THE SWITCH REMAINS CLOSED ON AS CENDING PRESSURE Figure 11 7 Air Control Reg Fan Scoop Motor With Air Conditioning S PA 31 8252021and up Revised 10 5 83 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3G13 ...

Page 712: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 3G14 INTENTIONALLYLEFT BLANK ...

Page 713: ... RIGHT ENGINE MAGNETOS NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL STARTING VIBRATOR TO MASTER CONTACTOR EXTERNAL POWER SOLENOID LEFT ENGINE MAGNETOS TO FUEL PUMP SWITCHES Figure 11 78 Starter Rear Cabin Divider Panel and Hour Meter S N PA 31 7305001 to 31 7652177 Revised 10 5 83 3G15 3G16 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 714: ...ON S N PA 31 7952001 AND UP TO MASTER CONTACTOR EXTERNAL POWER PLUG SEE NOTE SEE NOTE 2 TO FUEL PUMP SWITCHES LEFT ENGINE MAGNETOS RIGHT ENGINE MAGNETOS NOTES 1 CONN E206 ON LATER MODELS 2 CONN E102 ON LATER MODELS Figure 11 79 Starter and Hourmeter S N PA 31 7752001 and up 3G17 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3G18 ...

Page 715: ... MANUAL EL303 44741 ALTERNATOR C P SW S 0 RIGHT ALTERNATOR 90 A LEFT E 306 CONN LEFT ALTERNATOR Figure 11 80 Alternators Master Contactor and Battery S N PA 31 7305001 to 31 7652177 Revised 10 5 83 3G19 3G20 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 716: ...W S RIGHT ALTERNATOR 90 A TO FUEL QUANTITY GAUGES TO BAG COMP 8 EXIT LTS ALTERNATOR INOPERATIVE SWITCH 8 LIGHT RIGHT LEFT LEFT ALTERNATOR 90 A OVERVOLTAGE RELAY CONN E330 VOLTAGE REGULATORS RIGHT ALTERNATOR Figure 11 81 Alternators Master Contactor and Battery S N PA 31 7752001 to 31 7752193 5 83 3G21 3G22 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 717: ...CLEARANCE SWITCH IS NOT INSTALLED ALTERNATOR INOPERATIVE SWITCH RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT OVERVOLTAGE RELAYS SEE NOTE 3 VOLTAGE REGULATORS CONN 332 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL LIGHTS L ALT INOP NOTES 1 CONN E102 ON LATER MODELS 2 CONN E205 ON LATER MODELS 3 PIN 6 CONN E206 ON LATER MODELS CONN 430 ANNUNCIATOR CONTROLLER RIGHT 5A LEFT ALTERNATOR RIGHT ALTERNATOR Figure11 82 Alternators MasterContactor and Batter...

Page 718: ...N SERVICE MANUAL 44741 LEFT FUEL BOOST PUMP 5 AMP RIGHT FUEL BOOST PU P 5 AMP RIGHT FUEL BOOST PUMP RIGHT LOW FUEL SENSOR Figure 11 83 Fuel Boost Pumps and Fuel Flow Warning S N PA 31 7305001 to 31 7752193 Revised10 5 83 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3H1 3H2 ...

Page 719: ...TY INDICATOR 5 AMP LEFT FUEL BOOST PUMP 5 AMP RIGHTFUEL BOOSTPUMP 5 AMP LEFT FUEL LEFT FUEL BOOST PUMP SEE NOTE RIGT FUEL BOOSTPUMP RIGHT LOW FUELSENSOR NOTE SEE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL Figure 11 84 Fuel Boost Pumps and Low Fuel Warning S N PA 31 7852001 and up 3H3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Revised 10 5 83 ...

Page 720: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 3H4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 721: ... COWL CO PILOTS FLAP INSTRUMENT LTs LTS 17 COMPASS LT MAP LT SWITCH E 309 CONN E 304 CONN E 303 CONN Figure 11 85 Panel Lights S N PA 31 7305001 to 31 7652177 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL L ENGINE R ENGINE FUEL PUMP SW S MAGNETO SWITCHES Revised 10 5 83 3H5 3H6 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 722: ... PANEL LIGHTS 300 CONN RADIO JUNCTION BOX ELECTROLUMINESCENT PLACARD 135 12 5w _ WIRE RP4T USED ON S N PA 31 7762016 AND UP L ENGINE R ENGINE FUEL PUMP SW S MAGNETO SWITCHES Figure 11 86 Panel Lights S N PA 31 7752001 to 31 7852171 Re 10 5 83 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3H7 3H8 ...

Page 723: ...IGHT PILOTS INST LIGHTS NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL AMMETER FUEL QUANTITY LEFT MAP LT SWITCH PANEL LIGHTS 5 AMP LEFT ENGINE RIGHT ENGINE FUEL PUMP MAGNETO SWITCHES SWITCH Figure 11 87 Panel Lights S N PA 31 7952001 to 31 7952250 Revised10 5 83 3H9 3H10 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 724: ...NL IN P PNL IN NOTE 1 WHEN CONNECTIONS R100A R101A ARE USEDREFER TOAVIONICS DWGS COPILOTPANELLIGHTS OVERHEAD MAP LIGHTS LEFT MAP LIGHT CONN R100A SEE NOTE 1 AVIONICS DIMMER CONN R101A SEE NOTE 1 CONTROL NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL E 309B 71131 COPILOTLIGHTS LIGHTS AVIONICS TERM BLOCK PILOT LIGHTS E300 LIGHT DIMMER CONTROL O AVIONICS LTS PL EL POWER SUPPLY TS COPILOT S INST LTS PILOT S INST LT ...

Page 725: ... LIMITSWITCH PIPER NAVAJO SERVICE MANUAL 44741 RIGHT WINGFLAP SELECTOR SW 8 90 70 2 30 10 6 60 0 40 GEAR SOLENOID L102EE GEARUP I NOTE A DIODE INCLUDED AS PER A C SPECS TOLANDING TAXI LIGHTSSOLENOID GEAR SAFETY SOLENOID CONN E314 Figure 11 89 Landinggearand SafetySolenoid Earlier ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Revised 2 18 94 3H13 3H14 ...

Page 726: ...EFT FUELSHUT OFF WARNINGLT FIREWALL FUELSHUT OFF LIMIT SWITCHES I NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 44741 E 300 CONN GEAR SOLENOID GEARDOWNINDICATOR LIGHTS SEE PANEL LIGHTS SCHEMATIC CONN E314 Figure11 90 Landinggearand SafetySolenoid Later Revised 3 31 94 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3H15 3H16 ...

Page 727: ...WITCHES I Figure 11 91 Landinggearand SafetySolenoid S N sPA 31 7952001 to PA 31 8252020 NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 44741 NOTES 1 CONN E101 ON LATERMODELS 2 CONN E103 ON LATERMODELS E 300 CONN GEAR SOLENOID GEARDOWNINDICATOR LIGHTS SEE PANEL LIGHTS SCHEMATIC FUELSHUT OFF WARNINGLT CONN E314 Revised 3 31 94 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3H17 3H18 ...

Page 728: ...01CONN NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICE MANUAL 44741 I PANEL LIGHTS SCHEMATIC GEARDOWNINDICATOR LIGHTS LEFT MAIN GEARDOOR SWITCH CONN E314 Figure 11 92 Landing gear and Safety Solenoid Later S N s PA 31 8252021 and up Revised 3 31 94 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3H19 3H20 ...

Page 729: ...WITCH ON LATER MODELS E302 CONN CABIN UGHTS DOOR AJAR CONN LEFTSIDE READINGUGHTS SWITCHES AFT DOME LTS FORWARD DOME LTS E301 CONN BAGGAGE E312 CONN BAGGAGE CABIN RIGHTMAP LT SW BAGGAGE DOOR LOCK SWITCHES Figure 11 93 Cabin Door Ajar and Fuel Selector Panel Lights S N PA 31 7305001 to 31 7652177 Revised 10 5 83 3H21 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3H22 ...

Page 730: ... NO SMOKING LIGHT FASTEN SEAT BELT LIGHT FASTEN BELTS LIGHT SW E 316 CONN DOME LT SWITCH E 302 CONN CABIN LIGHTS DOOR AJAR RIGHT SIDE READING LIGHTS SWITCHES 4 E 312 CONN E 302 CONN E 300 CONN 1 BAGGAGE COMPT LIGHT MASTER CONTACTOR BAGGAGE DOOR LOCK SWITCHES Figure 11 94 Cabin Door Ajar and Fuel Selector Panel Lights S N PA 31 7752001 to 31 7752193 Revised 10 5 83 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3H23 3H24 ...

Page 731: ...741 AO E302 CONN CABIN LIGHTS DOOR AJAR 00 CONN E316 CONN DOME LT SW AFT DOMELTS E31 E301 CONN LEFTMAP LT SW E312 CONN MASTER CONTACTOR RIGHTMAP LT SW BAGGAGE DOOR LOCK SWITCHES Figure 11 95 Cabin Lights S N PA 31 7852001 to 31 7852171 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Revised 10 5 83 311 312 ...

Page 732: ...ANUAL CABIN UGHTS DOOR AJAR AFTDOME LTS E301 CONN BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT MASTER RIGHTMAP LT SW FUELSELECTOR PANELUGHT BAGGAGE DOOR LOCKSWITCHES Figure 11 96 Cabin Lights S N PA 31 7952001 to 31 8052221 Earlier Models Revised10 5 83 313 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 314 ...

Page 733: ...ABIN LIGHTS CONN OPT I CABIN CONN CONN AFT DOME LIGHT DIVIDER SWI CH RIGHT MAP LIGHT AND SWITCH DOME LIGHT SWI CH BATTERY Figure 11 97 Cabin Lights S N PA 31 7952001 to 31 8052221 Later Models Revised 10 5 83 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 315 316 ...

Page 734: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL CONN E 3028 CABIN LIGHTS CHIMES NOTE 1 SEECHIMESWIRING DIAGRAM Figure 11 98 Cabin Lights S N PA 31 8152001 and up Revised10 5 83 3I7 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 318 ...

Page 735: ...REAS NOTED RIGHTFWD CABIN DIVIDER OPT RIGHTAFT CABIN DIVIDER OPT CONN DOME LIGHT SW E 372 CONN NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL EL319 44741 CABIN DIVIDER OPT AFT DOME LIGHT DIVIDERSW SEENOTE CONN REAR CONN ENTRANCE LIGHT SWITCH CONN E 312B CONN E 373 EXIT LIGHTSW Figure 11 99 Cabin Divider Baggage Compartment and Courtesy Lights S N PA 31 8152001 and up Revised 10 5 83 3I9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3110 ...

Page 736: ...V LEFT TOAMMETER 12W LEFT AND RIGHT OIL TEMP CYL HEAD TEMP INDICATORS OUTBOARD RIGHT RIGHT AUXILIARY FUEL SENDERS OUTBOARD F U E L QUANTITY S E L E C T O RS E 332 CONN RIGHT MAIN FUEL SENDERS E 327 CONN Figure 11 100 Oil and CylinderHeadTemperatureand Fuel QuantityGauges S N sPA 31 7305001 to PA 31 7652177 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Revised 3 31 94 3111 3112 ...

Page 737: ...ONN El02 OUTBOARD RIGHT I LEFT AUXILIAY FUEL SENDERS INBOARD LEFT MAIN FUEL SENDERS SEE NOTE 3 OUTBOARD INBOARD RY OUTBOARD FUEL QUANTITY SELECTORS LEFT TO AMMETER RIGHT AUXILIARY FUEL SENDERS SELECTORS E332 CONN RIGHT MAIN FUEL SENDERS E327 CONN NOTES 1 CONN E204 ON LATER MODELS 2 CONN E103 ON LATER MODELS 3 CONN E102 ON LATER MODELS Figure 11 101 Oil and Cylinder Head Temperature and Fuel Quanti...

Page 738: ...OOST PUMPS FUEL FLOW WARNING FUEL BOOST PUMPS FUEL FLOW WARNING FUEL BOOSTPUMPS FUEL FLOW WARNING PNEUMATIC INDICATORS PNEUMATIC INDICATORS CABIN DOOR AJAR SWITCHES NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL NOSE BAGGAGE DOOR LOCK SWITCH Figure 11 102 Annunciator Controller and Annunciator Panel Lights S N PA 31 7852001 to 31 7952250 Revised 10 5 83 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3115 3116 ...

Page 739: ...TCHES CONN E 430 R BLOWER T BATTERY BATTERY FLOW WARNING FLOW WARNING FLOW WARNING OW WARNING INDICATORS INDICATORS SWITCHES NOSE BAGGAGE DOOR LOCK SWITCH SEE FIGURE 1 FIG1 NOSE BAGGAGE DOOR LOCK SWITCH SN 31 8152001 UP NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 44T41 FOR CONTINUATION SEE THE FOLLOWING DIAGRAMS CONN E 303 ANNUN PANEL Figure 11 103 Annunciator Controller and Annunciator Panel Lights S N PA 31...

Page 740: ...0 44741 59372 NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL SERIAL NOS PA 31 625200 AND UP HOUR METER CONN E101 ON LATERMODELS Figure 11 104 Heater and Blower S N PA 31 8152113 and up Revised 10 5 83 3119 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 741: ...R DE ICER BOOTS BRUSH HOLDER RIGHT ENGINE LEFT ENGINE AMMETER Figure 11 105 Elec Prop Deice VALVE PRESSURE SWITCH PNEUMATIC RELAY SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY EJECTOR VALVE Figure 11 106 PneumaticDeice System S N PA 31 7305001to 31 7652123 3120 Added 10 5 83 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 742: ...URE SWITCH NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL TIMER SWITCH RIGHT 2 STAGE REGULATOR H20CB LEFT 2 STAGE REGULATOR DE ICER CONTROL VALVE N C PNEUMATIC RELAY SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY Figure 11 107 Pneumatic Deice System S N PA 31 7652124 to 31 8052004 Added 10 5 83 3J21 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 743: ...SURFACE DE ICE 5 AMP WING PUSH TO TEST NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL EL35 TIMER Figure 11 108 Pneumatic Deice System S N PA 31 8052005and up 3122 Added 10 5 83 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 744: ...L EL63 74197 SA COURTESY LIGHT TIMER TO DIVIDER SWITCH DOORSHOWN OPEN E312B E316 AFT DOME LIGHT DOME LIGHT SWITCH EXIT LIGHT SWITCH Figure 11 109 Courtesy Lights With Timer Installation S N PA 31 8352001 and up Added 10 5 83 3L23 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 745: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL Figure 11 110 Propeller Synchrophaser S N PA 31 5001to 31 7852037 Added 10 5 83 3I24 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 746: ... LEFT ENGINE FLEX SHAFTS FLEX SHAFT INPUT TO TACHS ON INSTRT PANEL 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 12 VDI II II 12 12 13 13 IN N C REG 28VD COMPUTER WHEN SYSTEM IS OPERATIONAL TEST BOX WHEN CHECKING WIRING HARNESS Figure II III Propeller Synchrophaser S N PA 31 785203 and up Added 10 5 83 3J1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ...

Page 747: ...3J2 THRU 3L24 INTENTIONALLYLEFTBLANK ...

Page 748: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL CARD 4 OF4 PA 31 350 PIPER AIRCRAFT CORPORATION PART NUMBER 761488 4A1 ...

Page 749: ...stingtext andillustrations Changesin capitalization spelling punctuation indexing physicallocation of material or completepage additionsarenotidentifiedby revisionlines Revisions to Service Manual 761 488 issued November 11 1972 are as follows Revisions Publication Date Aerofiche Card Effectivity ORG721111 CR800923 PR810311 PR810824 PR820208 PR821015 PR831005 PR840305 PR840503 IR860429 IR860925 IR...

Page 750: ...1E18 V SURFACE CONTROLS 1H16 AEROFICHE CARD NO 2 VI HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 2A8 VII LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM 2D14 VIII POWER PLANT 2H3 IX FUEL SYSTEM 2K1 AEROFICHE CARD NO 3 X INSTRUMENTS 3A7 XI ELECTRICALSYSTEM 3C8 AEROFICHE CARD NO 4 XII ELECTRONICS 4A9 XIII HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM 4B6 XIV ACCESSORIES AND UTILITIES 4D24 4A3 ...

Page 751: ...e Action Diagramatic Cutaway of Heater to Show Whirling Flame Action 4A I 4A12 4A18 4A 19 4A20 4A21 4A22 4A22 4A23 4B10 4B 14 4B16 4B16 13 5 Left Side View Duct Switch 4B19 13 6 13 7 13 8 13 9 13 10 13 1 13 12 13 13 13 14 Wiring Schematic Vent Blower Power Circuit Heater Power Circuit Spark Plug Fixture Wiring Test Setup Spark Plug Gap Adjustment and Tool Spark Plug Gap Adjustment and Tool Test Se...

Page 752: ...oots 4F7 14 18 Wrinkled Deicers 4F7 14 19 Sealer Application Boot 4F9 14 20 Sealer Application Lead Straps 4F9 14 21 Propeller Blade Low Pitch Position 4F11 14 22 Propeller Blade in Feather Position 4F11 14 23 Pneumatic Deicer System Installation Typical S N 31 5001 to 31 7652123 inclusive 4F19 14 24 Pneumatic Deicer System Installation Typical S N 31 7652124 to 31 7952250 inclusive 4F20 14 25 Pne...

Page 753: ...ation Strobe Sensor Pulse Generator Computer Assembly Fabricated Test Box Electrical Schematics Strobe Sensor Internal Wiring Test Unit Strobe Sensor Simulator 4H 17 4H 18 4H 19 4H20 417 4112 4114 4115 4116 4116 4117 4117 4118 4118 4119 4121 4122 4123 4124 4J9 Patch Cable and Test Terminal Pulse Generator Simulator Synchrophaser Schematic S N 31 7852038 and up Typical Cargo Loading Cargo Loading P...

Page 754: ...sforRepairof PropellerDeicer 4F2 ElectricalResistance 4F8 Troubleshooting Chart PropellerDeicerSystem 4F12 OperatingPressures 4G3 MaterialandSuppliesfor ColdRepair 4G5 Troubleshooting Chart PneumaticDeicerSystem 4G12 Temperature PressureChart 4G15 Aluminum Tubing Torque 4G20 System Vacuum Chart 4G23 Compressor Oil Charge 4H7 Belt Tensions TIO 540 J2BD Engine With Freon Compressor Installed 4H9 Air...

Page 755: ...4 A8 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 756: ...lot s Remote Switch 4A 16 12 10 A ionics Master and Emergency Switch Circuit 4A23 12 11 Description and Operation 4A23 12 12 AutoFlight 4A24 12 13 General 4A24 12 14 Non Piper AFCS Equipment Manufacturers 4 12 15 Piper A F C S Equipment 4B1 CALTION It is veryimportant to never usea substitutetrim systemcomponent part foran original design part because the fail safe characteristics of the s stem mi...

Page 757: ...LATION GARRETT MFG LTD 2 year magnesiumbattery Refer to Figure 12 1 The ELTis located underneath the dorsalfin between sta 304 75 and sta 317 00 a Removethe accesspanel on the dorsal fin b Set the ON ARM OFFswitch on the transmitter to the OFF position c Disconnect the antenna coax from the transmitter d Disconnect the harness to the pilot s remote switch from the transmitter Serial Nos 31 7405153...

Page 758: ... into place o Connect the pilot s remote switchharness to the transmitter SerialNos 31 7405153 and up p Connect the antenna coax to the transmitter q Install the accesspanel on the dorsal fin and secure with appropriate screws Makean entry in the aircraft logbook includingthe new battery run out date NOTE Before installingaccesspanel ascertain that transmitter switch is in the ARM position It may ...

Page 759: ...e antenna coax from the transmitter d Disconnect the harness to the pilot s remote switch from the transmitter e Remove the rear mounting bracket by pulling the plastic knob out Remove the transmitter from the airplane f Remove the two long screws securing the transmitter plain end cap Remove the plain end cap WARNING Ensure that no short circuit of battery terminals can occur g Unsolder red and b...

Page 760: ...attery pack n Insure O ringis fitted and correctly seated in plain end cap o Refit end cap and securewith the two longscrewspreviouslyremoved NOTE Donot overtightenthe two longscrews p Place transmitter into its mounting bracket replace rear mounting bracket by pushing plastic knob into place q Connect the pilot s remote switch harnessto the transmitter r Connect the antenna coax to the transmitte...

Page 761: ...harness and the antenna coax cableto the transmitter 1 Set the ON ARM OFFswitch to the ARMposition NOTE It may be advisableto test the unit operation before installingthe accesspanel SeeParagraph 12 8 m Reinstall the accesspanel previouslyremoved n Makean entry in the aircraft logbook includingthe new battery expirationdate NOTE Inspect the external whip antenna for any damage Avoidbending the whi...

Page 762: ...ced Antenna damagemay cause structural failureof whip in flight 12 8 TESTING EMERGENCYLOCATORTRANSMITTER The transmitter operates on the emergency frequencies of 121 5 and 243 MHz both of these frequencies are monitored by the various FAA installations Before performing any operational test of the ELT the following precautions should be observed CAUTION Testing of an ELT should be conducted in asc...

Page 763: ...t delay before transmissionoccurs e A transmitter which is functioning properly should emit a characteristic downward swept tone f When the test is completed ascertain the transmitter ON ARM OFF switch is in the ARM position WARNING Whenever the unit is checked by moving the transmitter ON ARM OFF switch from the ARM to the ONposition it must then be moved to the OFF position if there is one befor...

Page 764: ...4A17 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 765: ...AGNESIUM BATTERY YELLOW OR WHITE CANADA CASE 2 POSITION SWITCH 5 YEAR LITHIUM BATTERY Figure 12 3 EmergencyLocator Transmitter Schematics Garrett NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICEMANUAL C454 OFF ELT SELECTOR TRANSMITTER ELECTRONICS Reissued 9 23 80 4A18 ...

Page 766: ...ELT SELECTOR SWITCH NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL C455 ELT BUS Figure 12 4 Communications Components ELT Schematic Early Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRONICS 4A19 ...

Page 767: ...ANUAL 2792 CONN R498 POSITION LIGHTS 5 AMP NOTE SERIAL NOS 31 7852001 TO 31 7952164 INCLUSIVE CONN R499 NOTE SERIALNOS 31 7952165 ANDUP Figure 12 5 Communications Components ELT Schematic Later Models Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRONICS 4A20 ...

Page 768: ...NSERVICEMANUAL NOTE SERIAL NOS 31 7852001 TO 31 7952164 INCLUSIVE 2829 CONN R499 NOTE SERIALNOS 31 7952165 ANDUP Figure 12 6 EmergencyLocator Transmitter Schematic Narco ued 9 23 80 4A21 Reissued 9 23 80 ELECTRONICS ...

Page 769: ...W TO EXTEND TO FULL LENGTH Figure 12 7 ELTPortable FoldingAntenna Narco CONTACT PORTABLE ANTENNA BLADE NOT MAKINGCONTACT NOTE ENSURECONTACT SEPARATORIS PROPERLY INSTALLED PER THIS ILLUSTRATION FIXED ANTENNA S CABLE CONNECTOR AND CONTACT SEPARATOR Figure 12 8 ELT UsingFixed Aircraft Antenna Narco Revised 10 15 82 ELECTRONICS 4 A22 ...

Page 770: ...es power from the main Electrical Bus to the 1 and 2 Avionics Busses This circuit is protected by two 50 amp circuit breakers Radio Master 1 and Radio Master 2 on the Main Electrical Bus In the event of a malfunction in the Avionics Master Switch circuit a 50 amp Emergency Switch circuit breaker is provided between the Main Electrical Bus and the 1 Avionics Bus With this circuit breaker engaged po...

Page 771: ...r manufacturers to obtain service direction parts support and service literature Bendix Avionics Division 2100 N W 62nd Street Fort Lauderdale FLA 33310 305 776 4100 TWX 5109559884 Collins General Aviation Division Rockwell International 400 Collins Rd N E Cedar Rapids IA 52498 319 395 4085 Telex 464 421 Edo Corporation Avionics Division Box 610 Municipal Airport Mineral Wells TX 76067 817 325 251...

Page 772: ...ed or if no AutoPilot is installed consult the Piper Pitch Trim Service Manual 753 771 for manual electric pitch trim service information The following is a complete listing of Piper A F C S equipment service literature It is imperative to correctly identify the AutoPilot system by faceplate model name in order to consult the appropriate service manual Each manual identifies the revision level and...

Page 773: ...4B2 THRU 4B5 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 774: ...spection 4B12 13 16 100 Hour Inspection 4B13 13 17 Maintenance Service 4B13 13 18 Removal of Heater 4B13 13 19 Installation of Heater 4B15 13 20 Heater Electrical System Checks 4B15 13 21 Electrical Continuity Check 4 13 22 Vent Blower Power Circuit Check 4B17 13 23 Heater Power Circuit Check 4B17 13 24 Maintenance and Repairs 4B17 13 25 Combustion Air Blower 4B18 13 26 Spark Plug 4B18 13 27 Ignit...

Page 775: ...ecting the Combustion Tube Assembly 13 42 Inspection of Remaining Components 13 43 Testing 13 44 Repair of Combustion Tube Assembly 13 45 Reassembly 13 46 Reassembly of Combustion Air Blower Assembly 13 47 Test Procedure 13 48 General Information 13 49 Equipment Required 13 50 Operational Test 4C9 4C9 4C9 4C 10 4CII 4C15 4C15 4C19 4C19 4C19 4C20 4C20 Reissued 9 23 80 4B7 ...

Page 776: ...n under the heater switchafter the OVER TEMP light goes out An additional scoop mounted on the bottom of the airplane draws fresh air into the cabin through individual vents at each seat Each vent is adjustable for the desired air flow A cabin exhaust outlet is located in the raised floor panel of the aft cabin area The exhaust scoop is located in the lower center section of the fuselage in line w...

Page 777: ...t Ventilating air passes through the heater between the jacket and combustion tube assembly outer surface and through an inner passagein the assembly Consequently ventilatingair comes into contact with two or more heated cylindrical surfaces 13 8 DUCT SWITCH Refer to Figure 13 5 This switch is installed in the ventilating air duct downstream from the heater to sense the ventilating air outlet temp...

Page 778: ...EATER INSTALLATION 4 DEFROSTER OUTLET 5 FRESH AIR OUTLET COCKPIT 6 HEATER DUCT 7 FRESH AIR INLET SCOOP 8 VENTILATION BLOWER 9 VENTILATION DUCT 10 FRESH AIR OUTLET CABIN 11 HEATER DUCT 12 CABIN EXHAUST 13 GROUND VENTILATION FAN OPTIONAL Revised 10 15 82 4 B10HEATING ANDVENTILATINGSYSTEM ...

Page 779: ...UCT VALVE 9 AIR DUCT CONTROL 10 HEATER INLET VALVE CONTROL 11 DEFROSTERAIR CONTROL 12 COCKPIT HEAT CONTROL NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 3259 9 7 6 8 2 Figure 13 1 Heating and Ventilating System cont Aircraft S N s 31 8052131 and up and aircraft having Heater Air Valve Relocation Kit 764 0005 installed Added 10 15 82 HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM 4B11 ...

Page 780: ...asethe ventilating air flow and the heater output An override micro switch is incorporated on the duct switch to override the duct stat at the very last movement of the duct stat arm toward the high position e To stop heater operation turn off the HEATER SWITCH It is desirable to operate the fan several minutes to cool the heater after operation To stop Fan operation turn OFF the HEATER SWITCH 13 ...

Page 781: ...mbly for security of mounting and security of connecting tubing and wiring Tighten any loose electrical terminals and air tube connections g Operate both the combustion air blower and ventilating air blower and check for unusual noise or xibrations h It is recommended that the condition of the spark plug be checked for operation as described in paragraph titled Spark Plug i Evaluate the condition ...

Page 782: ...Y 5 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH 6 OMITTED 7 COMBUSTION AIR INTAKE TUBE 8 COMBUSTION AIR BLOWER 9 VENTILATING AIR BLOWER 10 VENTILATING AIR INTAKE VALVE 11 SPARK PLUG 12 TERMINALSTRIP 13 LIMIT SWITCH 14 CYCLING SWITCH IS HEATER EXHAUST PIPE 16 HOUR METER BL 17 60 Figure 13 2 Heater Assembly and Combination Air Blower Revised 9 24 81 HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM 4B14 ...

Page 783: ...i Connect the duct switch control cable to the switch on the right sideof the air heatdistribution box Adjust the cable so that when the control lever is full against its stop the control arm alignswith the verticalline of the switch Do not loosen the alien set screwthat securesthe arm to the switchshaft Move the lever to the extreme right to ascertain that the control arm on the duct switch willh...

Page 784: ...wing Whirling Flame Action HIGH VELOCITY NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 381A HIGH VELOCITY OLENOID VALVE IR BLOWER HEATED AIR SOLENOID VALVE FUEL INLET FRESH AIR FROM BLOWER SERIAL NOS PA 31 350 73 50104 AND UP Figure 13 4 Diagramatic Cutaway of Heater to Show Whirling Flame Action Reissued 9 23 80 HEATING ANDVENTILATING SYSTEM 4B16 ...

Page 785: ...rminal strip through the combustion air pressure switch to the radio noise filter and onto the combustion air motor also to terminal No I of the overheat switch 3 From terminal No 3 of the overheat switch through the combustion air pressure switch to terminal No 2 of the heater terminal strip 4 From terminal No 2 of the heater terminal strip to the ignition unit to the heater fuel pump and through...

Page 786: ... the airplane c Installation 1 Prior to installing the combustion air blower inspect all parts of the assembly for loose screws loose nuts and poor ground connection on the blower housing Make sure the blower wheel is tight on the shaft and properly located in the housing It should have just enough clearance to rotate at full speed without binding against the outer housing Blower performance is ba...

Page 787: ... NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 424 LOWLIMIT POSITION OVERRIDESWITCH Figure 13 5 Left Side View Duct Switch HEATER SOLENOID Figure 13 6 Wiring Schematic Revised 10 15 82 4 19 HEATING ANDVENTILATING SYSTEM ...

Page 788: ...Figure 13 7 Vent Blower Power Circuit 3252 Figure 13 8 Heater Power Circuit HEATING ANDVENTILATING SYSTEM 4B20 Revised 10 15 82 ...

Page 789: ...n the combustion head assembly as shown in Figure 13 12 Method 1 1 Using a 5 32 inch drill 0 156 or a piece of 5 32 inch rod reach through the opening in the combustion head fuel nozzle location and find the ground electrode It is welded inside the head 2 Move the drill along the side of the electrode on the spark plug side Movement should be from the outer edge towards the center The drill or rod...

Page 790: ...CHINE RD HD AN OR MS 4 40 1 4 IN LONG TYPEII SPARK PLUG INSTALLED IN FIXTURE 1 IN HEX SA E 1112 SCREW STOCK 0640 DIA DRILL CHAMFER 45 x 1 16 NEAR END ONLY THREAD 18MM 1 5MM PITCH S A E SPARK PLUG STANDARD SOLDER NOTE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES DENOTES SILVER SOLDER Figure 13 9 Spark Plug Fixture FILTER RESISTOR TOTAL RESISTANCE A TO B MUST NOT EXCEED 0 3 OHMS Figure 13 10 Wiring Text Set up Revi...

Page 791: ...ctor on the high voltage lead into the spark plug shell press down gently and start the nut on the threads Tighten the nut to 20 foot pounds 6 Operate the heater to check dependability and close all access openings 13 27 IGNITION UNIT This unit converts 28 volt DC to high voltage oscillating current capable of producing a continuous spark in the combustion chamber of the heater This unit remains e...

Page 792: ...ACKET ASSEMBLY 6 COMBUSTION HEAD ASSEMBLY 7 MEASURE 8 GASKET 7 6 4 447 6 00 SLIP FIT 255 DIA HOLE 18 MM THREAD STOCK UNDER CUT 010 MARK WITH 3 387 MATERIAL CAN BE SAE TYPE 303 321 OR 347 ST ST OR ALUMINUM CASE HARDENED P N 55998 2 Figure 13 11 Spark Plug Gap Adjustment and Tool Reissued 9 23 80 4B24 HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM ...

Page 793: ... NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 426 SURFACE COMBUSTION TUBE ASSY JACKET ASSY C490 625 I I PIPE SCRIBE LINE HEATER LABEL MATERIAL 035ALUMINUM Figure 13 12 Spark Plug Gap Adjustment and Tool Revised 2 8 82 4C1 HEATINGAND VENTILATINGSYSTEM ...

Page 794: ...TION When testing an ignition unit do not use a screwdriver as a substitute for a spark plug and spark plug fixture e The high tension shielded ignition lead between the ignition unit and the spark plug is a part of the cover assembly f Arrange the test equipment as shown in Figure 13 10 13 30 OPERATIONAL TEST OF IGNITION UNIT a Close the momentary switch and read the oltmeter and ammeter Release ...

Page 795: ...should be replaced Refer to Paragraph 13 50 m and n for test instructions b Installation 1 Install the limit switch 8 and two spacers gaskets by placing them in position in the heater jacket opening and installing two screws 2 Tighten screws securely then reconnect the electrical leads in accordance with markings made during disassembly If in doubt about electrical connections refer to the wiring ...

Page 796: ... psi as possible Turn clockwiseto increasepressure counterclockwiseto decreasepressure 5 Slowlyvary the inlet pressurefrom 10 to 50 psi The outlet pressure should remain between 7 0 and 8 0 psi 6 With the inlet pressure of 50 3 psi de energizeand energize the solenoid at least twice The outlet pressure should be 7 0 to 8 0 psi with the solenoidenergized Whenthe solenoidis de energized the pressure...

Page 797: ... assemblies from the switch Identify tube connections to facilitate reinstallation CAUTION Exercise caution not to exert excessive bending of the tubes duringremovaland installation procedure 3 Unscrewand remove the combustion air pressureswitch from the fitting on the combustion air inlet tube b Installation 1 Install the combustion air pressure switch 17 by rotating it on the threaded fittingof ...

Page 798: ...e it clears the electrical terminal screws and support bracket when it is moved to the high position 4 Set the micro switch to activate at the very last movement of the control lever arm in the high heat position 5 Operate the heater with the duct switch set above ambient temperature to check operation Refer to paragraph 13 50 for additional switch tests and setting instructions 13 37 OVERHAUL INS...

Page 799: ...ETAP OPEN 6 ADJUSTING SCREW UNDER COVER 7 COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURESWITCH NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 427 AIR SUPPLY 5 7 Figure 13 15 Test Setup Combustion Air Pressure Switch THIS SPACEINTENTIONALLY LEFTBLANK Reissued 9 23 80 4C7 HEATINGAND VENTILATINGSYSTEM ...

Page 800: ... in shroud With open wrench remove fuel solenoid 47 k Reach inside the inlet end of the jacket assembly 1 with a 3 4 inch open wrench to hold the fuel tube fitting at the jacket then remove the elbow fitting 44 nut 48 washer 50 gasket 42 and fuel shroud 1 Remove the two screws and carefully withdraw the nozzle holder assembly 18 from the combustion tube assembly 20 Remove the gasket 49 m Remove th...

Page 801: ...ceptible to damage from mishandling Carefully repeat cleaning process using only a bristle brush and repeated applications of solvent to loosen any stubborn deposits b Use compressed air or lintless cloth to dry the parts unless sufficient time is available for them to air dry c Wipe electrical components with a clean dry cloth If foreign material is difficult to remove moisten the cloth in carbon...

Page 802: ...mmets gaskets etc These items should always be replaced at overhaul Also discard the rope gasket 21 b Inspect all wires and wiring harnesses for damage to insulation damaged terminals chafed or cracked insulation and broken plastic bands Individual wires can be replaced by making up new wires from No 16 AWG stock and cut to correct length It is advisable to use an acceptable crimping tool for inst...

Page 803: ...t the blower fan for broken or bent blades and replace it for either condition 13 43 TESTING The following tests should be performed as outlined in the succeeding paragraphs a Check ventilating air and combustion air motors for correct RPM and current draw 1 Connect motor to 28 volt DC power supply Rotation should be counterclockwise when viewed from the shaft end 2 Both motors should rotate at ap...

Page 804: ...to atmosphereduring the test 4 Make several trials to insure switch reliability Be sure to increase and decrease the air pressure slowlyin order to produce accurate indications 5 If an adjustment is required rotate the adjusting screw clockwise to increase settings and counterclockwiseto decreasesettings d Test the fuel feed and nozzle holder assemblyfor leaksas follows This test can be simplified...

Page 805: ... 7306103 ONLY ONHEATERASSEMBLY NUMBERS 65D79 1 2 and 3 RADIONOISE FILTER IS PART OF IGNITIONUNIT 41 Figure 13 17 Exploded View of Heater Assembly Revised 10 15 82 HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM 4C13 NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL ...

Page 806: ...ZLE HOLDER AND AIR VALVE ASSEMBLY 23 FUEL SPRAY NOZZLE 24 VALVE ASSEMBLY GASKET 25 FUEL VALVE ASSEMBLY 26 PLATE SOLENOID BASE 27 COIL ASSEMBLY SOLENOID 21 O RING 29 SOLENOID COVER 30 BRUSH PLATE ASSEMBLY 31 CAPACITOR 32 MOTOR ASSEMBLY VENT AIR BLOWER 33 BRACKET ASSEMBLY MOTOR 34 FAN VENT AIR BLOWER 35 BLOWER ASSEMBLY 36 GASKET COMBUSTION HEAD 37 COMBUSTION HEAD ASSEMBLY 31 GROMMET 39 SCREW 40 FAST...

Page 807: ...n the end of motor shaft and rotate it until the set screw is aligned with the flat side of the motor shaft Tighten the set screw just tight enough to hold it at this time b Attach the capacitor and leads assembly 31 to the motor bracket 33 with the screw and lock washer Make sure a good electrical ground connection is made at this point Install ground bracket and three new fasteners 40 c Insert t...

Page 808: ...WASHER 13 FLAT WASHER 14 NUT 15 BLOWER WHEEL 16 OUTER HOUSING HALF 17 SCREW 18 BLOWER INLET ADAPTER 19 DUCT SWITCH 20 SWITCH 21 BRACKET ASSEMBLY 22 LEVER SWITCH 23 PLATE SWITCH ACTUATOR 24 MICRO SWITCH 19 NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL Figure 13 18 Exploded View of Combustion Air Blower and Motor Assembly Reissued 9 23 80 HEATINGANDVENTILATINGSYSTEM 4 C16 ...

Page 809: ...ure the proper alignment of spark plug with combustion head Tighten six screws after plugis installed j Insert the fitting on end of nozzle fuel tube through the opening in jacket 1 and attach the nozzle holder to the combustion head assembly 37 with the two screws It may be necessary to placea slight bend in the shrouded fuel tube to permit alignmentof screwholes Besure to use a new gasket 24 k U...

Page 810: ...ENTILATING AIR MANOMETER 9 THERMOMETER 10 OVERHEAT LIMIT SWITCH 11 CYCLING SWITCH 12 EXHAUST OUTLET 13 DUCT 14 DUCT SWITCH 2 25 DIA ORIFICE 3 28 V 12 Figure 13 19 Suggested Setup for Heater Operation Test C490 IGNITION UNIT 16 CYCLING HEATER CIRCUIT COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURESW 202 6 FUEL VALVE R N FILTER Figure 13 20 Wiring Connections for Heater Operation Test Reissued 9 23 80 HEATINGAND VENTILATIN...

Page 811: ...ashers 1 2 b Slide the blower wheel 15 on the motor shaft and tighten the set screw lightly against the flat portion of the motor shaft c Place the outer half blower housing 16 in position on the inner housing half 10 and install screws 1 d Attach the capacitor 7 at the point shown with screws The motor ground lead terminal can be grounded to the motor support bracket 1 e Loosen the Alien set scre...

Page 812: ...n of blowers The combustion air blower and ventilating air blower should operate at full speed with no blower wheel interference If either blower fails to run locate and correct the trouble before proceeding with the test f Connect a voltmeter from open side of combustion air pressure switch terminal to ground to determine if the switch is closed which would be indicated by a full voltage reading ...

Page 813: ...emperature and air flow After the switch shuts off remove ventilating air restriction and switch reset button until it clicks The heater should light and operate o Shut down the heater and check all components visuallyto make sure no damagehas occurred to any of them p Remove heater and other components from the test setup and install it in the airplane in accordance with instructions in paragraph...

Page 814: ...4C22 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 815: ...ficient fuel Low or no current pressure to fuel pump Check operation of pump Fuel lines clogged or Inspect all lines and con broken nections It may be nec essary to disconnect lines at various point to determine where the restriction is located Ignition vibrator Replacevibrator inoperative Check for defective ignition unit Regulator not Check for low pressure operating properly or replace regulato...

Page 816: ...r ground connection Worn motor brushes Blower wheeljammed Usually indicated by hot motor housing Defective radio noise filter Operatecontrol to seeif switch will come on Re place switch if defective Replaceplug Resetgap setting Energizethe heater switch Check and repair wiring Close circuit breaker Replace motor brushes Remove and check the ven tilating air blower wheel and realign if necessary Re...

Page 817: ...r overhaul or replacement of motor Inspect fuel supply to heater including shut off valve solenoid valve fuel pump and fuel lines Make necessary repairs Spark plug partially fouled Replace spark plug CAUTION Do not create spark gap by holding lead to heater jacket Damage to lead and ignition unit will result and operator may receive an electrical shock High voltage leak in lead between ignition as...

Page 818: ...ter starts then goes out Lack of fuel at heater Checkfuel supply through all components fromthe tank to the heater Makenec essarycorrections Inoperativeor chat tering combustion air pressure switch Inoperativeoverheat switch Inoperative cycling switch Low voltage Adjust or replace switch Replaceswitch Adjust or replacethe switch Attach external power I Heater fails to shut off Fuel solenoidvalvein...

Page 819: ...4 D3 THRU 4D23 INTENTIONALLYLEFTBLANK ...

Page 820: ...allation of Aft Oxygen System Charging Valve 14 18 Removal of Pressure Gauge ator ulator r al e Valve 14 19 Installation of Pressure Gauge 14 20 Removal of Outlets 14 21 Installation of Outlets 14 22 Purging Oxygen System 14 23 Cleaning of Face Masks 14 24 Charging the Oxygen Cylinder 14 25 Propeller Deicing System 14 26 Description and Principles of Operation 14 27 Deicer System Operational Check...

Page 821: ... and Wire Harness Balancing Final Electric Check Other Components 14 57 Modular Brush Assembly Replacement for Brush Block Assembly 14 58 Modular Brush Assembly Maintenance 14 59 Timer Test 14 60 Pneumatic Deicing System 14 61 Introduction 14 62 Description and Principles of Operation 14 63 Troubleshooting 14 64 Operational Check 14 65 Electrical Test 14 66 Pressure Leakage Test 14 67 Pneumatic Sy...

Page 822: ...e System for Leaks 4G21 14 97 Leak Check Method 1 4G21 14 98 Leak Check Method 11 4G23 14 99 Evacuating the System 4 G 23 14 100 Charging the System 4H 14 101 Charging Station Method 4H 14 102 Refrigerant Drum Method 4H5 14 103 Compressor Oil Level Check 4H6 14 104 Compressor Service 4H7 14 105 Compressor Removal 4H7 14 106 Compressor Installation 4H7 14 107 Replacement of Compressor Drive Belt 4H...

Page 823: ...f Strobe Sensor S N 31 5001 thru 31 7852037 4111 14 140 Installation and Adjustment of Strobe Sensor 4112 14 141 Removal of Pulse Generator 4113 14 142 Installation and Adjustment of Pulse Generator 4113 14 143 Removal of Computer Assembly 4114 14 144 Installation of Computer Assembly 4114 14 145 Removal and Installation of Glow Lamp and Photo Conductor Assemblies 4115 14 146 Cargo Loading 4121 14...

Page 824: ... with Hat Shelf 14 168 Installation of Divider Panel with Hat Shelf 14 169 Removal of Refreshment Center and Toilet 14 170 Installation of Refreshment Center and Toilet 14 171 Removal of Side Facing Toilet Refreshment Center and Rear Divider with Beverage Dispenser 14 172 Installation of Side Facing Toilet Refreshment Center and Rear Divider with Beverage Dispenser 14 173 Removal of Forward Facing...

Page 825: ...n equipment and take care not to generate sparks with carelessly handled tools 14 6 INSPECTION AND OVERHAUL TIME LIMITS It is recommended that inspection and overhaul be conducted by an FAA Approved Station or the manufacturer Scott Aviation The following checks and chart gives recommended inspection and overhaul time for the various parts of the oxygen system a The oxygen cylinder can be identifi...

Page 826: ...enall adjacentstructuresand are securedin place Alsocheckthecylinderto besureit is securelymounted b Checkthe cylinderfor the ICC identificationnumberandfor the date of the last FAAinspection andtest c If cylinder is completelyempty it must be completelydisassembled and inspectedin an FAA approvedfacilitybeforerecharging d Anylinesthat aredefectiveshouldbe replacedwithfactoryreplacements e Cleanal...

Page 827: ...GH PRESSURE LINE 4 CONTROL KNOB 5 PRESSURE GAUGE 6 OUTLETS 6 7 CONTROL CABLE 8 LOW PRESSURE LINE Figure 14 1 Oxygen System Installation Forward 6 Outlets 1277 8 7 OUTLETS 8 8 OUTLETS 9 101 9 LOW PRESSURELINE 10 LOW PRESSURELINE USED WHEN 9TH 10TH OUTLETS OUTLETSARE INSTALLED Figure 14 2 Oxygen System Installation Forward 8 9 and 10 Outlets Reissued 9 23 80 ACCESSORIES ANDUTILITIES 4E7 ...

Page 828: ...PRESSURE LINE 1278B 1 CONTROL KNOB 5 CONTROL CABLE 9 LOW PRESSURE LINE 2 PRESSURE GAUGE 6 HIGH PRESSURE LINE 10 LOW PRESSURE LINE 3 OUTLETS 8 7 FILLER VALVE ASSEMBLY 11 TEE 4 OUTLETS 9 10 8 OXYGEN CYLINDER Figure 14 3 Oxygen System Installation Aft 6 Outlets Figure 14 4 Oxygen System Installation Aft 8 9 and 10 Outlets Reissued 9 23 80 4E8 ACCESSORIES ANDUTILITIES ...

Page 829: ...ACLES 3 OXYGEN FLOW CONTROL KNOB 4 OXYGEN SUPPLY PRESSURE GAUGE 5 HIGH PRESSURE LINE 6 OXYGEN CYUNDER 7 PRESSURE REGULATOR 8 FILLER VALVE Figure 14 5 Oxygen System Installation S N 31 7752001 and up Reissued 9 23 80 4E9 ACCESSORIES AND UTILITIES ...

Page 830: ...Clampwire bundle every 2 at cross overs NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL Figure 14 5a OxygenTubingInstallations Added 3 11 81 ACCESSORIESANDUTILITIES 4E10 ...

Page 831: ...ent and the cylinder is removed through the outer accessopening CAUTION Verify the cylinder valve is closedprior to disconnectingany lines from the regulator a Disconnectthe control cablefrom the regulator b With linesdisconnected loosenand separate the clamps that hold the cylinderin place c Remove the cylinder from the airplane through the accessopening at the sideof the nose section Usecaution ...

Page 832: ... secure with appropriate screws 14 14 REMOVAL OF FORWARD OXYGEN SYSTEM CHARGING VALVE a Remove the floor panel from the left side at the rear of the forward baggage compartment Verify cylinder valve is closed b Disconnect the tee fitting from the charging valve c Remove the three nuts and bolts holding the charging valve in place and remove the valve through the access door on the outside of the f...

Page 833: ...any length of time Also if the bottle is left at below 200 psi it may develop odors from bacterial growth This will make it necessary to purge the system Use the following procedures a Park the airplane in a NO SMOKING area b Keep all doors and windows open c Be sure all electrical systems are shut off d Connect the oxygen recharging unit to the filler valve e Plug the oxygen masks into the outlet...

Page 834: ...exhausted for leaks pressure Pressuregaugedefective Replacepressuregauge Pressureindication normal Oxygencylinder regulator Replaceregulator assembly but no oxygenflowing assemblydefective Offensiveodors in oxygen Cylinder pressurebelow Purge the oxygensystem 50 psi Referto Paragraph 14 22 Foreignmatter has entered the systemduring previous servicing Reissued 9 23 80 ACCESSORIESANDUTILITIES 4E14 ...

Page 835: ...ted to the propeller has a dull finish whereas the air side finish is glossy Each deicer has a separate lead for the inboard and outboard heater and a third lead which is a common ground These leads are so marked An unmarked ground can be identified by using an ohmmeter across the three possible pairs of leads One pair will show twice the resistance of the other pairs The latter are the hot leads ...

Page 836: ...ammeter alwaysindicates a power lead is shorted to ground Thus when trouble of this nature is found it is vital that the grounded power lead be located and corrected c Aconsiderablenumber of timers that havebeenreturned for repair provedto befullyworkablewhen tested Accomplish the test described in paragraph 14 59before concluding that the timer is defective 14 31 INSPECTION 14 32 50 HOURINSPECTIO...

Page 837: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 392 1 DEICER 2 SLIP RING ASSEMBLY 3 BRUSH BLOCK ASSEMBLY Figure 14 6 Electric 4 WIRING Propeller Deicer Installation Reissued 9 23 80 ACCESSORIES ANDUTILITIES 4E17 ...

Page 838: ...sion Webb Inc CJ10 Limekiln Pike Dresher Pa 19025 2 If uneven wear is found or if wobble is noticed set up dial indicator as shown in Figure 14 11to check alignment of slip rings to propeller shaft g Brush Block Brushes Examine mountingbrackets and housing for cracks deformationor other physicaldamage 1 Testthat eachbrushridesfullyon its slip ringover 360 Figure 14 12showswearpatternif this condit...

Page 839: ...IN SERVICE MANUAL PHASE 1 Figure 14 7 Electrical Diagram Showing Cycle Sequence Phase I DE ICER PHASE 2 Figure 14 8 Electrical Diagram Showing Cycle Sequence Phase II Reissued 9 23 80 4E19 ACCESSORIES AND UTILITIES ...

Page 840: ...eassemblethe brush block to the mounting brackets utilizing hardware removed in paragraph 14 35 a 14 37 ATTACHINGINDIVIDUALBRUSHESTO BRUSHRETAINER a Removethe brush retainer assemblyper paragraph 14 35 b b Compress the springs by pushing the brushes back into the brush retainer assemblyand hold them there by wrappingwith rubber bands c Mark the connector plug with respect to its orientation relati...

Page 841: ...EFTAINSERVICEMANUAL PHASE 3 Figure 14 9 Electrical Diagram Showing Cycle Sequence Phase III PHASE 4 Figure 14 10 Electrical Diagram Showing Cycle Sequence Phase IV Reissued 9 23 80 4521 ACCESSORIES AND UTILITIES ...

Page 842: ... described in paragraph 14 33 fand Figure 14 12 NOTE A brush alignment tool is available Piper P N 762 109 for checking and adjusting brushalignment Refer to Figure 14 15b 14 39 SLIP RINGS 14 40 MACHININGOFSLIP RINGS Sliprings withroughenedor damagedsurfacescan be machinedto restoreto serviceability Removethestarterringgearassemblyfromthe aircraftto mountit in a lathe located concentricallyin the ...

Page 843: ...TER RING GEAR WITH SLIP RING ASSEMBLY Figure 14 11 Typical Use of Dial Indicator BRUSH LOCATED INCORRECTLY ON SLIP RING NOTCH WORN IN BRUSH DUE TO MISALIGNMENT Figure 14 12 Centering of Brushes on Slip Rings Reissued 9 23 80 4E23 ACCESSORIES ANDUTILITIES ...

Page 844: ...d dirt It is vital that surface be clean for good cementing job After last wipe with cleaner quickly wipe surface with a clean dry lint free cloth to remove solvent film b Apply one even coat of 1300L cement Minnesota Mining and Mfg Co to area to be bonded or patched and allow to dry approximately one hour above 40 F Apply second even coat of 1300Lcement and allow to dry c Cut the patch 020 thick ...

Page 845: ...d strap Refer to Figure 14 17 b Place a mark at the hub end of the blade in line with the blade leading edge The location for this mark can be determined by sighting along the leading edge Starting at the hub see NOTE below center the pattern on this mark and stick the pattern to the leading edge Mark the position of the deicer lead strap where it crosses the hub NOTE All deicers on a single prope...

Page 846: ... Ethyl Ketone or Acetone Cleaning Cloth any clean lint free cloth I in Paint Brush 2 in Rubber Hand Roller I 4 in Metal Hand Stitcher Scissors Turco 3 Turco Products Co Masking Tape Amount I pt per six blades I 2 pt per six blades I pt per six blades NOTE MEK can be used instead of Toluol to tackifv cement however tests show that MEK causes rapid drying and provides onlx 10 seconds working time fo...

Page 847: ...ent only 1 16 inch of brush should be allowed to protrude from brush block This is the normal position of the brush when installed on the aircraft NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL A490 BRUSHBLOCKASSEMBLY MODULARBRUSHASSEMBLY X DIMENSION INCHES P N 3E2046 Special NylonSpacer Figure 14 14 Propeller De Icer Brush Assemblies ACCESSORIES ANDUTILITIES 4F3 Revised 10 15 82 ...

Page 848: ...ng instructions be followed exactly to insure maximum adhesion to the propeller blades a When the cement coats are tacky dry on both propeller surface and deicer surface proceed as follows I Position the deicer on the propeller leading edge using centerlines starting from the hub Refer to Figure 14 17 Make sure that the strap willfall in the position previously marked Working towards the tip tack ...

Page 849: ...rushAssembly forwarduntilTemplatemeets SlipRings 4 TightenBrushAssembly andremove Template Figure 14 15a Angle of Contact to Slip Rings Figure 14 25b Brush Alignment Template NEOPRENE PATCH 1300L CEMENT DEICERLEADSTRAP WOODEN BLOCK ORBUCKING BAR MAYBEUSEDWHEN SECTION A A NECESSARY FORSUPPORT A NEOPRENE PATCH CEMENTED OVER EXPOSEDFABRIC Figure 14 16 Repair of Lead Strap Revised 3 31 94 ACCESSORIES ...

Page 850: ...ply one even brush coat of 82 076 1 2sealer or C19861 C 16176 paint oer 125 of an inch of bare metal filled area and 250 of an inch of deicer See Figure 14 19 h Insure that sealer completely covers area between deicier strap and blade See Figure 14 20 Immediately remove masking tape and allow sealer to dry for 24 hours before starting engine 14 51 WRINKLED DEICERS Refer to Figure 14 18 If edge of ...

Page 851: ...CENTER LINE NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 430 PATTERN MASKING TAPE 1 2 Figure 14 17 Installation of Deicer Boots 400 Figure 14 18 Wrinkled Deicers Reissued 9 23 80 ACCESSORIESANDUTILITIES 4F7 ...

Page 852: ... the propeller blades are in the full feather position d If damage occurs to slip ring wire harness rubber spacers or hose clamps replace damaged parts 14 54 BALANCING To assure balance of the propeller assembly the original balancing weights or their equivalents must be reinstalled The weights must be left in their original position on the propeller hub The restrainer and weights should not inter...

Page 853: ...e brushes are not misalignedor damagedby insertion of the paper shim 3 Disconnectthe timer and enginewireharness at any convenientplace d Reconnect any circuits that may have been disconnected or removepaper shimsthat might have been used for makingthe final electricalcheck 14 56 OTHER COMPONENTS Do not attempt internal repairs of the timer ammeter or switch If inoperative these components must be...

Page 854: ...TEST Field experience indicates that too often the timer is considered at fault when the true trouble lies elsewhere Before removing a timer as defective perform this test a Disconnect wire harness at timer and with deicer switch ON check voltage from Pin B of harness plug to ground If system voltage is not present the fault is not in the timer If system voltage is present at Pin B check ground ci...

Page 855: ...RVICE MANUAL 402 DEICER LEAD STRAP PROP DEICER R FORWARD Figure 14 21 Propeller Blade LowPitch Position 403 STRAP RESTRAINER GRAY PLASTIC BONDED TO SHINY SIDE OF DEICER STRAP IN THIS AREA Figure 14 22 Propeller Blade in Feather Position Reissued 9 23 80 ACCESSORIESAND UTILITIES 4Fll ...

Page 856: ...at zero replace the ammeter Open ammeter to timer 4F12 If no voltageinto switch locate and correct open If no voltageat switch output withvoltageat switch input replace the switch If voltageis satisfactory at switch output go to next step Test for voltageup to and out of ammeter If low or zero output and input satisfactory re place ammeter If no voltageto ammeter lo cate and fix open between switc...

Page 857: ...icerlead straps No ground circuit one engine If there is voltageto brush block wireharness plug try voltageat junction of deicerlead and slipring lead If no voltage find and correct openin wiringwithin brush block or no contact of brush to slipring If voltageis found at deicerleads locate and fixopen from deicer to ground Ammeter shows nor mal current part of cycle low current rest of cycle Inner ...

Page 858: ... connection Checkvoltageinto switch Ammeterfaulty Highresistanceup to timer Test for voltageup to and out of ammeter If low or zero output and input satisfactory replace ammeter If no voltageto ammeter locate and fix open between switchand ammeter Checkfor partially broken wire looseor corroded connection in wiringfrom aircraft supply to timer input Ammetershows excess current overentire cycle Amm...

Page 859: ...ated locate and correct Disconnectleads at brush block and with ohmmeter check from power leadsto ground If ground is indicated locate and correct Ground between brush block and deicers Excludingground brush circuit Short between two adjacent circuits Timer faulty If no short existsat brush slipring contact check for ground from slip ring lead to propeller assemblywhileflexing slip ring and deicer...

Page 860: ...ausing original failure has been located and corrected Ammeterflicks between 30 second phase periods Looseconnection between aircraft power supply and timer input If trouble occursover entire cycle trace wiring from powersource to timer input to locate and tighten loose connection Looseor poor connection timer to deicers If trouble occursin part of cycle find which deicersare affected and check fo...

Page 861: ...achine or replace slip ring assembly as required Check slip ring alignment Refer to paragraph 14 39 Refer to Ammeter flicks between 30 second phase periods Try jumper wire across switch if radio noise disappears replace the switch Relocate at least 8 inches away from input wiring to radio equipment Cycling sequence not correct Rapid brush wear or frequent breakage Crossed connections Brush block o...

Page 862: ...ndicator light to indicate phase 2 operation On models with serial numbers 31 7652124 to 31 7952250 inclusive air from both pumps is directed through the normally open dump valve item 9 Figure 14 24 after passing through the ejector Figure 14 24 item 8 Vacuum is created by this action and is applied to all boots under normal operation The actuation of the momentary ON type switch causes the timer ...

Page 863: ... SWITCH 9 CHECK VALVE 10 INSTRUMENT PRESSURE GAUGE 11 DEICER TIMER 12 PILOT DIRECTIONAL GYRO 13 PILOT ALTITUDE GYRO 14 COPILOT DIRECTIONAL GYRO 15 COPILOT ALTITUDE GYRO 16 PNEUMATIC RELAY SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY 17 PRESSURE SWITCH Figure 14 23 Pneumatic Deicer System Installation Typical Serial Numbers 31 5001 to 31 7652123 inclusive Reissued 9 23 804 4F19 ACCESSORIES ANDUTILITIES ...

Page 864: ... SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY 11 MANIFOLD CHECK VALVE 12 INSTRUMENT PRESSURE GAUGE AND SOURCE INDICATOR 13 DEICER TIMER 14 PRESSURE SWITCH 15 PILOT DIRECTIONAL GYRO 16 PILOT ALTITUDE GYRO 17 COPILOT DIRECTIONAL GYRO 18 COPILOT ALTITUDE GYRO Figure 14 24 Pneumatic Deicer System Installation Typical Serial Numbers 31 7652124 to 31 7952250 inclusive Reissued 9 23 80 4F20 ACCESSORIESAND UTILITIES ...

Page 865: ...CTIONAL GYRO PILOT 10 ALTITUDE GYRO PILOT 11 DIRECTIONALGYRO COPILOT 12 ALTITUDE GYRO COPILOT 13 A SYSTEM WING SOLENOIDVALVE 14 B SYSTEM TAIL SOLENOID VALVE 15 MANIFOLD CHECKVALVE 16 PRESSURESWITCH 17 EJECTOR 18 RELAYVALVE 19 EMPENNAGE DEICINGBOOT NAVAJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL Reissued 9 23 80 ACCESSORIES AND UTILITIES ...

Page 866: ...hich leak or fail to inflate and deflate properly Repeat the procedure for the other engine 14 65 ELECTRICALTEST Withenginesoff turn airplane battery switchto ON position a Timer Activate the deicer system switch The timer should begin to operate immediately and complete one full cycleof the system If the timer does not function 1 Reset circuit breaker and recheck 2 Check circuit from power source...

Page 867: ...nnectthe hose clampand removethe hose from the filter 3 Removethe locking nut from the filter line and removethe filter NOTE The filter should be cleaned or replaced as required at each 100 hour inspection Refer to PA 31 350Parts Catalogfor correct part number d Installationof Air Filter 1J1 3 1 Placethe filter in the same position as it was prior to removal and secure with the locking nut 2 Conne...

Page 868: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 421 Figure 14 26 Pneumatic Deicer Boots Operation THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Revised 10 5 83 ACCESSORIES AND UTILITIES 4F24 ...

Page 869: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 4G1 ...

Page 870: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 4G2 ...

Page 871: ... Make checks as follows a Carefully inspect the deicers for evidence of damage or deterioration and repair or replace damaged boots b Resurface boots which show signs of considerable wear or deterioration c Inspect all hose connections which form a part of the pneumatic deicing system Replace deteriorated sections of non kink hose d Check the operation of the boots and the operating pressure of th...

Page 872: ...Cleanthe area around the damagewith a cloth dampenedslightlywith solvent Buff the area around the damagewith 74 451 75 emery buffingstick so that it is moderately but completelyroughened Wipethe buffed area with a clean cloth slightly dampenedwith solvent to remove all looseparticles 2 Select a patch of amplesize to cover the damaged area Apply one even thorough coat of cement Part No 74 451 20 to...

Page 873: ...2in 1 8 in Steel stitcher Emery Buffingsticks BuffingShield This cement willgivebest resultswith the patches in this kit The followingitems may be procured from the B F Goodrich Co Akron Ohio or other manufacturer as required 7445 1 21 74451 22 74451 23 74451 24 FSN8040 6284199 and or FSN8040 514 1880 74451 74 74 451 100 6 ft roll x 6 in wide 15 ft roll x 2 in wide 4 ft longx 8 in wide 1 quart 1 1...

Page 874: ... prevent loosening it Buff the edgesof the adjoiningsurface ply 1 2 inch with 74 451 75buffing sticks taper down to the tan rubber ply Removelooseparticleswith solvent and rag 2 Cut a piece of surface ply material Part No 74 451 23 to cover the damagedarea and extend at least one inch beyond in all directions 3 Maskoff the damagedboot area 1 2 inch largerin length and width than the size of surfac...

Page 875: ...e For final cleaning solventfilm off quickly with a clean dry cloth before it has time to dry NOTE It is permissibleto install deicerson alodined or anodizedsurfaces c Fill gaps of skin splicesthat lead under deicers withsealingcompound EC 801 d Remove the summper plugs from the air connection grommets In some cases it will be necessary to remove sections of doped fabric used to cover the air conn...

Page 876: ...abletubes Rolltrailingedgeswithanarrowstitcherroller CAUTION Avoid excessive soaking or rubbing of the cement which could remove the cement from the surface Remove all masking tapes and clean surfaces carefully with Toluol so that no solvent will run under deicer edges e Apply masking tape to deicer edges where exposed trimmed ends or gaps between sections are to be filled with 3M EC 801 sealing c...

Page 877: ...ds is obtained 14 84 MAINTENANCE Clean deicers when the airplane is washed with a mild soap and water solution In cold weather wash the boots with the airplane inside a warm hangar if possible If the cleaning is to be done outdoors heat the soap and water solution before taking it out to the airplane If difficulty is encountered with the water freezing on the boots direct a blast of warm air along...

Page 878: ...re meters 4 Of the four applicationmethodsmentionedaboveswabbingis the preferredmethod for installed deicerboots If theswabbingmethodis selected plasticorrubberglovesshouldbeusedto preventthestaining of the skin ApplyAgemasterby moisteninga two inchby four inch swab of lint freecloth andtub intothe boot surfacewith smoothuniformstrokes The swab shouldbe kept wet but not dripping Coverthe surface e...

Page 879: ... Twoinchpainbrush c Oneinchmaskingtape d Conductiveneoprenecement No A 56 B B F GoodrichCompany e IsopropylAcetate FederalSpecificationTT 1 720 ascleaningor thinningsolvent f Alternatesolvent Toluolor Toluenemaybeused as analternateforisopropylacetate CAUTION Cements and solvents used for resurfacing are flammable and their fumes slightly toxic Therefore all work should be done in a well ventilate...

Page 880: ...ras required Testor replaceas required Makeelectricaltest Replace as required Blow out lines and inspect connections Make air leakage test Deicers inflate slowly Inflation time 6 seconds Piping lines partially blocked or not connected securely Deicer pump valve not functioning Low air pump capacity Deicer puncture Deicers inflate indicator light does not function Ascertain that deicer boot switch ...

Page 881: ... from the compressorat the right front of the right engine down under andacross the engineto a point on the left side of the fire wall From there through the condenserto the main spar into the wheelwell into the cabin module evaporators The pressure and suction line running approximately parallel The suction line beingthe largerof the two 14 89 CABIN AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION Refer to Figu...

Page 882: ...L UCTION SWITCH FREON PRESSURE SIGHT GLASS 0 RECEIVER VENTILATING DUCT VENTILATING BLOWER TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH EVAPORATOR VENTILATING DUCT Figure 14 30 Air Conditioning Schematic Diagram Reissued 9 23 80 ACCESSORIESAND UTILITIES 4614 ...

Page 883: ...e F High Pressure Gauge Reading p s i 21 15 10 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 45 47 49 52 53 57 62 66 72 86 105 109 113 117 122 126 129 132 134 137 140 144 148 152 156 160 162 165 167 170 172 175 177 180 182 185 187 189 191 193 195 200 205 210 215 220 228 236 260 275 290 Ambient Temperature F 40 50 60 62 64 66 68 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 ...

Page 884: ... the chart indicates It must be pointed out that the actual temperature of the air passingoverthe coilsof the evaporator will be severaldegrees warmer allowing for a temperature rise caused by the loss in the fins and tubing of the evaporator The importance of a seasonal check up of the air conditioning system should be brought to the attention of the customer whenever possible A thorough check of...

Page 885: ...inspection of the system 14 92 PERFORMANCE TEST IN COLD CLIMATES To run a performance test on the PA 31 350 air conditioning in cold climates below 70 F the following procedures will have to be used a Obtain an air blower with the following requirements I 300 cfm at 3 0 H20 static pressure with standard air density of 0765 Ibs cu ft or a Piper recirculating air blower from the PA 3 IP Piper Part N...

Page 886: ...T 4 MAGNETIC CLUTCH 5 SERVICE VALVES 6 FREON PRESSURE LINE 7 CONDENSER 8 FREON SUCTION LINE 9 RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR AND SIGHT GLASS 10 VENTILATING DUCT 11 VENTILATING BLOWER 12 EVAPORATOR 13 EXPANSION VALE Figure 14 31 Air Conditioning System Installation Reissued 9 23 80 ACCESSORIES AND UTILITIES 4G18 ...

Page 887: ...t accurate way to check the condition of the system is by attaching gauges to the system as shown in Figure 14 35 b Alwayswearsafety goggleswhen handlingrefrigerant WARNING One of the most important precautions is protection of the eyes when handling refrigerant Any liquid refrigerant which may accidentally escape is approximately 21 7 F below zero Serious injury could result if refrigerantcomes i...

Page 888: ...ation oil before using Donot overtorque connections Refer to Table XIV X i To insure a consistent sealon all flared and pipe fittings used on the air conditioning system seal the fittings with Loctite refrigerant sealant Sealantshould be appliedonly to the flare surfacesof the flare fittings j Torque all flare fitting in accordance with TableXIV X TABLEXIV X ALUMINUM TUBINGTORQUE MetalTube O D Thr...

Page 889: ...res 14 33 14 34 and 14 35 The center port of the manifold set is used for charging or evacuation procedures or any other service that may be necessary Both the high and low side of the manifold have hand shutoff valves When the hand valve is turned all the way in in a clockwise direction the manifold is closed The pressures on that side of the system will however be recorded on the gauge above the...

Page 890: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 1257 H H DIAGRAM A DIAGRAM B H H DIAGRAM C DIAGRAM D Figure 14 33 Manifold Set Operation Reissued 9 23 80 4 G22 ACCESSORIES ANDUTILITIES ...

Page 891: ...epair is required on the system it is now ready to evacuate in accordance with paragraph 14 99 14 99 EVACUATING THE SYSTEM If the system has been operated in a discharged condition or any time the system has been open to atmospheric pressure the receiver dehydrator must be replaced and the system evacuated to remove any trapped air and moisture which has entered it A vacuum pump capable of pulling...

Page 892: ...AJOCHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 408 HIGH PRESSURE GAGE TO DISCHARGE SERVICE VALVE TO VACUUMPUMPOR REFRIGERANTCYLINDER Figure 14 34 Test Gauge and Manifold Set 409 SCHRADER VALVES Figure 14 35 Leak Test Hookup Reissued 9 23 80 ACCESSORIESAND UTILITIES 4 G24 ...

Page 893: ...old hand valves and continue the evacuation for another 30 minutes j Close both manifold hand valves stop vacuum pump and disconnect center manifold hose from the vacuum pump k Proceed to charge the system in accordance with paragraph 14 100 NOTE The system should be charged as soon as it has been evacuated 14 100 CHARGING THE SYSTEM When the system is completely evacuated in accordance with instr...

Page 894: ...ve and valveat base of chargingcylinderand allowapproximately 1 2 pound of refrigerantto enter cylinder 6 Open valve4 on chargingstation refrigerant control and flush out high and low pressure lines by opening valves1 and 2 momentarilyuntil a white stream of refrigerantis observed Closeall valves b EVACUATING SYSTEM NOTE Be certain system has been depressurized before attempting to evacuate I low ...

Page 895: ...gerant tank Be certain that the top cylinder valveis fully closed NOTE If bubbling occurs in sight glass reopen the cylinder base valve momentarily to equalizedrum and cylinderpressure d CHECKINGSYSTEMFOR LEAKS 1 Open valve at bottom of charging cylinder and allow two pounds of refrigerant to enter cylinder 2 With system evacuated per paragraph b close all charging station valves Open valve 4 refr...

Page 896: ...n access to the receiver dehydrator and sight glass located in the right wheel well 2 Connect a charging hose from the low pressure fire wall fitting Schrader valve to the refrigerant container valve Place the container upright valve on top under the right wing in a position which willmake the container accessiblewhileviewingthe sightglass 3 Operate the right engineat 900 1000 rpm with the aircond...

Page 897: ...ng 3 Close valves on gauge set after system is discharged b EVACUATING THE SYSTEM USING EXTERNAL VACUUM PUMP 1 With gauge set connected per paragraph a and gauge valves open connect the suction line of the vacuum pump to the center outlet of the gauge set 2 Start vacuum pump and pull a vacuum of 26 to 28 inches mercury Continue to operate pump for 25 minutes 3 If 26 to 28 inches vacuum cannot be a...

Page 898: ... per line 3 above 6 Release the refrigerant and again evacuate the system for 5 minutes to be sure all contamination is removed The system is now ready for charging e CHARGING THE SYSTEM FULL CHARGE 1 Determine the weight of the refrigerant container and its heating water and container on a suitable scale The refrigerant container and scale should be located at the rear of the wing or on the left ...

Page 899: ...Refer to Figures 14 38and 14 39 To remove and install the compressor from the air conditioning system without discharging the refrigerant in the system the following procedures should be used a Ensure that the circuit protector is off for the air conditioning system b Remove the cowling from the right engine c Disconnect the electrical leads to the magnetic clutch on the compressor d Fully close b...

Page 900: ...structions given in paragraph 14 104 f With the service valves still closed connect them to the compressor g Close all valves counterclockwise on the charging stand and remove the gauge port cap from the low pressure service valve h Connect the blue low pressure charging line to the low pressure gauge port Refer to Figure 14 39 i Operate the vacuum pump and open both the low pressure control valve...

Page 901: ...essorand alternator belts in their respective grooves and slide fly wheelon the crankshaft Do not adjust belt tensionsat this time i Install propeller Refer to Section VIII j Install the alternator belt Refer to Section XI k Install the compressor belt on the compressorpulley Adjust belt tension Refer to paragraph 14 108 14 108 ADJUSTMENTOF DRIVEBELTTENSION The adjustment of the compressordrivebel...

Page 902: ...of the compressor shaft will force off the rotor pulley assembly without damageto the clutch or compressor CAUTION Do not use a wheel puller on the outer diameter of the pulley Thiscan damagethe pulley groovesor clutch bearing c Cut the lockwire on the four bolts securingthe fieldassemblyagainstthe compressorbossesand removethe bolts washerand field assembly 14 III MAGNETICCLUTCHINSTALLATION Refer...

Page 903: ...onnect the two lines on the inboard side of the condenser NOTE Cap the open lines to prevent moisture and dust from contaminating the system d Removethe screwswhichhold the condenserto the mounting brackets Let the condenserlay in the nacelle e Remove the mounting brackets from the longitudinal bulkheads f Remove the condenser from the nacelle being careful not to bend the fins of the core or dama...

Page 904: ...ocker switch in the OFF position 3 When aircraft or external power is applied with the air conditioner breaker s closed the actuator motor should drive the mechanism clockwise looking inboard to the down position CAUTION If the motor turns in the opposite direction turn off power and check the wiring 4 With the system in the full down clockwise position the length of the actuator arms can be adjus...

Page 905: ... 125 inch of oleo extension 5 Remove airplane from jacks 6 Refer to Chapter 7 for left gear safety switch information 14 116 RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR Refer to Figures 14 38and 14 42 14 117 RECEIVER DEHYDRATOR REMOVAL This unit is mounted on the inboard bulkhead in the right main gear wheel well a Discharge the system of all refrigerant b Disconnect the refrigerant lines at the receiver dehydrator Cap t...

Page 906: ...t and remove the panel e Discharge the system Refer to paragraph 14 101 prior to loosening any fittings f Remove the tape covering the pressure line capillary tube and clamp Remove the clamp Do not kink the capillary tube g Loosenand separate related tube fittings heat fittings to approximately400 degreesto loosen Capall tube ends to prevent contamination of the system NOTE This part is not servic...

Page 907: ...N 3 bolts 2 each end and 2 sheet metal screws attaching the evaporator mounting bracket to the spar cover Lift assembly away Cap tubing ends j Remove expansion valve Refer to paragraph 14 120 k Remove the 8 AN 3 bolts attaching the evaporator core to the mounting flanges On the right evaporator remove the temperature control switch capillary tube which is attached to the top forward side of the ev...

Page 908: ... Each module is equipped with a blowerassembly they differ in that the left one rotates counterclockwiseand the right one clockwise Located in the upper part of the unit module 14 126 a b c d BLOWERMOTORASSEMBLYREMOVAL Removethe dividerpanel Refer to paragraph 14 123 Disconnect the related electricalwires Remove the two screwsattaching the air duct bracket to end panel and disengagethe locking lip...

Page 909: ...mp c Make related electrical connections Left blower rotates clockwise and the right counterclockwise d Check electrical circuits install divider panel and secure I Copilot 2 FWD Dividers 4 Cabin Area 6 Pilot 3 5 Figure 14 43 Air Conditioning Outlets TABLE XIV XIV AIR VELOCITY CHART OUTLET NO Refer to fig 14 43 1 3 4 5 6 FEET PER MIN 2800 2800 2500 2800 1700 1000 14 128 AIR CONDITIONING MODULE 14 ...

Page 910: ...NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL 124 PROBE PILOTS COPILOTS OUTLETS GRILLE VANE CONTROL CABIN OUTLETS PROBE Figure 14 44 Positioning of Airflow Probe ACCESSORIES ANDUTILITIES 4H18 Reissued 9 23 80 ...

Page 911: ...Check your recorded flows against Table XIV XIV c When checking air flows hold the probe from the flow meter perpendicular to and in the center of the outlet Refer to Figure 14 44 B 125 CHECKFORTAPEON BACKSIDEOF DUCTS DUCT NAVAJO CHIEFTAIN SERVICE MANUAL BLOWER Figure 14 45 Sealing of Ducts d Should the air flow at the various outlets be less than the limits given in Table XIV XIV the plenum chamb...

Page 912: ...y Following are some areas of the system which should be inspected to prevent freon leaks a Improper tightening of B nuts is a source of freon leaks An alternate methodof tightening B nuts in lieu of torque values is as follows I Hand tighten B nut move thetube fromside to side while tightening thenut to aidseating thenut and flare to the nipple 2 With the proper wrench tighten the nut 1 4 turn 3 ...

Page 913: ...Clean bugs and dirt from con denser fins Straighten fins if bent Check that capillary bulb is securely clamped to suction line If capillary bulb OK replace expansion valve Check for kinked hoses and stopped up filter Add refrigerant until bubbles disappear Check system leaks Low discharge pressure Undercharge of refrigerant Sight glass shows bubbles or foam Damaged compressor valves or dirt under ...

Page 914: ...show frost Expansion valve inlet screen clogged Inoperative ex pansion valve Valve stuck closed or capillary bulb has lost its charge Add Freon Install new dryer Evacuate and re charge system Remove screen Clean with sol vent and replace Warm capillary by holding in hand If suction pressure does not charge replace expansion valve Restriction any where in liquid line Restric tion will show frost Lo...

Page 915: ...utch coil Clean clutch surfaces of oil Clean with solvent and replace Replace valves with valve kit Remedy Trouble System produces no cooling Electrical Open circuit breaker Reset circuit breaker Broken or dis connected elec trical wire Broken or dis connected ground wire Clutch coil or solenoid burned out or disconnected Check all termi nals for loose connections check wiring for hidden breaks Ch...

Page 916: ...wer motor repair or replace if inoperative Mechanical Loose or broken drive belt Compressor partially or completely frozen Expansion valve stuck in open position Replace drive belts and or tighten to specifications Remove compressor tor service or re placement Replace expansion valve Refrigeration Broken refrigerant line Leak in system Examine all lines for evidence of breakage by external stress ...

Page 917: ...ust have the dehydrator replaced Then the complete system must be purged evacuated and recharged to remove excess moisture System will not produce sufficient cooling Electrical Circulating fan motor sluggish in operation Remove fan motor for service or replacement Mechanical Compressor clutch slipping Obstructed blower passage Insufficient air circulation over condenser coils fins clogged with dir...

Page 918: ...Expansion valve thermal bulb has lost charge Cloggedscreen in receiver Excessivemoisture in system Air in system Rechargesystem until bubblesdisappear in receiverand gauge readingsstabilizeto specifications Purgesystemand re placeexpansion valve Purgesystem replace expansionvalve Purgesystem replace receiver Purgesystem replace receiver Purge evacuate and charge system Replace receiver NOTE When a...

Page 919: ...echanical Loose or exces sively worn drive belts Noisy clutch Compressor noisy Compressor oil level low Circulating fan noisy excessive wear in blower motor 413 Tighten or replace as required Remove clutch for service or replace ment as necessary Check mountings and repair remove compressor for ser vice or replace ment Fill with correct specified oil Remove blower motor for ser vice or replace men...

Page 920: ...velynoisy system cont Refrigeration Excessivecharge in system Lowchargein system Excessivemois ture in system Dischargeexcess freon until high pressuregauge drops within specifications Checksystem for leaks charge sys tem Replacedehydrator purge evacuate and chargesystem Reissued 9 23 80 ACCESSORIESANDUTILITIES 414 ...

Page 921: ...al solenoid on the slave engine governor This control action keeps the slave engine in phase with the rotation of the master engine NOTE S N 31 7852038 and up have a second generator in lieu of the strobe sensor The signals from both generators are supplied directly to the computer for comparison The difference signal is amplified and fed to the goernor solenoid to control the slave engine The pul...

Page 922: ...ondition A test unit should be fabricated to perform the required checks Refer to Figure 14 51 for parts and wiring schematic to fabricate the test unit a Connect an ammeter with a two ampere scale to the meter jack on the front panel of computer amplifier Refer to Figure 14 51 Use a suitable cable and 1 4 inch phone plug to connect to the computer NOTE When fabricating this test box it is advisab...

Page 923: ...ACHOMETER SHAFT 8 STROBE SENSOR S N 31 5001 THRU 7852037 8A PULSEGENERATOR S N 31 7852038AND UP 9 INSTRUMENT PANEL 10 WIREHARNESS 11 DUALDRIVEADAPTER LEFT ENGINE 12 EXISTING TACHOMETER SHAFT 13 FIRE WALL 14 PULSEGENERATOR 15 COCKPIT CONTROL SWITCH 16 CIRCUIT PROTECTOR 17 GOVERNOR 18 SOLENOID Figure 14 47 Synchrophaser Installation 417 ACCESSORIES ANDUTILITIES Reissued 9 23 80 ...

Page 924: ...nd i are met it will confirm that all components are operating h Return the selectorswitchto manual and start the slave RIGHT engine Operate the master LEFT engine at near cruise RPM Set the selector switchto propeller sync position and advance the slaveengine speedslightly over that of the master engine noting the deflection of the voltmeter If it remains to the right decidedly longer than it rem...

Page 925: ...1 350 S N 31 5001 thru 31 7852037 Perform the following checks to isolate any trouble in the electrical components of the system NOTE To perform some of the following checks will require a standard multimeter with a 50 volt ACscale and or other test equipment which can be fabricated from easily obtainable components It is advisable to make the connecting cables long enough to extend into the cockp...

Page 926: ...t is suspectedthat the lamp amplifier in the computer chassis is defective and the computer should be replaced Refer to paragraphs 14 143and 14 144 c Inspect the inside of the computer to ascertain that the circuit boards are secure and that the tang plugsare free of corrosion Also check for any loosewires 3 Strobe sensor a Connect the fabricated strobe sensor tester Refer to Figure 14 53 to the s...

Page 927: ...on The Manual light should come on and the Phase light should go out When the switch is placed in the phase position the opposite should occur 5 If the wiring harness checks good but the Right or Left Engine light or the Coil light does not function properly replace the respective pulse generator or the governor 6 Timing engines with test box connected to the wiring harness rotate the right engine...

Page 928: ...ive unit by securing loosely with hex nut NOTE The front of the strobe sensorcan bedefined by the squarehole in the center of the unit to accept the square end of a tach shaft NOTE Before proceedingany further be certain the magnetoswitchesare OFF b Turn the engine in the direction of rotation to locate No 2 piston at T D C on the ignition stroke Use the enginetiming mark Rotate the enginean addit...

Page 929: ...he generator NOTE On S N 31 7852038 and up a second pulse generator is used in lieu of a strobe sensor in the right engine nacelle and it is removed as is described for the strobe sensor in paragraph 14 139 14 142 INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PULSE GENERATOR Refer to Figure 14 49 a Attach the pulse generator to the dual tach drive by securing loosely with hex nut NOTE The front of the pulse gene...

Page 930: ...baggagecompartment Refer to Figures 14 47and 14 50 a The computer unit is accessiblethrough the nose baggagecompartment b Disconnect the two electrical plugsthat are connected to the computer unit c Remove the three machine screws on the left mounting flange that hold the computer unit to the mounting plate and slide the unit from the mounting plate toward the left sideof the aircraft 14 144 INSTA...

Page 931: ... engine turning at near cruising RPM A pulse generator simulator may be used according to paragraph 14 138and Figure 14 56 d If either of the glow lamps is inoperative the red colored block that holds the lamps must be replaced This is done by removing the three countersunk screws one with an external nut from inside the strobe sensor case and removing the block assembly Install the new one by usi...

Page 932: ... NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 1419 PAC 522 ADJUSTMENTS ZERO CENTER WIRE MUST BE LONG ENOUGHTO REACH FROM COMPUTER INTO COCKPIT NOTE NOT VOLTAGE SENSITIVE Figure 14 51 Fabricated Test Box A207 PHOTO CONDUCTORS STROBE IN SECTION 11 Figure 14 52 Electrical Schematics 4116 Revised 10 5 83 ACCESSORIES ANDUTILITIES ...

Page 933: ... 110 V A C NOTE NOT VOLTAGE SENSITIVE Figure 14 53 Strobe Sensor Internal Wiring Test Unit C464 POT MOTOR STARTS AT APPROX 70 VOLTS JUST AT START OF MOTOR PRESSURE OR DRAIN SHOULD READ 05 FOR SLOT DISK 10 FOR STRAIGHT DISK DC 0 WW 103 CENTRALAB W POTENTIOMETER SPDT A B C D E F AMPHENOL 126 195 MIN HEX PLUG STROBE SENSOR SIMULATOR NOTE NOT VOLTAGE SENSITIVE Figure 14 54 Strobe Sensor Simulator 4I17...

Page 934: ... and Test Terminal c465 PULSE GENERATOR SIMULATOR APPROX 1200 RPM 01 UNIJUNCTION TRANSISTOR MOTOROLA HEP 310 RI 39k 1 2 W 10 RES R2 330A 1 2W 10 RES R3 200k 1 2 W IO RES R4 500 VAR V 500 CRL ADJUST R4 FOR PULSE AMPLITUDE OF 1 5 VOLTS USE OSCILLOSCOPE FOR MEASUREMENTS Figure 14 56 Pulse Generator Simulator Reissued 9 23 80 UTILITIES ...

Page 935: ...RIGHTENG ONLY CONN PS1O3 TO COMPUTER 5AMP WHEN SYSTEM IS OPERATIONAL WHEN CHECKING WIRING HARNESS NOTE THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS FOR REF ERENCEONLY REFERTOWIRINGDIA GRAMS INCHAPTER11FORCURRENT INFORMATION Figure 14 57 Synchrophaser Schematic PA 31 350 S N 31 7852038 and up 4I19 ACCESSORIES AND UTILITES Revised 10 5 83 ...

Page 936: ... operational check Tach shafts and or dual driveunits faulty Pulsegeneratorand glow lamp amplifierin computer not operating Glowlamp or lampsand or photo conductor or con ductors defective Faulty computer Visually check Perform electrical test Replace glow lamp or photo conductor assemblies Perform electrical test Perform electrical test Check tach shafts and dual drive units Refer to operating pr...

Page 937: ...or appropriate weightdistribution A blanket is securedto an extrusion abovethe windowsto protect the interior during cargooperation There are roller assembliesavailablewhich fit on the seat tracks to make handlingof bulky items easy The use of the barriersandprotective devicescan be altered in such a manner that the aircraft could servea dual purpose by converting for mixed cargo and passengeruse ...

Page 938: ...100 10 ALLOWABLE LBS 200 400 1800 900 200 2000 TOTAL 150 EACH MAXIMUM TIEDOWN CAPACITY PER FOOT OF TRACK PERTRACK PERTIE DOWN RING 200 LBS 900 LBS 200 LBS CARGOMUSTBE LOADEDWITHIN THE WEIGHT AND BALANCE LIMITS OF THISAIRCRAFT Figure 14 59 Cargo Loading Placard Reissued 9 23 80 4122 ACCESSORIESAND UTILITIES ...

Page 939: ...4 OUTBOARD BARRIER 13 CARGO ROLLER ASSEMBLY 5 INBOARD BARRIER 14 TIE DOWN RING ASSEMBLY 6 ROLL PIN 15 TIE DOWN RING ASSEMBLY 7 CARGO BARRIER ATTACHMENT FITTING 16 CARGO STRAP 8 BOLT 17 PLACARD 9 CARGO BARRIER TRIM COVER 18 BUSHINGS 2 19 HEADLINER Figure 14 60 Cargo Furnishing Installation Reissued 9 23 80 4123 ACCESSORIES ANDUTILITES ...

Page 940: ...NAVAJOCHIEFTAINSERVICEMANUAL 433 THE USE OF AN UPHOLSTERY NEEDLE MAY AID IN LOCATION OF THE EXTRUSION HOLES Figure 14 61 Location of Extrusion Holes Reissued 9 23 80 ACCESSORIESANDUTILITIES 4I24 ...

Page 941: ... barriers behind the seats d Install the cargo blankets 11 on the curtain tracks and slide in place e Install tie down rings 14 in desired positions and lock in place by turning the threaded ring into the seat track lock holes f Install tie down rings 15 in wedjit holes if required g Install cargo rollers 13 in desired positions h Install cargo loading placard 17 i When cargo is loaded secure carg...

Page 942: ...er panel and remove the third and sixth screwson the metal drawer slidingbracket h Remove the two remaining screwsattaching the right forward cabin divider panel to the top and sideof the cabin and remove the dividerpanel from the aircraft 14 155 INSTALLATION OF FORWARD CABIN DIVIDER PANELS WITH HOT AND COLD REFRESHMENTCENTERS a Attach the right dividerpanel at the top and sideof the cabin with th...

Page 943: ...overingat the top of the table assemblyand loosen the two attachments holding the table to the sideof the cabin c Lift to remove the table assemblyfrom the aircraft 14 160 INSTALLATIONOF EXECUTIVETABLES a Securethe top of the table assemblyto the sideof the cabin with two bolts b Securethe bottom of the table assemblyto the cabin with the quarter turn fastener 14 161 REMOVALOF PASSENGERSEATS a Lif...

Page 944: ...b Pushseat forward so front legslock in keyhole plate on the floor c Pushdown on seat so seat locksin wedjit plate in floor 14 167 REMOVALOF DIVIDERPANELWITHHAT SHELF a Removethe two screwson each end of the strap b Remove the four screwson each end of the shelf bracket and remove the shelf c Removethe screwsholding the brackets and remove the brackets d Removethe three screwssecuringthe bottom of...

Page 945: ...ment center to the divider g Remove the drawer at the bottom right corner of the refreshment center and releasethe wedjit quarter turn quick disconnect fastener attaching the refreshment center to the cabin floor h Remove the refreshment center from the aircraft i Remove the three screws and capnuts attaching the divider panel to the support channel on the cabin floor j Remove the two remaining sc...

Page 946: ...l the forward facing dispenserassembly by securingthe three screws attaching the unit to the divider m Install the thermosesin the forward and aft if installed facingdispenserassemblies 14 171 REMOVAL OF SIDE FACING TOILET REFRESHMENT CENTER AND REAR DIVIDER WITH BEVERAGE DISPENSER a Removethe privacy panel Refer to Removalof PrivacyPanel if installed b Removethe three screwsattaching the rear div...

Page 947: ... Removethe toilet pail retainer panel by removingthe four screwsholdingit in place c Remove the relief tube from the toilet assembly by disconnecting the tube at the relief tube disconnect plate on the cabin floor d Closethe relief tube cover by pushingthe smallmetal knob on the relief tube disconnectplate e Remove the two attaching screwsfasteningthe back of the toilet to the floor f Release the ...

Page 948: ...the refreshment table top up for accessto the one screw that holds the unit to the side of the cabin and remove the screw 5 Slide the unit towards the aisleand disconnect the electricalwires 6 Remove the unit from the aircraft 14 176 INSTALLATIONOF AFT CABINDIVIDERWITHREFRESHMENT COMFORT UNIT a Left Cabin Divider 1 Situate the dividerin placeand securewith the two screwsat the top closethe top doo...

Page 949: ...S 5 3rd AND 4th FWD FACING SEATS 6 FWD CURTAIN DIVIDER 7 PASSENGER SEATS ON TRACKS 8 PLUG IN SEATS 9 EXECUTIVE TABLES 10 PRIVACY PANEL 11 AFT CURTAIN DIVIDER 12 SIDE FACING TOILET 13 TOILET ASSEMBLY 14 FWD FACING TOILET 15 REFRESHMENT CENTER 16 LARGE REFRESHMENT CENTER 17 AFT CABIN DIVIDER WITH REFRESHMENT COMFORT UNIT 18 AFT CABIN DIVIDER WITH HAT SHELF Figure 14 62 Communter Corporate and Execut...

Page 950: ...4J10 THRU 4L24 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for Navajo Chieftain PA-31-350

Hauck ACHTUNG Instructions Manual preview
ACHTUNG
Brand: Hauck Pages: 16
Aveo Engineering Mooney M20 Series Installation Instruction preview
Mooney M20 Series
Brand: Aveo Engineering Pages: 21
Guimbal Cabri G2 Flight Manual preview
Cabri G2
Brand: Guimbal Pages: 156
Gulfstream Aerospace 1978 AA 5A CHEETAH Pilot Operating Handbook preview
1978 AA 5A CHEETAH
Brand: Gulfstream Aerospace Pages: 190
Diamond DA40 NG Manual preview
DA40 NG
Brand: Diamond Pages: 156
DAVINCI GLIDERS Funky2 Manual preview
Funky2
Brand: DAVINCI GLIDERS Pages: 17
Jabiru J400 Owner'S Manual preview
J400
Brand: Jabiru Pages: 64
Aquila AT01-100C Manual preview
AT01-100C
Brand: Aquila Pages: 106
Reely 1542570 Operating Instructions Manual preview
1542570
Brand: Reely Pages: 104
Reely 1435179 Operating Instructions Manual preview
1435179
Brand: Reely Pages: 108
Reely Phonix Plus Operating Intstructions preview
Phonix Plus
Brand: Reely Pages: 112
Grob Acro II Rigging Instructions preview
Acro II
Brand: Grob Pages: 6
Grob ASTIR CS 77 Flight And Maintainance Manual preview
ASTIR CS 77
Brand: Grob Pages: 36
Grob Astir CS G102 Flight Manual preview
Astir CS G102
Brand: Grob Pages: 48
Grob G 109 Flight Manual preview
G 109
Brand: Grob Pages: 62
MT-Propeller MTV-12 Series Operation And Installation Manual preview
MTV-12 Series
Brand: MT-Propeller Pages: 111
Air Creation BioniX 15 Pilot Operating Handbook preview
BioniX 15
Brand: Air Creation Pages: 22
Bruce Goldsmith Design DUAL 2 Manual preview
DUAL 2
Brand: Bruce Goldsmith Design Pages: 37

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands